SIGNA Voyager: Operator Manual

SIGNA Voyager
Operator Manual
SIGNA Voyager
Operator Manual, English
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14
© 2020 General Electric Company
All rights reserved.
This page intentionally left blank.
2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Strong Magnetic Field
Strong Magnetic Field

The magnet produces a strong magnetic field. The MR magnet is always on even when the system is not
acquiring scan data. For details, Security zone.
Figure 2-1: Security zone warning sign
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 i

ii 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Applicable Regulations and Standards
Applicable Regulations and Standards

Medical Device Directive
These products conform with the requirements of council directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices, when they
bear the following CE Mark of Conformity. The year of CE marking given is 2016.
EAC label
Table 3-1: EAC label (CU TR 020 / 2011)
Name Description
“Eurasian Conformity” mark; the single This product passed all conformity assessment
conformity mark for circulation of products on (approval) procedures that correspond to the
the markets of member states of Customs requirements of applicable technical regulations
Union. of the Customs Union.
Ukrainian mark of conformity
Authorized Representative in Malaysia

Authorized representative:GE Healthcare Sdn Bhd
Address: Level 38, NU Tower 2, No 203, Jalan Tun Sambanthan, 50470 Kuala Lumpur Sentral Malaysia
Registration Number: GB6403619-35200
TELEPHONE: +603 2267 1888
FAX: +603 2260 9619
Regulatory Markings-UDI Label

Every medical device has a unique marking for identification. The UDI marking appears on the device labeling.
The following figures are only examples of a UDI marking. The device may have a linear barcode as in Example of a
UDI linear barcode, or a DataMatrix code as in Example of a UDI DataMatrix code, or only alphanumeric identifiers
with no barcode. Also the identifiers vary per product.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 i

SIGNA Voyager Operator Manual
Figure 3-1: Example of a UDI linear barcode
Figure 3-2: Example of a UDI DataMatrix code
Manufacturer:
GE HEALTHCARE (TIANJIN) COMPANY LIMITED
NO.266 JINGSAN ROAD, TIANJIN AIRPORT ECONOMIC AREA,
TIANJIN, P.R.CHINA 300308
Manufacturing Site 1:
GE HEALTHCARE (TIANJIN) COMPANY LIMITED
NO.266 JINGSAN ROAD, TIANJIN AIRPORT ECONOMIC AREA,
TIANJIN, P.R.CHINA 300308
Manufacturing Site 2:
GE Healthcare Manufacturing LLC
3001 West Radio Drive
Florence, SC 29501 USA
For the specific manufacturing site for your system, please refer to the rating plate attached on your system cabinet.

bear the following CE Mark of Conformity (see coil manuals for the year of CE marking given.):
Manufacturer of compatible GE accessory MR coils

GE Healthcare Coils / USA Instruments
1515 Danner Dr.
Aurora, OH 44202 USA
European Representative
GE Medical Systems SCS
283, rue de la Miniere
ii 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

European Representative
78530 Buc
FRANCE
Telephone: +33 1 30 70 40 40
Turkey importer details

GE Medical Systems Türkiye Ltd. Şti.
Esentepe Mah. Harman Sok. No: 8
34394 Şişli-İstanbul Türkiye
Legal notices
GE and the GE Monogram are trademarks of General Electric Company.
SIGNA Voyager is a trademark of General Electric Company.
ASSET, VIBRANT, ReportCARD, INSITE and ILinq are trademarks of General Electric Company.
DICOM is the registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association for its standards publications
relating to digital communications of medical information.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. The equipment may cause radio frequency
interference with other medical and non-medical devices and radio communications. To provide reasonable
protection against such interference, the:
GE MR Systems
comply with emissions limits for (Group 2, Class A) Medical Devices as stated in IEC 60601-1-2. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment is found to cause interference (which may be determined by turning the equipment on and off), the
user (or qualified service personnel) should attempt to correct the problem by one or more of the following measures:
reorient or relocated the affected devices;

increase the separation between equipment and the affected device;
power the equipment from a source different from that of the affected device; and/or
consult the point of purchase or service representative for further suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference caused by using interconnect cables that are not
recommended or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Do not use devices that transmit RF Signals (cellular phones, transceivers, or radio controlled products) in the vicinity
of this equipment as they may cause performance outside the published specifications. Keep the power to these
types of devices turned off when near this equipment.
The medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients, and other people who may
be around this equipment to fully comply with the above requirement.
Immunity/Emissions Exceptions: Note the exceptions from the EMC test results. Check with the business EMC
engineer for this information.
In accordance with the international safety standard IEC 60601-1, this system is:
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 iii

a Class I device
WARNING
To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply mains with protective
earth.
acceptable for Continuous Operation

having ordinary protection against ingress of water (IPX0)
type B and BF applied parts
is not for use in the presence of flammable anesthetics.
Equipment disposal
A WEEE passport report is available from a GE representative upon request.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected separately. Contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer
for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
Indications for use

The SIGNA Voyager is a whole body magnetic resonance scanner designed to support high resolution, high signal-to-
noise ratio, and short scan time imaging. The SIGNA Voyager is indicated for use as a diagnostic imaging device to
produce axial, sagittal, coronal, and oblique images, spectroscopic images and/or spectra, dynamic images, and
parametric maps of the internal structures and organs of the entire body. Body structures for evaluation include, but
are not limited to: head, neck, TMJ, spine, breast, heart, abdomen, pelvis, joints, prostate, blood vessels, and
musculoskeletal regions of the body. Depending on the region of interest being imaged, contrast agents may be used.
The images produced by the SIGNA Voyager reflect the spatial distribution and/or molecular environment of nuclei
exhibiting magnetic resonance. These images and/or spectra when interpreted by a trained physician yield
information that may assist in diagnosis.
WARNING
Read the full prescribing information on the contrast media label before use of contrast media. Use contrast
media only in accordance with Indications and Usage as described in full prescribing information.
iv 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Table of contents
Strong Magnetic Field i

Applicable Regulations and Standards i
Authorized Representative in Malaysia i
Manufacturer of compatible GE accessory MR coils ii
European Representative ii
Quick guides introduction QuickGuide-1

Access videos from MR system procedure QuickGuide-2
Auto Protocol Optimization step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-4
Select a breath hold series QuickGuide-4
Setup graphic Rx scan locations QuickGuide-6
Setup Auto Protocol Optimization QuickGuide-6
Optional: Auto Protocol Optimization Preferences QuickGuide-7
Cube DIR step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-9
Select Cube DIR QuickGuide-9
Position 3D slab QuickGuide-10
Adjust values QuickGuide-11
Save and Scan QuickGuide-13
DISCO step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-14
Select series QuickGuide-14
Position 3D slab QuickGuide-15
Define and check parameters QuickGuide-16
Save and Scan QuickGuide-19
MAGiC post process step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-22
Launch MAGiC post process application QuickGuide-22
MAGiC review session QuickGuide-23
Manipulate MAGiC images QuickGuide-26
Save procedures QuickGuide-26
Exit MAGiC post processing QuickGuide-27
Fluoro Trigger step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-29
Open Fluoro Trigger QuickGuide-29
Set User Control Variables QuickGuide-30
Contrast, Save, Scan QuickGuide-31
Define aorta QuickGuide-32
Visualize Contrast QuickGuide-34
Linking step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-35
Select series to link QuickGuide-35
Establish parameters to be linked QuickGuide-37
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 1

Setup links and scan QuickGuide-39

Auto Navigator Tracker step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-43
Select a localizer task QuickGuide-43
Select a localizer Breath Hold option QuickGuide-44
Select Post Processing QuickGuide-44
Save and Start localizer scan QuickGuide-46
Setup a Navigator scan QuickGuide-47
Save and start the scan QuickGuide-49
Navigator step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-50
Select a task QuickGuide-50
Select Navigator QuickGuide-51
Select the Tracker GRx tool QuickGuide-51
Position the Tracker QuickGuide-52
Deposit slices QuickGuide-53
Define the Navigator parameters QuickGuide-53
Scan QuickGuide-54
Observe/adjust Waveform QuickGuide-54
View images QuickGuide-55
SmartPrep step-by-step picture guide procedure QuickGuide-56
Open Tracker QuickGuide-56
Position Tracker QuickGuide-57
Set User Control Variables QuickGuide-57
Prescribe the imaging volume QuickGuide-58
Fill in Contrast amount QuickGuide-58
Save Rx and Scan QuickGuide-59
Chapter 1: Read me first 1-1

About this manual 1-1
About MR Scanner concept 1-5
Electronic Operator Manual 1-7
Feature List 1-8
Online help 1-22
Online Help concept 1-22
Open/close the manual procedure 1-24
Add a topic to Favorites procedure 1-25
Print a topic procedure 1-26
View a movie procedure 1-27
Search procedure 1-28
User Interface 1-31
System user interface concept 1-31
User interface terminology 1-32
TOC- 2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Header area 1-34
Footer area 1-36
Work areas introduction 1-38
Worklist Manager work area 1-39
Scan work area 1-42
Image Management work area 1-44
Viewer work area 1-50
READY View work area 1-51
MR General Review work area 1-55
System Management work area 1-59
Sessions 1-60
Session introduction 1-60
Preferences 1-61
Preferences introduction 1-61
Set Auto Calibration preference procedure 1-62
Graphic Rx Toolbar procedure 1-64
Set Ready Brain reference line preference procedures 1-65
Save localizers preferences procedure 1-67
Scan parameter details procedure 1-68
Save FTMRA Realtime images procedure 1-69
Show Slices in Graphic Rx procedure 1-70
Automatic table movement procedure 1-71
Anatomical Region menu preferences procedure 1-72
Privacy and security 1-74
Privacy and security introduction 1-74
Intended Use considerations 1-75
Capability considerations 1-76
Network connectivity considerations 1-79
Information protection considerations 1-82
System protection considerations 1-85
Remote Service considerations 1-87
Personal information considerations 1-88
Security vulnerability considerations 1-89
Hazardous situations due to network failures considerations 1-90
Enterprise Audit Trail procedure 1-91
Data Privacy 1-94
Data Privacy introduction 1-94
Activate role based or auto start procedure 1-97
Data Privacy Controlled Access considerations 1-99
Product Network Filters procedure 1-100
User Account procedure 1-102
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 3

Role-based membership procedure 1-104

Password procedures 1-108
Force a user to change password procedure 1-109
Change your password procedure 1-110
Configure HIPAA/EA3 properties procedure 1-112
Local User Procedures 1-113
Add a Local user procedure 1-114
Configure user login procedure 1-115
Change a user's name procedure 1-116
Remove a user procedure 1-117
Add or remove a user from a group procedure 1-118
Lock/unlock a user procedure 1-119
Group procedures 1-120
Add a Local or Enterprise group procedure 1-121
Add users to a group procedure 1-123
Remove a Local or Enterprise group procedure 1-124
Remove a user's group membership procedure 1-125
Configure the Enterprise tab procedure 1-126
Auto Enterprise configuration procedure 1-127
Manual enterprise configuration considerations 1-129
Second Level dB/dt password setup procedure 1-130
Research/clinical mode activate procedure 1-131
Chapter 2: Safety 2-1

Introduction 2-1
Safety Information 2-2
User Training 2-3
Product identification labels 2-4
Indications for use 2-11
Restrictions on use 2-12
Instructions for use 2-13
Contraindications for use 2-15
MR safety standards 2-17
IEC EMC compliance 2-18
Temperature and humidity specifications 2-23
Magnetic fields 2-24
Magnetic field basics introduction 2-24
Static magnetic fields 2-25
Security zone 2-27
Exclusion zone 2-31
Biological effects 2-33
TOC- 4 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Ferromagnetic objects 2-34
Spatial magnetic field data 2-36
Understanding spatial gradients 2-42
The B0 field 2-43
Spatial gradient 2-45
Locations of spatial gradient occurrences 2-47
Field strength and bore comparisons 2-52
SIGNA Voyager MR system for LCCW magnet 2-54
1.5T MR systems for IPM magnet 2-55
Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders for LCCW magnet 2-56
Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders for IPM magnet 2-58
Cryogen and quench concerns 2-60
Gradient Magnetic fields 2-62
Gradient magnetic fields introduction 2-62
Calculate maximum gradient output 2-63
Gradient output limits 2-64
Product maximum gradient output 2-64
Peripheral nerve stimulation 2-65
Acoustic noise 2-68
Electromagnetic fields 2-69
Electromagnetic fields introduction 2-69
Tissue heating 2-70
Contact point heating 2-73
Conductive material heating 2-75
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits 2-76
Clinical hazards 2-79
Clinical hazards introduction 2-79
High risk patients 2-80
Scanning hazards 2-81
Equipment hazards 2-83
Equipment hazards introduction 2-83
Laser alignment lights 2-84
Cables and equipment connections 2-85
Clinical screening 2-88
Clinical screening introduction 2-88
Screening form 2-89
MR compatibility 2-91
Patient emergencies 2-91
Emergency medical procedures 2-92
Patient alert system 2-93
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 5

Emergency stop 2-94

Emergency off 2-95
PDU main breaker 2-96
Magnet rundown concept 2-97
Table emergency release 2-98
Additional warnings and cautions 2-100
Scan and Display introduction 2-100
Scan 2-101
Display 2-111
System maintenance 2-115
System maintenance introduction 2-115
General cleaning and disinfection 2-116
Exhaust fan 2-118
Maintenance services 2-119
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure 2-120
procedures 2-122
Procedures introduction 2-122
Safety checklist 2-122
Protect the security and exclusion zones procedure 2-124
Screen patients and personnel 2-126
Prepare the patient procedure 2-128
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure 2-130
Protect the patient's eyes and ears procedure 2-134
Patient emergencies procedure 2-135
Equipment or environmental emergencies procedure 2-136
Primary magnet rundown procedure 2-137
Secondary magnet rundown procedure 2-138
Magnet cover removal procedure 2-141
Quench with vent failure procedure 2-142
Check cryogen levels procedure 2-143
Handle contact with liquid cryogens procedure 2-144
Safety review 2-145
MR compatibility 2-147
MR compatibility test guidelines 2-147
MR compatibility standards 2-147
Service schedule 2-148
PM service schedules introduction 2-148
MR system PM service schedule 2-149
SIGNA Voyager: Planned Maintenance Plan 2-152
China RoHS label directive 2-154
TOC- 6 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Chapter 3: Equipment 3-1
Startup/Shutdown 3-2
System startup and shutdown introduction 3-2
System startup procedure 3-3
SIGNA Voyager: emergency stop recovery procedure 3-6
Skip system cool down shutdown procedure 3-8
Mobile startup procedure 3-9
System logon procedures 3-11
System emergency logon procedure 3-13
System logout procedure 3-14
Change operating system password procedure 3-16
System restart procedure 3-18
System shutdown procedure 3-20
System Power Off/On procedure 3-24
Emergency shutdown procedure 3-26
TPS reset procedure 3-27
Scan phantom procedure 3-28
SNR test procedure 3-31
System test procedure 3-32
DAQA trend setting procedure 3-33
DAQA messages 3-35
Equipment components 3-39
Equipment components introduction 3-39
Workstation introduction 3-41
Computer concept 3-42
Keyboard concept 3-44
Mouse controls concept 3-46
Equipment cabinet room concept 3-47
Gradient coils concept 3-48
RF coils concept 3-49
Connect coils procedure 3-52
Coil malfunction considerations 3-53
Coil signal non-uniformity considerations 3-54
In-Room Display concept 3-55
In-Room display coil screen 3-58
In-Room display gating screen 3-61
In-Room display patient setup screen 3-63
In-Room display scan time and table location screen 3-65
Setup In-Room display procedure 3-67
Reset In-Room monitor touch screen procedure 3-68
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure 3-69
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 7

Magnet controls introduction 3-70

Magnet controls concept 3-71
Patient comfort procedure 3-75
Patient alert system concept 3-77
Patient alert procedure 3-79
Table concept 3-81
Emergency stop and abort scan buttons concept 3-85
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure 3-87
PAC concept 3-89
Phantom breakage causing spillage considerations 3-91
System specifications concept 3-92
1.5T technical specifications 3-92
Coil List 3-94
TDI coil suite 3-95
TDI introduction 3-95
Safety concept 3-96
Coil configurations concept 3-101
TDI coil workflow 3-103
PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient position procedure 3-108
PA component patient position procedure 3-112
PA, AA, and PVA component patient position procedure 3-114
Two AA components patient position procedure 3-118
Whole body patient position procedure 3-122
System Management 3-126
System Management introduction 3-126
Open System Management work area procedure 3-127
Open the Service Desktop Manager procedure 3-128
Error log view messages procedure 3-129
e-Report procedure 3-130
Legacy Image Converter procedure 3-131
Planned Maintenance procedures 3-133
Raw data save procedure 3-134
Remote service configuration procedure 3-135
Remote software download procedure 3-137
Secure Service Access procedure 3-147
Service Notepad write a message procedure 3-149
TiP Virtual Assist activation procedure 3-150
Guided Install 3-151
Guided Install introduction 3-151
Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code procedure 3-152
Configure MR with the HIS/RIS system procedure 3-154
TOC- 8 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

SPR snap procedure 3-155
Set default protocol library procedure 3-157
Protocol Lockout procedure 3-158
Reset the password procedure 3-159
Patient anonymize settings procedure 3-160
Admin password procedure 3-161
System date and time procedure 3-162
Chapter 4: Patient handling 4-1

Screen patients and personnel 4-2
Patient transfer procedure 4-4
Patient position procedure 4-5
Patient padding 4-10
Padding introduction 4-10
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations 4-11
Surface coil padding considerations 4-12
Whole body padding considerations 4-13
Landmark with the alignment light procedure 4-14
Protect the patient's eyes and ears procedure 4-15
Patient landmark procedure 4-16
Patient return to landmark procedure 4-18
Transfer the patient off the table procedure 4-19
Patient emergencies procedure 4-20
Chapter 5: Scan workflow 5-1

Scan Worklist Manager 5-2
WorkList Manager introduction 5-2
Worklist Manager open work area procedure 5-3
Edit, delete, duplicate a patient procedure 5-4
Delete a patient 5-4
Enter a new patient procedure 5-5
Find procedure 5-7
Patient List control contents procedure 5-8
Refresh data procedure 5-9
Reorganize columns procedure 5-10
Search database procedure 5-11
Sort the patient list procedure 5-12
Scan Session open/close procedures 5-13
Scan Workflow Manager 5-15
Workflow Manager introduction 5-15
Anatomical Region procedure 1 5-16
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 9

Anatomical Region procedure 2 5-18

Anatomical Region considerations 5-20
Add scan sequence procedure 5-25
Add post process task procedure 5-26
Cut/copy/paste/duplicate series procedure 5-33
Move series procedure 5-35
Rename task procedure 5-36
Show future data procedure 5-37
Save exam as protocol procedure 5-38
Scan with AutoBind procedure 5-39
Scan with Auto Paste 5-42
Link series procedure 5-45
Edit link procedure 5-49
Break link procedure 5-51
Scan workflow 5-52
MR workflow concept 5-52
New patient workflow 5-54
Scan with a protocol procedure 5-56
Select a coil procedure 5-60
Auto Coil Select procedure 5-68
Auto coil select considerations 5-70
Scan with multiple coils workflow 5-73
DST procedure 5-76
Auto Protocol Optimization procedure 5-78
Scan the same series procedure 5-83
AutoScan considerations 5-84
Calibration scan procedure 5-85
Auto carry forward contrast procedure 5-87
Stop scan/End exam procedure 5-89
Scan SAR 5-90
SAR and dB/dt considerations 5-90
SAR or dB/dt level change within a scan procedure 5-93
Retain SAR dB/dt levels procedure 5-96
Monitor SAR during an exam procedure 5-97
Scan Sequence Time Optimization procedure 5-100
Create/edit protocol procedure 5-101
Scan procedure 5-102
AutoStart from scan room procedure 5-103
Disable procedure 5-104
AutoView considerations 5-105
Activate procedure 5-106
TOC- 10 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Control volume procedure 5-107
Speed Control procedure 5-108
Fluoro Trigger procedure 5-110
Add a new language procedure 5-111
Record instructions procedure 5-112
Delete a language procedure 5-113
Delete a site message procedure 5-114
Set a language as the default procedure 5-115
Count procedure 5-116
Reset procedure 5-117
Anatomy Specific 5-118
Anatomic procedures introduction 5-118
Breast implant workflow 5-119
Cardiac introduction 5-126
Record gated signals procedure 5-127
Basic cardiac planes procedure 5-128
Aorta plane procedure 5-130
Aortic valve plane 5-131
Cardiac outflow tracts and chambers procedure 5-133
Mitral valve procedure 5-135
Pulmonary valve procedure 5-137
Tricuspid valve procedure 5-139
Leads and electrodes considerations 5-141
Setup the coil procedure 5-142
ECG gated exam procedure 5-143
Peripheral gated exam procedure 5-148
Acquire a 2D FIESTA Shim Volume procedure 5-150
3D Heart workflow 5-154
Ischemic heart workflow 5-160
Left main coronary artery workflow 5-164
Phase sensitive MDE workflow 5-165
Patent foramen ovale workflow 5-169
Right coronary artery workflow 5-171
Ready Brain workflow 5-173
Create links to Ready Brain procedure 5-177
Respiratory introduction 5-179
Respiratory bellows procedure 5-180
Low SAR mode procedure 5-182
Scan AutoView 5-186
AutoView introduction 5-186
Scan AutoVoice 5-187
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 11

AutoVoice introduction 5-187

Scan Contrast/scan timing parameters 5-188
PD/T2 5-188
T1 considerations 5-189
T2* considerations 5-190
Vascular considerations 5-191
Scan Artifacts 5-192
Artifacts tips introduction 5-192
Annefact artifact considerations 5-193
Baseline noise on spectrum considerations 5-195
C-spine Fat SAT (Bulk Susceptibility) uniformity artifact considerations 5-196
DWI and DTI ring artifact considerations 5-197
Gradient Echo Chemical Shift artifact considerations 5-199
In-flow artifact considerations 5-201
Metal artifact considerations 5-203
Non-uniformity of signal artifact considerations 5-204
PROPELLER artifact considerations 5-205
RF Inhomogeneity artifact considerations 5-210
Shading artifact considerations 5-211
Silenz streak considerations 5-212
Star artifact considerations 5-213
Surface coil artifact considerations 5-214
Truncation artifact considerations 5-215
Worm hole artifact considerations 5-217
Scan Prescan 5-218
Prescan introduction 5-218
Auto Prescan considerations 5-219
Manual Prescan workflow 5-220
Center Frequency Coarse adjustment procedure 5-221
Transmit Gain adjustment procedure 5-223
Center Frequency Fine adjustment procedure 5-225
Receive Gain adjustment procedure 5-227
Fat/Water in Prescan procedure 5-228
TI time verification procedure 5-230
Prescan a spectroscopy series procedure 5-231
Spectroscopy Auto Prescan considerations 5-233
Scan Protocols 5-234
Protocol introduction 5-234
Protocol Session procedure 5-235
ProtoCopy procedure 5-236
Create/edit procedure 5-237
TOC- 12 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Save a protocol in scan procedure 5-239
Define protocol as favorite procedure 5-240
Organize Site protocols procedure 5-241
Delete protocol procedure 5-242
Delete series procedure 5-243
Peripheral test protocols considerations 5-244
Open procedure 5-245
Import pre-requisite procedure 5-246
Import procedure 5-247
Export procedure 5-249
Add site information procedure 5-251
Report preferences procedure 5-252
Preview report procedure 5-253
Print procedure 5-255
Scan Protocols IPM 5-256
Imaging Protocol Manager introduction 5-256
Open the Service browser procedure 5-257
Register the scanner procedure 5-258
Notification considerations 5-265
Restore backed up protocols procedure 5-266
Diagnostics procedure 5-268
Logs procedure 5-270
Protocol Notes introduction 5-272
Add text procedure 5-273
Add an image procedure 5-274
Add an image from CD/USB procedure 5-279
Copy/paste notes between series procedure 5-280
Chapter 6: Scan parameters 6-1

Scan Rx parameters 6-2
Scan Rx parameters introduction 6-2
Save Rx consideration 6-4
Prep Scan consideration 6-5
Start a scan consideration 6-6
Scan parameter trade-offs 6-7
3D Geometry Correction considerations 6-8
Acceleration Factor considerations 6-12
Auto IR Band procedure 6-13
Bandwidth consideration 6-14
Calibration in Prescan considerations 6-15
Contrast Amount and Type consideration 6-17
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 13

Distortion Correction consideration 6-18

ETL consideration 6-21
Explicit Rx procedure 6-22
Excitation Mode consideration 6-23
Fat shift direction considerations 6-27
GRE Flip Angle consideration 6-29
Refocus Flip Angle considerations 6-30
Flow Comp Direction consideration 6-32
FOV consideration 6-33
Frequency Direction consideration 6-34
Pause before scan procedure 6-35
Locs per Slab consideration 6-36
Maximum Rescan Time consideration 6-37
Mode selection procedure 6-38
NEX consideration 6-39
No Phase Wrap consideration 6-40
Number of Shots consideration 6-43
Number of Slabs or Slices considerations 6-44
Overlap Locs consideration 6-45
Phase Correct considerations 6-46
Phase FOV consideration 6-47
Phase and Frequency consideration 6-49
Plane selection procedure 6-50
Patient Orientation consideration 6-51
Real Time Center Frequency consideration 6-52
Real Time Field Adjustment consideration 6-56
Recovery Time considerations 6-59
Resolution considerations 6-60
Save Original considerations 6-61
Slice Spacing consideration 6-62
Slice Thickness consideration 6-63
Spiral and 3DASL considerations 6-64
Spokes per Segment considerations 6-65
TE and TE2 consideration 6-66
TI consideration 6-67
TR consideration 6-68
Auto TR procedure 6-69
Scan Graphic Rx 6-72
Graphic Rx introduction 6-72
Toolbar open/close procedure 6-73
Wide bore system considerations 6-75
TOC- 14 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

AIRx™ procedure 6-78
2D procedure 6-83
3D procedure 6-85
Copy/Paste procedures 6-86
Erase GRx or SAT procedure 6-88
IR SAT bands procedure 6-89
Magnifying Glass procedure 6-90
Radial prescription procedure 6-91
Report Cursor procedure 6-92
Shim volume procedure 6-93
Select Series procedure 6-97
Tracker and 3D volume procedure 6-98
Graphic Rx Tools procedure 6-100
Reverse slice order procedure 6-103
Save localizer images procedure 6-105
Show slices procedures 6-107
Show Annotation procedure 6-109
Single Voxel spectroscopy procedure 6-111
PROBE 2D CSI Spectroscopy procedure 6-114
3D CSI Spectroscopy procedure 6-118
DWI PROPELLER and MR-Echo shim volume procedure 6-121
Drag and drop image procedure 6-122
PROBE-P edit procedure 6-123
Show No Phase Wrap procedure 6-125
Show Coil Extents procedure 6-126
Full Annotation procedure 6-127
Scan Saturation 6-128
SAT introduction 6-128
Chemical SAT Pulses procedure 6-129
Spatial SAT procedure 6-132
Copy/Paste SAT procedure 6-134
Scan Filters 6-135
Intensity Filter and Intensity Correction introduction 6-135
Filter considerations 6-140
Add an image filter or intensity correction to a scan series procedure 6-143
Add an image filter as a post-process task in scan procedure 6-145
Run a manual filter task in the Workflow Manager procedure 6-146
Scan Applications 6-147
Applications introduction 6-147
Application annotation 6-149
3DCINE-SPGR and FIESTA: scan procedure 6-150
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 15

4DFLOW: scan procedure 6-154

IDEAL IQ: scan procedure 6-157
IDEAL IQ: display images procedure 6-160
MAGiC 6-162
MAGiC: scan procedure 6-163
MAGiC post process procedure 6-170
MAGiC post process icon procedures 6-173
MAGiC: post process right-click procedures 6-175
MAGiC post process menu considerations 6-183
MAVRIC SL: scan procedure 6-185
MP-RAGE: scan procedure 6-193
MR-Touch concept 6-195
MR-Touch: workflow 6-198
MR-Touch: protocol procedure 6-199
MR-Touch: patient setup procedure 6-202
MR-Touch: scan procedure 6-205
MR-Touch: ROI procedure 6-207
MR-Echo: workflow 6-209
MR-Echo: scan parameters considerations 6-211
MR-Echo: Realtime imaging parameters procedure 6-213
MR-Echo: scan procedure 6-214
MR-Echo: movie or bookmark procedure 6-215
MR-Echo: Scan and Save slice group procedure 6-217
Save MR-Echo images to the database procedure 6-218
MR-Echo copy/paste Rx procedure 6-219
Multi Station: patient preparation procedure 6-220
Acquire a localizer for Multi Station procedure 6-221
Multi Station: setup procedure 6-224
Scan the Multi Station series procedure 6-227
MUSE: scan procedure 6-229
Start a Real Time scan procedure 6-233
Real Time: iDrive Pro Plus Acquire tab 6-234
Real Time: iDrive Pro Plus Review tab 6-239
SmartPrep: patient preparation procedure 6-242
SmartPrep: localizer procedure 6-243
SmartPrep: setup procedure 6-244
SmartPrep: scan procedure 6-246
3DASL: scan procedure 6-248
BRAVO: scan procedure 6-253
BREASE: scan procedure 6-255
Cine IR: scan procedure 6-258
TOC- 16 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

COSMIC: scan procedure 6-260
DISCO: scan procedure 6-261
Acquire a LAVA-Flex scan procedure 6-268
T1MAP: scan procedure 6-271
T1 Map considerations 6-275
Algorithms 6-275
T1 Map measurement units 6-275
READY View protocols that use T1 Map scan data 6-275
T1 Map screens 6-276
T1 Map workflow 6-280
T1 Map optional procedure 6-282
T1 Map scan protocol considerations 6-283
MAGiC: scan procedure 6-285
MAGiC post process procedure 6-292
MAVRIC SL: scan procedure 6-295
Acquire a QuickSTEP scan procedure 6-303
Silent: scan procedure 6-306
Silenz: scan procedure 6-307
PROPELLER Silent Neuro Package and Silent Suite PROPELLER (Quiet): notes and procedure 6-311
T2MAP: cartigram scan procedure 6-314
T2MAP: cardiac scan procedure 6-316
TRICKS: scan procedure 6-318
Scan PSDs 6-320
PSD introduction 6-320
Prescribe and scan a pulse sequence procedure 6-323
Change PSD within a protocol procedure 6-324
3-Plane Localizer introduction 6-325
3-Plane Localizer considerations 6-326
EPI family introduction 6-328
EPI scan parameter selections 6-329
DW and DTI EPI scan considerations 6-334
MAGiC DWI (Synthetic DWI) introduction 6-344
MAGiC DWI (Synthetic DWI) scan procedure 6-346
Diffusion Tensor EPI scan considerations 6-349
FLAIR EPI scan considerations 6-351
Gradient Echo EPI scan considerations 6-352
Spin Echo EPI scan considerations 6-354
FSE family introduction 6-356
FSE scan parameter selections 6-357
FSE scan considerations 6-361
FSE Double and Triple IR scan considerations 6-363
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 17

FSE-IR scan considerations 6-365

FRFSE scan considerations 6-367
FLAIR scan considerations 6-370
Cube and Cube T2 FLAIR scan considerations 6-374
Cube DIR scan considerations 6-378
SSFSE and SSFSE-IR scan considerations 6-380
SSFSE and SSFSE-IR black blood scan considerations 6-383
GRE family introduction 6-387
GRE scan parameter selections 6-389
GRE scan considerations 6-391
Fast GRE scan considerations 6-393
SPGR scan considerations 6-395
Fast SPGR scan considerations 6-397
Fast GRE/SPGR applications 6-399
3D FGRE/FSPGR dual echo procedure 6-400
Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR scan considerations 6-401
FGRE TimeCourse scan considerations 6-403
2D FIESTA scan considerations 6-405
3D FIESTA scan considerations 6-409
3D FIESTA-C scan considerations 6-410
Fast GRE-ET scan considerations 6-412
Fast GRE-ET copy/paste after heart rate change procedure 6-414
FastCINE scan considerations 6-415
2D Single Shot MDE scan considerations 6-417
2D MDE scan considerations 6-420
3D MDE scan considerations 6-422
LAVA scan considerations 6-424
LAVA with Flex Imaging Option scan procedure 6-425
MERGE scan considerations 6-429
VIBRANT workflow 6-431
VIBRANT with Flex Imaging Option scan procedure 6-439
SWAN scan considerations 6-445
PROPELLER family introduction 6-448
PROPELLER scan parameters selections 6-451
PROPELLER T2/FSE resolution comparison 6-459
PROPELLER DW scan considerations 6-460
T2 PROPELLER scan considerations 6-465
PROPELLER T2 FLAIR scan considerations 6-466
PROPELLER T1 FLAIR scan considerations 6-468
PROPELLER considerations 6-472
PROPELLER for extremities scan considerations 6-473
TOC- 18 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PROPELLER anatomy considerations 6-475
Spectroscopy family introduction 6-479
Spectroscopy scan parameter selections 6-482
PROBE-P scan considerations 6-491
PROBE SVQ scan considerations 6-493
PRESS CSI scan considerations 6-495
PROBE 2D CSI scan considerations 6-496
PROBE 3D CSI scan considerations 6-499
PROBE-S scan considerations 6-502
STEAM CSI scan considerations 6-504
TEA-PRESS scan considerations 6-505
Spin Echo family introduction 6-506
SE/IR scan parameter selections 6-507
Spin Echo scan considerations 6-511
Spin Echo flip angle procedure 6-513
Inversion Recovery scan considerations 6-515
Spiral family introduction 6-516
Spiral scan parameter selections 6-517
Hi-Res Spiral scan considerations 6-518
Real time Spiral scan considerations 6-520
Vascular family introduction 6-521
Vascular scan parameter selections 6-523
2D TOF GRE/SPGR scan considerations 6-524
2D TOF FGRE/FSPGR scan considerations 6-526
3D TOF GRE/SPGR scan considerations 6-528
3D TOF FGRE/FSPGR scan considerations 6-532
FastCard GRE/SPGR scan considerations 6-533
2D Phase Contrast considerations 6-535
FastCINE 2D Phase Contrast scan considerations 6-537
Phase Contrast with Cine mode considerations 6-539
3D Phase Contrast scan considerations 6-540
Phase Contrast VENC scan considerations 6-541
FastCINE PC PSD considerations 6-543
Inhance Inflow scan considerations 6-545
Inhance 3D Inflow IR scan considerations 6-547
Inhance 3D Velocity scan considerations 6-554
Inhance Deltaflow scan considerations 6-556
Optimum trigger delay for Inhance Inflow scans procedure 6-563
Scan Imaging Options 6-566
Imaging Options introduction 6-566
Imaging Options annotation 6-568
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 19

Imaging Options procedure 6-570

Flex: build a series in an existing protocol procedure 6-571
Flex: scan a series procedure 6-574
Flex: display images procedure 6-575
IDEAL: build a series in an existing protocol procedure 6-577
IDEAL: scan series procedure 6-579
IDEAL: display images procedure 6-580
Multi-phase: parameter selections procedure 6-581
Multi-phase: manual start procedure 6-584
Navigator considerations 6-585
Navigator: Auto tracker placement procedure 6-589
Navigator: acquire a body scan procedure 6-595
Navigator: acquire a coronary scan procedure 6-607
Acoustic Reduction Technology considerations 6-613
ARC considerations 6-615
ASSET procedure 6-618
Blood Suppression considerations 6-622
CCOMP considerations 6-623
Classic considerations 6-624
DE Prepared considerations 6-626
Extended Dynamic Range considerations 6-627
Fast Recovery considerations 6-628
Flow Compensation scan considerations 6-629
Acquire a Real Time scan with Fluoro Trigger procedure 6-630
Full Echo Train considerations 6-632
HyperBand considerations 6-633
HyperSense considerations 6-636
IR Prepared considerations 6-638
Magnetization Transfer scan parameter selections 6-639
MRCP considerations 6-640
No Phase Wrap considerations 6-641
Phase sensitive considerations 6-642
PROMO considerations 6-643
Respiratory Compensation considerations 6-646
Respiratory Gating/Triggering considerations 6-648
SR Prepared considerations 6-649
Sequential considerations 6-650
Square Pixel considerations 6-651
Spatial Spectral RF considerations 6-652
T1 FLAIR considerations 6-653
T2 FLAIR considerations 6-654
TOC- 20 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

T2 Prep considerations 6-655
Tailored RF considerations 6-656
ZIP considerations 6-657
Scan User CVs 6-659
User CV introduction 6-659
1st Echo TE 6-662
Acquisition Order 6-663
Apodization Level 6-665
Annefact Reduction 6-666
Annefact Suppression 6-667
Turbo ARC 6-668
Arrhythmia Monitoring 6-669
Automatic Water Suppression Optimization 6-671
Background suppression 6-672
Black-Blood prep type 6-673
Black-Blood Slice Factor 6-674
Blurring Cancellation 6-676
Chemical Shift Reduction 6-677
Classic Sequential Ordering 6-679
Collect All Available Echoes 6-680
Cube DIR: Tissue to null 6-681
Cube Enhance 6-682
Cube STIR Enhance 6-683
Center K refocusing flip angle 6-684
Echo spacing 6-686
Echo spacing optimization 6-687
Echo Tuning 6-688
Edge Slice CSF Suppression 6-689
Editable TE 6-690
Enhanced fat suppression 6-691
Enhanced Fine Line Suppression 6-692
Extreme High Resolution Optimization 6-693
Fast Prescan Phase Correction 6-695
Fast Single TR Bipolar Acquisition 6-696
Fat Enhancement 6-697
Fat Saturation Efficiency 6-698
Fat Saturation Uniformity 6-700
FLAIR Inversion 6-702
Flow Quantification Optimization 6-703
FSE T1 Optimization 6-704
Gradient optimization for Diff All 6-706
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 21

Half NEX Enhancement 6-707

Image Acquisition Delay 6-708
In-flow signal reduction 6-709
Integrated Reference Scan 6-711
Invert Slice-selection Gradients 6-712
IR prep pulse type 6-713
K-Space 6-714
Legacy Phase Correction 6-716
Legacy T1 Flair 6-717
Maximum Monitor Period 6-718
Maximum Number of Echoes 6-719
Maximum Number of Slices Optimization 6-720
Magnitude Weighting Mask 6-721
Minimum Acquisitions 6-722
Motion Sensitivity Reduction 6-723
MP-RAGE Mode 6-724
MT Frequency Offset 6-727
MT Pulse Type 6-729
Multiple TR Acquisitions 6-731
NEX Mode 6-732
Noise bias reduction 6-733
Number of ddas 6-734
Number of Interleaving Echo Trains 6-735
Number of Points 6-736
Slices to Discard 6-737
Number of TE Steps 6-738
Nyquist Ghost Reduction Enhancement 6-739
Optimized T2 FLAIR Sequence 6-740
Phase Correction 6-741
Prep pulse 6-742
Ramp Sampling 6-743
Readout Lobe Polarity 6-744
Real Time SAT 6-745
Receiver Gain 6-746
Recon Type 6-748
Reformat Optimization 6-749
Region Fraction 6-750
Restricted Real Time Navigation 6-751
Reverse Loop Order 6-752
RF1 Type 6-753
ROI Edge Mask SAT 6-754
TOC- 22 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Optimized Satgap for SLIP 6-755
SAR Optimization 6-756
SAT Gap 6-757
SAT Playout 6-759
Scan Mode 6-760
Scan Optimization for SAT 6-761
Slice encoding order 6-762
Slice Optimization 6-763
Slice Uniformity 6-764
Percentage of pfkr/Slice Resolution 6-765
Shim Volume Mode 6-766
Scan Abort Threshold 6-767
Spatial SAT Level 6-768
Spatial SAT Type 6-770
Spectral Width 6-772
SPGR Mode 6-773
SPGR Mode for Cine IR 6-774
SWAN phase background removal 6-775
Temporal acceleration 6-776
Total Number of Scans 6-777
Turbo Mode 6-778
Vessel Uniformity 6-780
Chapter 7: Display 7-1

Review Session procedures 7-2
Viewer 7-3
Viewer introduction 7-3
Open Viewer work area procedure 7-5
Viewport control procedure 7-7
On-view (right-click) procedures 7-9
My Tools procedures 7-11
Image Controls procedures 7-14
Add annotation procedure 7-16
Adjust font size procedure 7-18
Change annotation levels procedure 7-19
Active annotation procedure 7-24
Propagate annotation procedure 7-26
Erase annotation procedure 7-27
Image annotation 7-28
Activate matte procedure 7-30
Propagate matte procedure 7-32
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 23

Delete matte procedure 7-33

Measure an area procedure 7-34
Propagate measurement procedure 7-36
Delete measurement procedure 7-37
Activate an ROI procedure 7-38
Propagate an ROI procedure 7-40
Delete an ROI procedure 7-41
Customize Presets procedure 7-42
Adjust W/L values procedure 7-43
Add a slice procedure 7-45
Add all slices procedure 7-46
Add first/last slice procedure 7-47
Add slice interval procedure 7-48
Add slice range procedure 7-49
Remove slices procedure 7-50
Cine: play movie procedure 7-51
Command line type-in procedure 7-53
Color change procedure 7-54
Compare images procedure 7-55
Display Normal procedure 7-56
Erase or Hide objects procedure 7-57
Filter images procedure 7-58
Flip/Rotate images procedure 7-59
Format display procedure 7-61
Gray Scale enhance contrast procedure 7-62
Grid display procedure 7-63
Image selection procedure 7-65
Invert image procedure 7-67
Link/Unlink viewports procedure 7-68
Minimize/Maximize image procedure 7-69
Propagate objects procedure 7-70
Reference Image activate procedure 7-71
Report cursor procedure 7-72
Save localizer viewer procedure 7-73
Scroll images procedure 7-76
Screen layout procedure 7-77
Screen Save image procedure 7-79
Series binding procedure 7-80
Text Page display procedure 7-81
Tick Marks display procedure 7-82
Zoom images procedure 7-83
TOC- 24 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Save State procedure 7-85
READY View 7-87
READY View introduction 7-87
Overview 7-91
READY View work area 7-93
Open/launch READY View 7-97
Open READY View with multiple series procedure 7-101
Open READY View with a single series procedure 7-105
READY View workflow 7-107
Safety introduction 7-109
Safety related software messages 7-109
Safety messages 7-110
General READY View safety messages 7-110
Safety related information 7-110
Map generation 7-111
Protocol specific cautions and safety messages 7-111
Film and save images 7-112
Fused images 7-112
Graphs 7-112
Image Comparison 7-112
Image quality 7-112
Image reliability 7-113
Measurement 7-113
Patient confidentiality 7-113
Software messages 7-114
Process multiple ADC series procedure 7-115
ASL considerations 7-118
Algorithms 7-118
ASL measurement units 7-119
READY View protocols that use ASL scan data 7-119
ASL workflow 7-120
ASL optional procedures 7-121
Brainstat considerations 7-122
Algorithms 7-122
Brainstat AIF measurement units 7-126
Brainstat measurement units 7-127
READY View protocols that use Brainstat scan data 7-127
Brainstat procedure tips 7-128
Optimal acquisition 7-128
Early bolus arrival 7-128
Scan ends early 7-129
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 25

Brainstat GVF workflow 7-131

Optional Brainstat GVF procedure 7-132
Brainstat AIF workflow 7-135
Brainstat AIF Optional procedure 7-136
Dynamic Susceptibility Contrast scan protocol considerations 7-139
Diffusion Weighted Imaging considerations 7-141
Algorithms 7-141
DWI measurement units 7-142
READY View protocols that use DWI scan data 7-142
Diffusion Weighted Imaging workflow 7-143
DWI Optional procedure 7-144
DWI scan protocol considerations 7-147
Diffusion Tensor Imaging considerations 7-148
Algorithms 7-148
DTI measurement units 7-151
READY View protocols that use DTI scan data 7-152
Diffusion Tensor Imaging workflow 7-153
DTI Optional procedure 7-154
DTI scan protocol considerations 7-155
FiberTrak considerations 7-156
Algorithms 7-156
FiberTrak measurement units 7-156
READY View protocols that use DTI scan data 7-156
FiberTrak workflow 7-157
FiberTrak optional procedures 7-160
Fuse tracts with other objects and then hide/show the objects procedure 7-161
Change fiber tract color procedure 7-163
View Main EigenVector procedure 7-166
FiberTrak other considerations/procedures 7-169
Mirror ROI consideration 7-169
Display fiber tract statistics procedure 7-169
Manipulate the FiberTrak image procedure 7-169
Exit READY View procedure 7-169
MR-Touch considerations 7-170
Indications for use 7-170
MR-Touch measurement units 7-172
READY View protocols that use MR-Touch scan data 7-172
MR-Touch workflow 7-173
MR-Touch optional procedure 7-177
MR-Touch scan protocol considerations 7-178
R2Star considerations 7-179
TOC- 26 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Algorithms 7-179
R2Star measurement units 7-180
READY View protocols that use R2Star scan data 7-180
R2Star workflow 7-181
R2Star Optional procedures 7-182
R2Star scan protocol considerations 7-184
T2 Map considerations 7-185
Algorithms 7-185
T2 Map measurement units 7-185
READY View protocols that use T2 Map scan data 7-186
T2 Map workflow 7-187
T2 Map optional procedure 7-188
T2 Map scan protocol considerations 7-190
Spectroscopy considerations 7-192
Algorithms 7-192
Spectroscopy measurement units 7-194
READY View protocols that use spectroscopy scan data 7-194
Spectroscopy workflow 7-195
SVQ spectroscopy workflow 7-205
Adjust voxel correction procedure 7-206
Adjust the ratio procedure 7-208
Adjust the Signal/Noise procedure 7-209
Define a User metabolites procedure 7-210
Show all voxels inside Pressbox procedure 7-211
Display maps on whole image procedure 7-213
Show/hide ROI statistics procedure 7-215
2D ROI procedure 7-217
3D ROI procedure 7-220
Adjust the Voxel shift procedure 7-222
Metabolite display procedures 7-225
Metabolite views procedure 7-226
Set metabolite labels to display procedure 7-227
Adjust metabolites ppm values procedure 7-231
Reports procedure 7-232
Brain CSI scan protocol considerations 7-233
Echo Time (TE) considerations 7-233
TR considerations 7-233
2D spectroscopy considerations 7-233
3D Spectroscopy considerations 7-234
Brain SVQ scan protocol considerations 7-235
Patient setup 7-235
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 27

Localizer 7-235
Single voxel spectroscopy scan parameters 7-235
Auto PreScan considerations 7-236
Breast SVQ scan protocol considerations 7-237
Auto Prescan considerations 7-237
Prostate CSI scan protocol considerations 7-238
Scan parameters 7-238
MR Standard considerations 7-239
Algorithms 7-239
MR Standard measurement units 7-242
READY View protocols that use MR Standard scan data 7-242
MR Standard workflow 7-243
SER considerations 7-248
Algorithms 7-248
SER measurement units 7-249
READY View protocols that use SER scan data 7-249
SER workflow 7-250
General procedures/consideration 7-253
View another series within a Review Step procedure 7-254
PACS Convert Application procedure 7-255
Threshold adjustment procedure 7-256
Set Clip Min & Max threshold values procedure 7-258
Fuse images/maps procedure 7-260
Pixel Values in saved images considerations 7-262
Functional Maps 7-262
Mirror ROI procedure 7-263
EPI correction procedure 7-267
Save as quantitative maps consideration 7-268
Average Protocol procedure 7-271
Ratio AB/CD Protocol procedure 7-273
Protocol Subtraction procedure 7-275
MR General Review 7-277
MR General Review (Volume Viewer) introduction 7-277
Getting Started introduction 7-281
MR General Review work area 7-284
Open MR General Review (Volume Viewer) procedure 7-288
Volume Viewer workflow 7-291
Review Controller considerations/procedures 7-296
Right-click considerations 7-298
Keyboard shortcuts and tips procedure 7-308
Access additional operator manual instructions procedure 7-311
TOC- 28 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Preferences introduction 7-313
Display preferences procedure 7-314
Loading preferences procedure 7-316
Toolbar preferences procedures 7-318
Tools preferences procedures 7-321
Viewports preferences procedures 7-323
Annotations preferences procedures 7-326
Integrated Registration preferences procedures 7-328
Export preferences procedures 7-330
Toolbar introduction 7-332
Toolbar move procedure 7-334
Top level toolbar considerations/procedures 7-337
Mouse Modes Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-339
Measure Annotate Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-340
Visualization Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-343
Segmentation Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-346
Export Toolbar considerations/procedures 7-348
Protocols and Review steps introduction 7-350
Protocol selection work area 7-352
Review steps work area 7-357
Review Manager and layouts work area 7-359
Review step reorder procedure 7-364
Protocol reorder procedure 7-366
Create a protocol procedure 7-369
Rename a protocol procedure 7-372
Save a protocol/review step procedure 7-373
Split layout custom procedure 7-375
Save a layout procedure 7-379
Delete a Protocol or Review Step procedure 7-381
Add a favorite protocol procedure 7-383
Series/images/maps/graphs/tables procedures 7-384
Scroll through the images procedure 7-385
View images in a movie procedure 7-386
Change the image/map in a viewport procedure 7-388
Magnification procedures 7-391
W/L procedures 7-392
Save WW/WL presets for functional map protocols procedure 7-395
Rotate or translate image procedure 7-396
Histogram and cross-section procedure 7-399
Profile graph procedure 7-404
Shutter on cursor procedure 7-406
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 29

Add a series to the study procedure 7-408

Reference image procedures 7-409
Cross-Reference Image procedure 7-411
Summary table procedure 7-412
Workflow introduction 7-418
MRA workflow 7-419
Curved reformat workflow 7-423
Reformat workflow 7-426
Create a merged Volume Rendered view workflow 7-429
Visualization introduction 7-441
Link/unlink procedure 7-442
Link/unlink exam procedure 7-443
Link/unlink series procedure 7-444
Simple oblique procedure 7-445
Multi-oblique procedure 7-446
Color images procedure 7-447
3D color ROI procedure 7-449
Trace procedure 7-451
Multi-Objects procedure 7-453
Volume Rendered basic settings procedure 7-455
Volume Rendered advanced settings procedure 7-457
Multiplanar and 3D procedure 7-460
Integrated Registration procedure 7-462
Measure/Annotate introduction 7-468
Active annotation procedure 7-470
Active graph annotation procedure 7-476
Active graph annotation procedures 7-478
Add annotation procedure 7-480
Add linked annotation procedure 7-482
Create preset annotation procedure 7-483
Arrow procedure 7-486
Deposit a 2D ROI procedure 7-488
Deposit a 3D ROI procedure 7-490
Auto Contour procedure 7-492
Report cursor procedure 7-498
Modify measurements procedure 7-499
Straight distance measurement procedure 7-504
Curved distance measurement procedure 7-505
Measure angle procedure 7-506
Measure volume procedure 7-507
Measurement accuracy considerations 7-508
TOC- 30 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Duplicate or mirror graphics procedure 7-511
Resize/Rotate image graphic procedure 7-512
Remove image graphic procedure 7-513
Segmentation and advanced processing introduction 7-514
Auto select procedure 7-515
Quick vessel trace procedure 7-518
Paint on slices procedure 7-521
Quick paint procedure 7-524
Scalpel procedure 7-525
Threshold procedure 7-527
Advanced processing procedure/considerations 7-529
Remove or keep objects procedure 7-534
Export introduction 7-536
Quick Export procedure 7-538
Export BIP images procedure 7-540
Save an individual image procedure 7-542
Save state procedure 7-543
Save/recall a 3D model procedure 7-545
Save functional maps procedure 7-547
Export a movie procedure 7-549
Batch procedure 7-552
Preview a batch movie procedure 7-558
Create a batch protocol procedure 7-560
Delete a batch film protocol procedure 7-562
Chapter 8: Image Management 8-1

Film 8-2
Film introduction 8-2
Film methods 8-3
F1 film an image procedure 8-4
F2 film page procedure 8-5
F3 film multiple image displays procedure 8-6
Film series procedure 8-7
Drag and drop procedure 8-8
Delete image procedure 8-9
Film Text Page procedure 8-10
Configure (add) a printer procedure 8-11
Film hide/show procedure 8-13
View film status procedure 8-14
Patient List 8-15
Patient list/browser introduction 8-15
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 31

Image Management open work area procedure 8-16

Series type considerations 8-17
Find exam procedure 8-18
Sort list procedure 8-19
Filter list procedure 8-20
Remove filter procedure 8-21
Refresh database procedure 8-22
Adjust images procedure 8-23
Keyboard shortcuts procedure 8-25
Remove images procedure 8-26
Size exam/series/image areas procedure 8-27
Series numbering considerations 8-28
View remote browser procedure 8-32
Empty contents procedure 8-34
Retrieve images procedure 8-35
Permanently delete exams/series procedure 8-36
Archive/Network 8-37
Archive/Network introduction 8-37
Auto send procedure 8-38
Set the Auto Archive node for the current exam procedure 8-40
Selective auto send by series procedure 8-42
Manual send procedure 8-44
Local DB retrieve images procedure 8-46
GSPS series procedure 8-48
Auto send procedure 8-49
Set the Auto Network node for the system procedure 8-51
Check the network history procedure 8-52
Specifications considerations 8-53
Configure host procedure 8-59
Define a host or node procedure 8-61
View backlog/queue procedure 8-62
Compatibility considerations 8-63
How to handle CD/DVDs procedure 8-64
Save images procedure 8-65
Restore images procedure 8-69
Detach a device procedure 8-70
View images on PC or laptop procedure 8-71
Display a DICOM header procedure 8-77
DICOM compatibility between GE MR systems considerations 8-78
Data Applications 8-79
Image Management Data Applications introduction 8-79
TOC- 32 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Work area open/close procedure 8-80
Work area resize procedure 8-81
Edit Patient Data procedure 8-82
Edit Patient Data into multiple exams procedure 8-84
Compose a report procedure 8-88
Delete items from the Data Export tab procedure 8-89
Export a report procedure 8-90
View a report on a PC procedure 8-92
ViosWorks send data procedure 8-94
Session Applications 8-98
Image Management Session Applications introduction 8-98
Data Selector procedures 8-99
Multiple exams in Viewer procedure 8-100
AutoBind procedure 8-101
Add/Subtract images procedure 8-105
Add/Subtract bind images procedure 8-107
Add/subtract extract minimum/maximum pixel values procedure 8-108
Pasting procedure 8-109
Pasting image manipulation procedure 8-113
Synthetic DWI workflow 8-117
Flow Analysis procedure 8-119
Tools applications 8-121
Image Management Tools Applications introduction 8-121
Application Selection reorder list procedure 8-122
Patient anonymize procedure 8-123
CIET extract images procedure 8-124
Chapter 9: Appendix APPX-1

MR terminology APPX-1
Glossary Glossary-1
Index Index-1
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 33

TOC- 34 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Quick guides introduction

Click the icons to link to the step-by-step quick guide.
Flouro Trigger Auto Protocol Optimization Linking
Navigator Auto Navigator Tracker placement MAGiC
Smart Prep DISCO Cube DIR
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 QuickGuide-1

QU ICK GU IDES
Access videos from MR system procedure

Use these steps to launch a video from the Protocol Notes on your MR system and to copy/paste a protocol from the
GE protocol note to your own protocol note. The video series is not optimized for scanning, therefore only use the
video series to launch the video.
1. To view the Protocol screen in scan, from the Workflow Manager, click Add a task > Add a Sequence.
2. Click GE to view the GE library.
3. Click the Template tab.
4. Click Quick Guide Training Videos to view the list of available videos.
Figure 5-1: Protocol screen
5. Click the desired video series.

6. Click the arrow to move the video to the multi-protocol basket.
7. Click Accept.
8. From the Workflow Manager, select the video series and click Setup.
9. Click the Protocol Notes tab in the lower right corner of the system screen.
QuickGuide-2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Access videos from MR system procedure
10. Click the link in the Protocol Notes to launch the video.
The Mozilla browser opens and the video is launched. If the browser is already open, a new tab appears on
the browser and the video is launched.
For video viewing details, see View a movie procedure.
11. To copy/paste the link to your own protocol, follow these steps:
a. Left-click and drag the link to highlight or select it.
b. With the link highlighted, press Ctrl + C to copy the link.
c. Navigate to the desired protocol note.
d. Place the cursor in the location where you want the link and press Ctrl + V to paste the link.
Related topics

QU ICK GU IDES
Auto Protocol Optimization step-by-step

picture guide procedure
An Auto Protocol Optimization video can be viewed from the Protocol
Notes. For details, see Access videos from MR system procedure.
Select a breath hold series

Select a breath hold series
1. From the Workflow Manager, select a breath hold series compatible

with Auto Protocol optimization.
l 3D applications: LAVA, LAVA-Flex, Dual Echo, FRFSE with
MRCP Imaging Option, IDEAL IQ, DISCO
l 2D applications: Fast SPGR, Dual Echo, FIESTA, SSFSE, FRFSE, FSE, DWI
EPI
2. Click Setup.

Setup graphic Rx scan locations
1. From the Scan Parameter's screen, click GRx.

2. Setup the scan locations on the localizer images.
Setup Auto Protocol Optimization
1. From the Scan Parameter screen, click Auto Protocol Optimization

icon.

Optional: Auto Protocol Optimization Preferences
l The button is activated once all parameters are filled and Save Rx
button is activated.
l The scan time or breath hold time must be less than 30 seconds
before the button is activated.
l Base conditions that enable Auto Protocol Optimization, please see
operator manual in details.
2. From the Auto Protocol Optimization screen, review the content of
each button and click the option that best meets the clinical needs.
l The middle button represents the original parameters of the protocol.
l The buttons left of center represent shorter scan time protocol.
l The buttons right of center represent longer scan time protocol.
3. Click the Auto Protocol Optimization button that best meets the
clinical needs.
4. Optional: Click Close to check which scan parameters have changed
based on your Auto Protocol.
5. Click Save Rx > Scan.
Optional: Auto Protocol Optimization Preferences

Prior to scanning the series, consider viewing the Auto Protocol
Optimization Preferences.
1. From the Auto Protocol Optimization screen, click Preferences.

2. From the Protocol Optimization Preferences screen, select the best

rules to create the protocols.
l Scan time interval: determines the differences in scan time or breath
hold time between the optimized buttons.
l Spatial Resolution Change: Slice Thickness, Spacing, and number of
slices from the original protocol are kept on each button when In-
Plane is selected. Frequency and Phase Matrix are kept when Slice
Thickness is selected. All of those parameters will be modified when
In-Plane and Slice Thickness is selected
l ARC/ASSET Automatic Acceleration Allowed: When Disable is
selected, the system does not control acceleration factor. When
Enable is selected, the system controls the Acceleration factor.
3. Click Accept to close the Protocol Optimization Preferences screen.
l The selections are kept as a part of the protocol information when the
protocol is saved.
For more information about Auto Protocol Optimization, see Auto Protocol
Optimization procedure.

Cube DIR step-by-step picture guide procedure
QU ICK GU IDES
Cube DIR step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
A Cube DIR video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For details, see
Access videos from MR system procedure.
Select Cube DIR
1. Select Cube T2 DIR on the Task.

2. Click Setup.

Position 3D slab
Position the 3D slab over the localizer images.

Adjust values
Adjust values
1. To view additional tabs, click the arrow in the upper right corner
2. Click the Advanced tab.
l Use Fat Saturation Efficiency to control the amount of fat that is

saturated when either Fat SAT or Classic Fat SAT are selected from
the Scan Parameters area.

3. Click the Details tab.
Cube DIR applies inversion recovery pulses to achieve signal

suppression from two different tissues. There are three IR1 scan
parameters on the Details screen.
l Tissue T1 options: White Matter, Grey Matter or a number you enter
in the text field.
l Inv. Time: Enter a value or select Auto to suppress CSF.
l TI2: enter a value to suppress the second tissue.
1Inversion Recovery

Save and Scan
Save and Scan

1. Click Save Rx.
2. Click Scan.
For more information about Cube DIR, see Cube DIR considerations.

QU ICK GU IDES
DISCO step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
A DISCO video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For details, see
Select series
1. From the Task tab, select a DISCO series.

2. Click Setup.

Position 3D slab
Position 3D slab
Position the 3D slab over the localizer images.

Define and check parameters

1. To view additional tabs, click arrow in the upper right corner
.
2. Click the Multi-Phase and make selections.
l The Total Phases value does not include the mask phase.
l The number of Wash-in Phases are the phases from the time of
injection to the completion of contrast uptake in the area of interest.
l Variable Delays is forced On for DISCO.
l Preserve options determine if the start time is kept or the delay time is
kept for each phase when the scan time is changed.
l Select Mask Phase to create a mask phase and select Pause after
Mask to pause the scan after the mask phase.
l If desired, click the Series Per Phase option to generate each phase in
a separate series.
3. Note the time and temporal resolution.

Define and check parameters
l The first time (1) is the total time excluding Mask.

l The second time (2) is the duration for Mask or non-wash-in phases.
l Temp Res (3) is the temporal resolution for wash-in phases.

4. A-Click the Advanced tab.

B- Enter a value for Fast, Faster, or Fastest to adjust the scan time or
temporal resolution.
Figure 5-2: Example of User CV Advanced tab
l The Temp Res is how fast each phase is acquired.
5. Click the Details tab and confirm that protocol scan parameters are
correct.

Save and Scan
Figure 5-3: Example of Details tab
Save and Scan

1. Click Save Rx.
2. Click Scan.


Save and Scan
3. Observe the Auto View scan time countdown as each phase is

collected.
A - Mask phase is acquired.
B - Scanner pauses
C - Dynamic series is acquired
For more information about DISCO, see Acquire a DISCO scan.

QU ICK GU IDES
MAGiC post process step-by-step picture

guide procedure
A Magic post process video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For
details, see Access videos from MR system procedure.
Launch MAGiC post process application
1. From the Patient List, select a prospective MAGiC series or QMaps

series.
2. From the Session Apps list, click MAGiC.

MAGiC review session
1. From the MAGiC review session, note the Contrast navigation window
that indicates the image contrast weight: T1-weighted, T2-weighted
or PD-weighted contrast.

2. Click the Quantification Layout icon to change the viewports to

display T1-map, T2-map, PD-map, and T2W synthetic contrast
weighted images.

3. Click the Contrast Layout icon to change the viewports to

display MAGiC contrast weighted images.

Manipulate MAGiC images
1. Click the TE icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TE.
2. Click the TR icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TR.
3. Click the TE/TR icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TE and
TR simultaneously.
4. Click the TI icon and left-click and drag to adjust the TI.
5. Click the TI/TI icon to simultaneously adjust TI and TI2, left-click

and drag horizontally to adjust TI vertically to adjust TI2.
Save procedures
1. From the menu bar, click Preferences > Save Current Layout to save
the layout for future viewing.

Exit MAGiC post processing
2. From the menu bar, click File > Save Qmaps (T1T2PD) to Browser to
save the quantitative maps in a DICOM format to the patient list.
l A bar displays indicating the save progress.
3. From the menu bar, click File > Save all Visible Stacks to Browser
and Close.
l All visible viewports with synthetic image series are saved in DICOM
format to the patient list and then the MAGiC post process screen
closes.
l A bar displays indicating the save progress.
Exit MAGiC post processing
1. From the menu bar, click File > Exit MAGiC.

For more information about MAGiC, see:

l MAGiC: scan procedure
l MAGiC post process procedure
l MAGiC post process icon procedures
l MAGiC post process menu considerations
l MAGiC: post process right-click procedures

Fluoro Trigger step-by-step picture guide procedure
QU ICK GU IDES
Fluoro Trigger step-by-step picture guide

procedure
A Fluoro Trigger video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For details,
see Access videos from MR system procedure.
Open Fluoro Trigger

Position the 3D slab over the area of interest. In this example, the slab is
oriented to the aorta in the sagittal plane.
1. Click on Imaging Options.

2. Select Fluoro Trigger.
3. Click Accept.

Set User Control Variables
.
2. Click Advanced tab.
3. Set image acquisition delay. This time may be used to give the
patient breathing instructions.
4. K space filling options are user CV11 through CV14. Parameters
depend on the anatomy to be scanned.

Contrast, Save, Scan
Contrast, Save, Scan
1. Enter contrast amount used.

2. Click Save Rx.
3. Click Scan.

Define aorta
Click Draw Line. Prescribe a cut plane by drawing a line on the image that
becomes that plane.
1. Place the line across the center of the aorta.

2. Click GO.

Define aorta
3. Adjust the slice thickness to better visualize the vessel.

Visualize Contrast
1. Click Subtract to eliminate background tissue and view contrast

arrival more robustly.
2. Once contrast is visualized, click Go3D. If an image acquisition delay
has been specified, the scanner will become quiet for that duration of
time. The image acquisition delay can be changed on the fly in the
Fluoro Trigger screen.
For more information about Fluoro Trigger, see Acquire a Real Time scan
with Fluoro Trigger.

Linking step-by-step picture guide procedure
QU ICK GU IDES
Linking step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
An Linking video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For details, see
Select series to link

1. From the Task tab, select the series you want to link.

2. From the Task tab, right click and select Create/Edit Link.

Establish parameters to be linked
Establish parameters to be linked
1. Check the Scan Coverage box

2. Check the boxes next to the parameters you want to match.
3. Check the Shim Volume box.
4. Click Accept.
5. The series to which the original series is linked appear in the chain link
column.


Setup links and scan

1. Click Setup.
2. Define slice locations and number of slices.

3. Click Save Rx.
4. Note progress bar. When progress bar completes, series are in RxD
state.


5. Click Scan.
For more information about Linking, see Link series procedure.

Auto Navigator Tracker step-by-step picture guide procedure
QU ICK GU IDES
Auto Navigator Tracker step-by-step pic-

ture guide procedure
An Auto Navigator Tracker video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes.
For details, see Access videos from MR system procedure.
Select a localizer task
1. From the Workflow Manager, select a 3 Plane Localizer SSFSE task

that you want to use with Auto Navigator Tracker.
2. Click Setup.

Select a localizer Breath Hold option
1. From the SSFSE Localizer scan parameter screen, select a Breath

Hold option that will match the Localizer scan.
l When Auto Voice is turned on, the Breath Hold box automatically fills
and becomes grayed out.
Select Post Processing
1. From the Workflow Manager, click Add Task > Add Post Processing.
2. From the Post Processing Task screen,

a. Click Auto Tracker Placement.
b. Click Setup.

Select Post Processing
3. From the Auto Tracker Placement screen, click Accept.

Save and Start localizer scan
From the Workflow Manager, click Save Rx > Scan.

l When the scan is finished, Auto Tracker Placement is automatically
started

Setup a Navigator scan
Setup a Navigator scan
1. From the Workflow Manager, select a Navigator task.

2. Click Setup.
3. From the Scan parameters screen click GRx and setup the scan
locations.

4. From the GRx toolbar:

a. Click Tracker.
b. Click the Auto Tracker option and note the location of the tracker on
the coronal localizer image.
l Optional: if desired, click Hide tracker option to toggle the tracker

on/off the localizer image.

Save and start the scan
Save and start the scan
From the Workflow Manager, click Save Rx > Scan.
For more information about Navigator, see:

l Auto Navigator tracker placement procedure
l Navigator considerations
l Acquire a body Navigator scan
l Acquire a coronary Navigator scan

QU ICK GU IDES
Navigator step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
A Navigator video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For details, see
Select a task
1. From the Workflow Manager, select a task that you want to use with
Navigator.
2. Click Setup.

Select Navigator
Select Navigator
1. Click Imaging Options.

2. Click Navigator.
3. Click Accept.
Select the Tracker GRx tool

From the Graphic Rx toolbar, click Tracker.

Position the Tracker

Use a breathold localizer acquired at expiration.
1. From the coronal image, place the tracker on the dome of the liver.
2. From the axial image, place the tracker in the middle of the liver in the
anterior/posterior direction.

Deposit slices
Deposit slices
Place the cursor on the image and click to deposit the Graphic Rx lines.
Define the Navigator parameters
.
2. Click the Navigator tab.

3. Enter a Resp Rate value if the bellows are not in use.

4. Run RR measurement tool to find the correct respiratory rate for each
pateint.
Scan
1. Click Save Rx.

2. Click Scan.
Observe/adjust Waveform
1. Observe the respiratory waveform to see if the peak expiration occurs

at the red threshold line.
2. Adjust the threshold as needed.

View images
View images
View images as they appear in AutoView area.
For more information about Navigator, see:

l Navigator considerations
l Acquire a body Navigator scan
l Acquire a coronary Navigator scan

QU ICK GU IDES
SmartPrep step-by-step picture guide pro-

cedure
A SmartPrep video can be viewed from the Protocol Notes. For details, see
Open Tracker
1. From the Graphic Rx Toobar, click Tracker.

2. Set Tracker size to 20.0 by 20.0.

Position Tracker
Position Tracker
Place Tracker in the center of the vessel.
Set User Control Variables
.
2. Click the Advanced tab.

3. Set the Max. monitor period (this is the backup scanning time).
4. Set the Image acquisition delay time (this time may be used to give
the patient breathing instructions).
5. K space filling options are user CV11 through CV14. Information
entered here will depend on the anatomy to be scanned.
Prescribe the imaging volume

1. Prescribe the 3D volume by placing the cursor over the desired image
and click to deposit the volume. Prescribe any even number of slices
to balance coverage with scan time
2. The tracker should be contained completely inside the imaging

volume to avoid SmartPrep failing to detect the bolus.
Fill in Contrast amount

Fill in a contrast amount of 20 cc or higher.

Save Rx and Scan
Save Rx and Scan

1. Click Save RX.
2. Click Scan.
System acquires baseline data.

Max. monitor begins to count down. This time may be used to give the
patient breathing instructions.
The scanner will continue to count down until the bolus is detected. The
scanner will go quiet for the amount of time built into image acquisition
delay.
For more information about SmartPrep, see:
l Prepare the patient for a SmartPrep scan procedure
l Acquire a localizer for a SmartPrep scan procedure
l Set up the SmartPrep series procedure
l Scan the SmartPrep series procedure

Chapter 1: Read me first
Chapter 1: Read me first

Before using your system, familiarize yourself with the purpose and design of this manual and an overview of the,
following topics.
About this manual

About MR Scanner
Feature list
Online help
System User Interface
Sessions
Preferences
Data Privacy
About this manual

This section explains the purpose and design of this operator manual. It is an introduction to the manual, providing
information on the purpose, prerequisite skills, organization, format, and graphic conventions that identify the visual
symbols used throughout the manual.
The manual does not identify components or features that are standard or purchasable options. Therefore, if a
feature or component included in the manual is not on your system, it is either not available on your system
configuration or your site has not purchased the option.
Safety information
Please refer to the MR Safety chapter. The MR Safety chapter describes the safety information you and the
physicians must understand thoroughly before you begin to use the system. If you need additional training, seek
assistance from qualified GE personnel.
The equipment is intended for use by qualified personnel only.
This manual should be kept with the equipment and should be readily available at all times. It is important for you to
periodically review the procedures and safety precautions. It is important to read and understand the contents of
this manual before attempting to use this product.
Federal Law restricts this device to sale, distribution, and use by or on the order of a physician.
Safety notices
The following safety notices are used to emphasize certain safety instructions. This manual uses the international
symbol along with the danger, warning, or caution message. This section also describes the purpose of an Important
notice and a Note.
DANGER
Danger is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is known to exist that will cause
severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if the instructions are ignored.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-1

WARNING
Warning is used to identify conditions or actions for which a specific hazard is known to exist that may cause
severe personal injury, death, or substantial property damage if the instructions are ignored.
CAUTION
Caution is used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential hazard may exist that will or can cause
minor personal injury or property damage if the instructions are ignored.
Coil CAUTION
Coil Caution is used to identify conditions or actions for which a potential hazard of crossing or looping coil
cables may exist that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the instructions are
ignored.
Pinch Point CAUTION

Pinch Point Caution is used to identify conditions or actions that will or can cause personal injury.
Important indicates information where adherence to procedures is crucial or where your comprehension is
necessary to apply a concept or effectively use the product.
Note provides additional information that is helpful to you. It may emphasize certain information regarding
special tools or techniques, items to check before proceeding, or factors to consider about a concept or task.
Troubleshooting tips provide information that allow you to investigate the resolution of some type of problem,
locate the difficulty, and make adjustments to solve the problem.
Purpose of this manual

This manual is written for health care professionals (namely, the MR technologist) to provide the necessary
information relating to the proper operation of this system. The manual is intended to teach you the system
components and features necessary to use your MR system to its maximum potential. It is not intended to teach
magnetic resonance imaging or to make any type of clinical diagnosis.
This operator manual should be kept with the equipment at all times. It is important for you to periodically review the
procedures and safety precautions. It is important for you to read and understand the contents of this manual before
attempting to use this product.
This operator manual is originally written in English.
1-2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

About this manual
Prerequisite skills
This manual is not intended to teach the principles of magnetic resonance imaging. It is necessary for you to have
sufficient knowledge to competently perform the various diagnostic imaging procedures within your modality. This
knowledge is gained through a variety of educational methods, including clinical working experience, hospital-based
programs, or classes offered by many college and university Radiologic Technology diagnostic imaging programs.
User profile
MR worker
MR workers are generally Radiology technologists.
MR Professional
MR Professional are generally Radiologists who use the results from an MR exam to influence patient management.
Service Engineer
A Service Engineer may be an employee of GEHC, third party service group, or an employee of the customer in-house
systems support department. They may be dedicated to a specific clinic or geographic area.
Pop-up windows
Pop-up message windows require an acknowledgment. Respond to the message and continue on with the workflow.
Note that most procedures in the manual do not identify pop-up messages since the appearance of a message varies
based on the workflow.
If there are multiple floating window on the screen, click on the window title to bring it in front or close the window in
front to access the windows that is behind it.
Graphic conventions and legends

This manual uses special conventions for images and legends to make it easier for you to work with the information.
The table below describes the conventions used when working with menus, buttons, text boxes, and keyboard keys.
Table 1-1: Graphic conventions
Example Description
UI conventions Blue text indicates a link to another topic.
Select Select an option in a check box or radial button and selecting a tab.
Press Enter Press a hard key on the keyboard.
Press and hold Shift Press and holding down a hard key on the keyboard.
Click Viewer A button label or Interface button name that you actively click. If
there is a reference to a button label that is not actively clicked, it is
not displayed as bold or italic.
In the Spacing field... The name of field in which you can select or type text.
Type supine in the Patient Text you enter into a field box followed by pressing the Enter key
Position text box on the keyboard.
Select Sort > Sort by date The pathway of selecting option(s) in a pull-down menu.
Ctrl X simultaneously Press and hold the Control button on the keyboard and
simultaneously press the X button on the keyboard. Ctrl is the
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-3

Example Description
abbreviation used for the Control keyboard button, and ALT is the
abbreviation used for the Alternative keyboard.
"message" A system message prompt is in quotations.
Cancel/Close Cancel/Close typically closes a screen without executing the
changes on the screen. The instructions to Cancel/Close are
typically not included in procedures in this manual.
Table 1-2: Mouse controls conventions
Operator manual instruction Mouse action

Click Click the left mouse button to select a button or icon.
Right-click Click the right mouse button.
Middle-click Click the middle mouse button.
Click and drag Click and hold the left mouse button down while dragging the
cursor to the desired location.
Right-click and drag Click and hold the right mouse button down while dragging the
Middle-click and drag Click and hold the middle mouse button down while dragging the
Double-click Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Triple-click Click the left mouse button three times in rapid succession.
1-4 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

About MR Scanner concept
About MR Scanner concept

The About MR Scanner feature displays useful safety information that may be useful for determining if MR Conditional
requirements are met for certain implants and other devices. Available information includes:
magnetic field strength (B0)

maximum spatial gradient (rate of change with distance) of the static magnetic field
nominal frequency range per nuclei
maximum gradient output on cylinders with diameters of 0.2 m, 0.4 m, and bore diameter minus 0.1 m (for
transverse magnets the “bore diameter” is the magnet gap).
Considerations
Specific Energy limit exams are limited to 14,400 joules (4 W/kg for one hour (3600 s). After a suitable rest
period (perhaps 2 hours) patient scanning may be resumed. A physician may override the specific energy limit
for medical reasons.
B1rms is the root mean square value of the radio frequency (RF) magnetic field for a given protocol. It is useful
to determine how aggressive a protocol may be is terms of RF intensity.
Use these steps to view the About MR Scanner screen, which provides details about your MR scanner. The contents of
the screen varies based on your MR system.
Figure 1-1: Example of an About MR Scanner screen
1. From the header area of the screen, click Tools icon arrow and select About MR Scanner.
The About MR Scanner screen displays.
2. Click and drag the slider to view all the contents on the screen.
3. To close the screen, from the About MR Scanner screen, click Close.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-5

Table 1-3 (below) shows the types of configurations.

Table 1-3: System configuration types
Types Software Version Magnet

Type I PX26.0, PX26.2 LCCW
Type II VX28 IPM, LCCW
Related topics
Read me first orientation
1-6 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Electronic Operator Manual
Electronic Operator Manual

This device is delivered with an electronic Operator Manual.
Figure 1-2: Symbol indicating that the Instruction For Use (Operator Manual) is supplied in electronic format
The operator manual is available in an Online Help format from a CD that is either installed on your GE system or
accessed from a personal computer.
A paper copy of Online Help can be ordered at no additional cost. Please send a request to your Sales or Service
representative. They will transfer your request to CEMEURDIST@med.ge.com .In application of the EU Commission
Regulation on electronic instructions for use of medical devices, in European Union, your request should be treated
within 7 days.
The latest version of the Instructions for Use is available on Internet at:
https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary
on the home page enter 6339225 (Operator Manual part number root) in the search window and launch the search.
Go to your paper Booklet for electronic Operator Manual Instructions (6339325-199) for more information on
detailed regulations and standards applicable to your system, as well as the manufacturer information.
Table 1-4: Language codes
Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language

BG Bulgarian CS Czech DA Danish DE German
EL Greek EN English ES Spanish ET Estonian
FI Finnish FR French HR Croatian HU Hungarian
ID Indonesian IT Italian JA Japanese KK Kazakh
KO Korean LT Lithuanian LV Latvian NL Dutch
Brazilian
NO Norwegian PL Polish PT-PT Portuguese PT-BR
Portuguese
RO Romanian RU Russian SK Slovakian SR Serbian
SV Swedish TR Turkish UK Ukranian VN Vietnamese
ZH-CN Chinese
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-7

Feature List
Note that the optional features listed in these tables may not be available in all markets.
The table contents are subject to change with a limited degree of variability based on system configuration. Go to
About function to know your system configuration.
PSD list
3-Plane family
3-Plane PSD Family Description
FGRE IR Prep The FGRE IR Prep Localizer produces T1-weighted images from three planes
Standard that can be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker pulse
locations while visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
FGRE The FGRE Localizer produces T2*-weighted images from three planes that can
Standard be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker pulse locations
while visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
FIESTA The FIESTA Localizer produces images with high T2/T1 ratios from three planes
Standard that can be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker pulse
locations while visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
SSFSE The SSFSE Localizer produces T2-weighted images from three planes that can
Standard be used in Graphic Rx to define slices, SAT bands, and tracker locations while
visualizing their exact position in all three planes.
EPI family
EPI PSD Family Description
DW EPI DW EPI is a single shot EPI pulse sequence designed to create images that
Standard differentiate tissues with restricted diffusion from tissues with normal diffusion.
eDWI eDWI is an enhanced version of Diffusion Weighted imaging that allows

Optional multiple b-values within a single acquisition, Smart NEX, and 3 in 1 and
Tetrahedral imaging techniques.
MAGiC DWI (Synthetic Synthesize b-value diffusion weighted images using scanned DWI data.
DWI)
Optional
DW EPI Tensor DW EPI Tensor or DTI is a technique that produces image contrast proportional
Optional to the local diffusion coefficient of water. Both the diffusion coefficient and its
directional dependence can be measured using DTI. Data can then be used to
image the directional dependence of the local diffusion coefficient in the tissue.
FLAIR EPI FLAIR EPI is designed to minimize the signal from CSF on a T2-weighted EPI
Standard sequence.
Use the FLAIR EPI sequence for brain imaging to minimize signal from CSF. The
sequences can be acquired in a single-shot or multi-shot mode.
GRE EPI Use Gradient Echo EPI for: task activation studies when acquired with Multi
Standard Phase, imaging of the brain to produce cerebral-blood volume maps to aid in
diagnosis of recurrent tumor versus edema in post- therapy patients.
1-8 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List
EPI PSD Family Description

SE EPI SE EPI is typically used to acquire T2-weighted scans. It can also be combined
Standard with the IR Prepared Imaging Option to acquire T1-weighted or IR images.
FSE family
FSE PSD Family Description
FRFSE Use 2D FRFSE for: PD- and T2-weighted acquisitions of the spine, abdominal
Standard breath hold images and head and joint images .
FSE IR Use FSE-IR: to suppress the signal from fat in abdominal and extremity images,
when you desire a more uniform fat suppression for large FOV or off-center
Standard FOV, FSE-IR is an excellent alternative to FSE Fat SAT.
FSE
FSE is used to acquire T1-, PD-, and T2-weighted image contrast.
Standard
Triple IR with fat suppression for very black blood
Double IR uses an FSE pulse sequence and Triple IR uses an FSE-IR sequence.
FSE Double/Triple IR Both are acquired by selecting the Blood Suppression Imaging Option.
Standard Double and Triple IR scans are used to visualize cardiac anatomy, myocardial
wall masses, valve leaflets, and black blood. Use a single RR interval for a more
T1-weighted appearance, carotid imaging, and very black blood imaging.
SSFSE SSFSE and SSFSE-IR use an RF pulse design that allows for significantly short
ESP and a 0.5 NEX technique that acquires a data set within a single RF
Standard excitation period.
SSFSE-IR SSFSE and SSFSE-IR use an RF pulse design that allows for significantly short
ESP and a 0.5 NEX technique that acquires a data set within a single RF
Standard excitation period.
T1 FLAIR T1 FLAIR is designed to scan the same number of slices as the T1-weighted Spin
Echo sequence, and in the same or shorter scan time, achieve better tissue
Standard contrast-to-noise as well as signal-to-noise ratios.
T2 FLAIR T2 FLAIR results in bright signal suppressed from CSF on T2-weighted image
structures adjacent to fluid filled structures, therefore becoming more
Standard apparent.
3D FLAIR
FLAIR acquired in 3D mode.
Standard
Cube T2 and T2 FLAIR and DIR have a unique acquisition and reconstruction
Cube technique that allows for high resolution imaging in all three dimensions with
Optional the goal of acquiring isotropic voxels (all voxel dimensions, height, width, and
depth, are equal).
GRE family
GRE PSD Family Description
2D FIESTA It accentuates the contrast of spins with high T2/T1 ratios (such as cerebral-
Standard spinal fluid, water, and fat) while suppressing signal from tissues with low
T2/T1 ratios (such as muscle and myocardium).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-9


2D Fat SAT FIESTA 2D Fat Sat FIESTA is 2D Fiesta with SPECIAL turned on.
Standard
3D FIESTA 3D FIESTA can be used for whole body imaging and can be used in clinical
Standard applications that benefit from the differentiation of contrast between tissues of
low T2/T1 ratios (low signal intensity) and high T2/T1 ratios (high signal
intensity).
3D FIESTA with fat SAT 3D FIESTA with Fat Saturation is primarily used for coronary artery imaging.
Standard Water and fat contrast is accentuated, while muscle and myocardial tissues
are suppressed.
3D FIESTA-C FIESTA-C can be used in any clinical application that calls for relatively high
Standard spatial resolution and the differentiation of contrast between tissues of low
T2/T1 ratio (low signal intensity) and high T2/T1 ratios (high signal intensity), for
example inter-vertebral discs, hydrocephalus obstructions, biliary tree
dilatation, cholangio-pancreatography, and IAC applications.
Fast GRE (2D and 3D) Fast GRE sequences are used to produce T2-weighted images. Tissues with
Standard short T2 are dark and tissues with long T2 are bright. In the brain, CSF produces
the brightest signal on moderate to late TE images.
Fast SPGR (2D and 3D) Fast SPGR sequences are used to produce T1-weighting in images where
Standard tissues with short T1 are bright and tissues with long T1 are dark. In the brain,
white matter is brighter than gray matter and CSF is dark.
GRE (dual echo) High resolution dual echo 3D FGRE/FSPGR sequence. It allows the acquisition
Standard of the first out-of-phase TE and the first in-phase TE within a single breathold in
Axial and coronal scan planes. This technique uses ARC parallel imaging
technique
GRE (2D and 3D) GRE scans acquire T2*-weighted image contrast. Sequential GRE acquisitions
Standard eliminate cross-talk because all data is obtained one slice at a time.
SPGR (2D and 3D) SPGR is used to acquire T1-weighted contrast images. Sequential SPGR
Standard acquisitions eliminate cross-talk because all data is obtained one slice at a
time.
FGRE Time Course FGRE Time Course is a cardiac application that is very similar to the MR-echo
Optional Time Course application. It is activated by selecting a Fast GRE PSD with the
following Imaging Options: Multi-phase, Cardiac Gating/Triggering, IR Prepared
and ASSET. This application means that there is need to switch between MR-
Echo and the standard scan user interface to acquire the time course scans.
2D FGRE with IR Prep Fast GRE with IR-Prep and gating result in a delayed enhancement capability.
(2D MDE)
Optional
3D FGRE with IR Prep 3D Fast GRE with IR Prepared uses a non-slice selective IR pulse that allows for
(3D MDE) multiple locations to be acquired within a single breath hold. IR-Prep requires a
Optional Prep Time to be entered in the Scan Parameters area - choose a value that best
suppresses myocardium.
3D FIESTA with Fat SAT 3D FIESTA with Fat SAT is primarily used for coronary artery imaging. Water
and cardiac gating and fat contrast is accentuated, while muscle and myocardial tissues are
Standard suppressed.
1-10 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List

LAVA LAVA (Liver Acquisition with Volume Acceleration) is a 3D SPGR acquisition that
Standard automatically uses a Partial Kz filling technique and a segmented SPECIAL
technique. LAVA is used for abdominal scanning, in particular, liver imaging.
It can be combined with Imaging Option Flex for a LAVA-Flex scan.
MERGE MERGE (Multi-Echo Recombined Gradient Echo) is a 2D fast GRE pulse
Standard sequence that acquires multiple echoes at several different TEs and then
averages those echoes to form a single T2*-weighted image. Used primarily in
C-spine.
SWAN SWAN pulse sequence is a high-resolution 3D, T2* multi -echo gradient echo
Optional sequence that produces echo-combined images (sum across images with
different TE’s) to achieve higher T2* weighting. SWAN is a neuro application.
Multi-echo Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR is used to acquire images to analyze iron-load for
FGRE/FSPGR blood-transfused patients, in the clinical management of patients with iron
Optional overload diseases such as Thalassemia, in liver and myocardium examinations.
These images can be post processed in ReadyView to measure the relaxation
time variants using the R2Starmap application.
3D FGRE/FSPGR dual This is a high resolution dual echo 3D FRGRE/FSPGR sequence. It allows the
echo acquisition of the first out-of-phase TE and the first in-phase TE within a single
Standard breathold in Axial and coronal scan planes. This technique uses ARC parallel
imaging technique
VIBRANT VIBRANT is a 3D bilateral breast application.
Optional It can be combined with Imaging Option Flex for a VIBRANT-Flex scan.
SE family
SE PSD Family Description
SE Spin Echo sequences are used to acquire images with T1-, PD-, or T2- weighted
Standard contrast in all anatomical areas.
IR Use Inversion Recovery sequences produce T1-weighted or fat-suppressed

Standard images, particularly in abdomen or extremities. This sequence is also used for
very heavily weighted T1 brain images.
Spiral family
SPIRAL PSD Family Description
Hi-Res SPIRAL Hi-res Spiral obtains high resolution images in ultra-fast scan times. This
Optional sequence is well suited for obtaining images of the coronary arteries.
Realtime SPIRAL Real Time Spiral can be used for the quick localization of anatomy lying in
double-oblique planes and in areas where motion can be a problem, such as the
Optional coronary arteries.
Vascular family
Vascular PSD
Description
Family
2D Phase Contrast Phase Contrast imaging is an optional 2D and 3D imaging technique that relies
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-11

Vascular PSD
Description
Family
on velocity-induced phase shifts to distinguish flowing blood from stationary
Standard
tissues.
Use Fast 2D Phase Contrast for:
l cardiac gated multi-phase data set within a breath hold time frame (Fast
2D Phase Contrast Fast Card part) and quantitative data analysis (Phase Contrast part)
Standard l imaging with Flow Analysis, to provide the ability to quantify flow in the
great vessels, carotids, and extremity vasculature
l imaging as a localizer for gated TOF acquisitions when looking for peak
flow in READY View
Use FastCINE PC:
2D Phase Contrast with
Cine Mode l to determine blood flow direction
Standard l to estimate flow velocity
l for quantitative analysis in Flow Analysis software
3D Phase Contrast Phase Contrast imaging is an optional 2D and 3D imaging technique that relies
on velocity-induced phase shifts to distinguish flowing blood from stationary
Standard tissues.
2D TOF-GRE TOF images are created by repeatedly exciting a predefined volume of anatomy

until the stationary tissue is partially saturated and the signal from the tissue is
Standard suppressed.
Like TOF, Fast TOF imaging is based on conventional Gradient Echo scanning
2D TOF-GRE Fast with flow compensation. This imaging technique relies primarily on flow-related
Standard enhancements to distinguish moving from stationary spins in creating MRA. The
2D Fast TOF sequence can be acquired with a Fast GRE or a Fast SPGR.
Use 2D TOF-GRE and TOF-SPGR sequences to:
l demonstrate the carotid bifurcation or venous anatomy

2D TOF-SPGR
l evaluate suspected basilar artery occlusive disease
Standard l Image pelvic and lower extremity vasculature
l map cortical veins
l evaluate suspected intra-cranial venous thrombosis
Like TOF, Fast TOF imaging is based on conventional Gradient Echo scanning
2D TOF-SPGR Fast with flow compensation. This imaging technique relies primarily on flow-related
Standard enhancements to distinguish moving from stationary spins in creating MRA. The
2D Fast TOF sequence can be acquired with a Fast GRE or a Fast SPGR.
3D TOF-GRE 3D TOF uses a volume acquisition to obtain image data and can be acquired
Standard with a GRE or SPGR pulse.
3D TOF-GRE Fast Use Fast 3D TOF-GRE and Fast TOF-SPGR with SmartPrep to acquire signal
Standard change over time to evaluate vascular disease.
3D TOF-SPGR 3D TOF uses a volume acquisition to obtain image data and can be acquired
Standard with a GRE or SPGR pulse.
3D TOF-SPGR Fast Use Fast 3D TOF-GRE and Fast TOF-SPGR with SmartPrep to acquire signal
Standard change over time to evaluate vascular disease.
FastCard GRE Fast Card is a fast, 2D, GRE or SPGR sequence that acquires multiple phases of
1-12 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List
Vascular PSD
Description
Family
Standard the cardiac cycle at single or multiple locations.
Use Fast Card for:
l breath-hold cardiac imaging (Fast Card GRE makes blood brighter and
SPGR makes the myocardium brighter)
FastCard SPGR
l removing motion in pediatric studies by using Fast Card with multiple
Standard NEX
l coronary artery imaging when used with Fat SAT
l cross-sectional studies of the cardiac chambers or the aortic arch
l evaluating cardiac function and valve assessment
FastCINE uses a k-space segmenting technique that reconstructs all phase
FastCINE steps regardless of when they are acquired within the cardiac cycle. This allows
Standard for complete imaging of the RR interval allowing better visualization of end
diastolic events.
FastCINE PC combines Phase Contrast and the Cine scan mode to enable data
FastCINE PC acquisition throughout the entire cardiac cycle. The RR Interval is monitored and
the information is used to retrospectively sort the data before reconstruction.
Standard Images are reconstructed using CINE interpolation that compensates for
differences within the cardiac cycle.
Inhance 3D Velocity Inhance 3D Velocity is a modified 3D Phase Contrast PSD. It is designed to

acquire contrast-free angiography images with excellent background
Optional suppression at a shorter scan time in comparison to 3D PC.
Inhance Inflow Inhance Inflow is designed to acquire angiography images of arteries that flow
Optional in a relatively straight line such as the femoral, popliteal and carotid arteries.
Use Inhance 3D Inflow IR to acquire contrast-free angiographic images with
Inhance 3D Inflow IR excellent background suppression that are free of venous contamination.
Optional Inhance Inflow IR can also be used to image venous vasculature. This can be
achieved by placing IR bands to suppress upstream arterial flow.
Inhance Delta-Flow is a non-contrast MRA technique that relies on arterial flow
Inhance DeltaFlow differences between systolic and diastolic phases. The data is acquired with two
interleaved, 3D FSE gated (PG or ECG) scans: one in systolic and one in diastolic
Optional phase. Systolic images are subtracted from the diastolic images to create an
arterial only image data set.
Spectroscopy family
Spectroscopy Description
PSD Family
PROBE -
A version of the PRESS sequence that acquires a double spin echo from a
PRESS CSI single voxel
localized volume. You can prescribe the volume manually or graphically.
Optional
PROBE 2D CSI A 2D CSI acquisition allows you to increase the spatial coverage and spatial
resolution of a spectroscopy data acquisition relative to single voxel
Optional acquisitions.
PROBE 3D CSI With PRESS 3D CSI, phase encoding gradients are applied along three
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-13

Spectroscopy Description
PSD Family
orthogonal axes to acquire data that, after processing, produces a 3D array of
spectra. Long scan times are an inherent disadvantage of this technique, as are
Optional the small, practical number of phase encoding steps along each dimension. The
clear advantages are increasing SNR and spatial coverage in the third
dimension.
PROBE SVQ (PRESS and PROBE-P is a version of the PRESS (Point RESolved Spectroscopy) sequence that
STEAM) acquires a spin echo from a localized volume defined by the intersection of
Optional three orthogonal slices.
PROSE PROSE is a spectroscopy sequence that has been optimized for the acquisition
Optional of spectra from the prostate gland.
PROPELLER family
PROPELLER PSD Family Description
Brain DWI PROPELLER Brain DWI is used for high resolution head imaging where DWI is
Standard traditionally used. It is particularly useful in areas of high susceptibility relative
to standard EPI methods. PROPELLER Brain DWI does not reduce motion
artifact.
Brain T2 PROPELLER Brain T2 improves SNR and CNR compared to traditional FSE with
Standard comparable scan time and it reduces motion artifact.
Brain T2 FLAIR PROPELLER Brain T2 FLAIR reduces patient motion artifact compared to
Standard traditional T2 FLAIR with comparable scan time.
T1 FLAIR T1 FLAIR is a PROPELLER PSD that produces T1-weighted images with null

Standard CSF signal and optimal gray/white matter contrast. It is typically used to
acquire T1-weighted image contrast for patients with uncontrollable motion.
T2 Body T2 Body is a respiratory triggered PROPELLER PSD that produces T2-weighted
Optional liver images with reduced motion artifacts from vessel flow and patient
breathing. It is typically used for axial T2 fat SAT liver exams.
PROPELLER PROPELLER is a generic PSD that can be used in musculoskeletal areas with any
Standard coil.
Imaging Options
Imaging Options Description
ARC ARC is a data-driven parallel imaging technique that synthesizes missing data
Standard from neighboring source data in all three imaging dimensions: slice, phase
and frequency. Fewer calibration lines are required and reconstruction
accuracy and speed is improved resulting in highly accelerated MR data
acquisition with improved image quality and reduced artifacts.
ASSET Use ASSET to scan faster with brain, abdomen, chest, fMRI, extremities and
Standard breath hold angiography imaging. You can also use it to decrease artifacts
with EPI sequences and to decrease blurring with FSE sequences.
Blood Suppression Use Blood Suppression to obtain “black blood” cardiac images and reduce
1-14 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List

Standard flow-related ghosting.
Cardiac Comp Use CCOMP for breath-hold abdominal images to reduce pulsatile flow
(CCOMP) artifact.
Standard
Cardiac Cardiac Gating/Triggering is used for: imaging the heart’s structure and
Gating/Triggering function, imaging in the thorax, and Cine-PC arteriography to examine flow.
Standard
Classic Use Classic to reduce the contribution of off-resonant signals to spin-echo
Standard images.
DE Prepared Use DE Prepared to apply a 90/180/90° RF DE preparation pulse to produce

Standard more T2-weighted contrast with 2D, sequential Fast GRE sequences.
Extended Dynamic Use Extended Dynamic Range to improve SNR in applications such as 3D
Range scans.
Standard
Flex Use Flex (a two-point Dixon method ) to acquire in-phase and out-of-phase
Optional echoes resulting in water only and fat only images.
Flow Compensation Use Flow Compensation to reduce motion artifacts when slow-moving blood
Standard and CSF are flowing in the direction of the applied FC gradient.
Fluoro Trigger Use Fluoro Trigger to detect the arrival of a contrast bolus in MRA exams.
Standard
Full Echo Train The Full Echo Train method completes all echo trains for Effective TE1 before
Standard Effective TE2 is initiated. The phase encoding process is altered to place the
central phase encodings at the selected Effective TE1 or TE2.
IDEAL IDEAL (Iterative Decomposition of Water and Fat With Echo Asymmetry and
Optional Least-Squares Estimation) uses a three-point Dixon method to acquire
multiple echoes resulting in water only, fat only, fat and water in-phase, and
fat and water out-of-phase processed images.
IR Prepared Use IR Prepared to enhance T1-weighting and to suppress signals from
Standard selective tissues.
Mag Transfer Use Magnetization Transfer to suppress brain parenchyma signal relative to
Standard contrast-laden blood.
Multi-Phase Use Multi-Phase to prescribe a series of consecutive scans (or phases)

Standard separated by configurable start times or delays. It is compatible with a wide
range of pulse sequences and imaging options.
Multi-Station Use Multi Station an alternative to QuickSTEP. It provides automatic table
(SmartStep) movement and switching of coils between stations for peripheral vascular
Standard run-offs. It allows you to prescan at multiple stations to optimize image quality
and it properly annotates image locations based on the landmark.
MRCP Use MRCP to acquire heavily T2-weighted images, such as MRCP or
Standard myelogram.
Body Navigator Use Navigator to perform a navigated, free-breathing, liver and renal imaging
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-15


Optional acquisition.
No Phase Wrap Use No Phase Wrap to prevent wraparound artifacts when anatomy is outside
Standard the FOV in the phase direction.
Phase Sensitive Use with 2D, FGRE and Cardiac Gating to acquire PSMDE1 cardiac images.
Optional
PROMO PROMO2 is an Imaging Option used to prospectively correct for patient motion
Optional when acquiring 3D Cube and Cube T2 FLAIR images.
Real Time Use Real Time to acquire an interactive scan that allows you to:
Standard localize complex anatomy that lies in double oblique planes
navigate through the patient anatomy for rapid visualization
monitor temporal physiological events, including patient breathing,
kinematic studies, and bolus activity
determine the boundaries of a desired imaging region, which can then
be passed to a subsequent image application (another batch series in
the Workflow Manager)
initiate an MRA scan when you combine it with Fluoro Trigger
perform a kinematic study
detect Patent Foreman Ovale when you combine it with IR Prepared
Respiratory Use Respiratory Compensation to reduce phase ghosting from breathing
Compensation motion when scanning in the chest or abdomen.
Standard
Respiratory Use Respiratory/Gating Triggering to reduce breathing artifacts by
Gating/Triggering synchronizing the acquisition with the respiratory cycle. It can be used to
Standard acquire PD- or T2-weighted images.
Sequential Use Sequential with breath-hold abdominal or chest scans, quick localizers,
Standard and 2D TOF vascular sequences to prevent cross-talk.
SmartPrep Use the SmartPrep tracking pulse to increase the accuracy of synchronizing
Standard image acquisition with the arrival of a contrast bolus to acquire images.
Spatial Spectral RF Use SSRF to reduce signal from fat by selectively exciting a narrow range of
(SSRF) chemical shifts at the prescribed location through the application of a series of
Standard very short RF pulses.
Square Pixel Use Square Pixel to provide a square pixel within a rectangular FOV when you
Standard select asymmetrical matrix values. The pixel size is determined by the FOV
divided by the frequency matrix.
T2 Prep Use T2 Prep to apply a sequence of non-slice selective 90° and 180° RF pulses
Standard to suppress cardiac muscle tissue and therefore, increase the contrast
between coronary vessels and background tissue.
1Phase Sensitive Myocardial Delayed Enhancement

2PROspective MOtion correction
1-16 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List

Tailored RF Use Tailored RF to stabilize the echo amplitudes in the FSE sequences (Spin
Standard Echo and Inversion Recovery). Tailored RF produces images with the following
characteristics: less blurring, slightly less SNR, flatter contrast for T2 weighted
images, and slightly more slices per TR.
ZIP 512 Use ZIP as an optional reconstruction technique to create the appearance of
ZIP 1024 increased in-plane resolution. Zero-filling enhances the apparent image
resolution, it does not create resolution.
Standard
ZIP x 2 Use slice ZIP to create the appearance of increased through-plane resolution.
ZIP x 4
Standard
Application list
One-click
Description
applications
3DASL Use 3DASL to acquire a non-invasive whole brain scan for CBF
(Arterial Spin Labeling) measurements. It uses a 3D Spiral FSE pulse sequence with Extended
Dynamic Range to acquire a set of images (PW and PD) which post-process
Optional
into CBF image maps.
3D Heart 3D Heart is an improvement to 3 PSD used to acquire coronary vessels:
Optional 3D gated Fiesta, 3D gated Fast GRE/SPGR and 3D myocardium delayed
enhancement (Fast GRE with IR-Prep and cardiac gated imaging options).
BRAVO Use BRAVO to acquire a high-resolution, T1-weighted sequence for fMRI.
(BRain VOlume)
Standard
BREASE Use BREASE to acquire a spectrum for breast spectroscopy. The spectrum
(BREAst Spectroscopy is displayed in the Viewer.
Examination)
Optional
COSMIC Use COSMIC to acquire a 3D axial Cervical-spine sequence. Only the 16-,
(Coherent Oscillatory State 8-, and 4-channel Spine phased array coils are compatible with COSMIC.
acquisition for the
Manipulation of Imaging
Contrast)
Standard
CineIR Use CineIR to select the optimal TI to visualize normal or viable
Optional myocardium versus myocardium with an infarct.
DISCO Use DISCO (DIfferential Subsampling with Cartesian Ordering) to acquire

Optional improved temporal resolution images in comparison to multi-phase non-
view-shared T1 weighted sequences.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-17

One-click
Description
applications
MAGiC MAGiC1 is both an acquisition and post processing application. Based on
Optional the MAGiC MDME images the MAGiC post-processing generates quant-
itative maps of the T1 and T2 relaxation times and Proton Density (PD) of
the imaged tissue.
MR ECHO The MR-Echo application is for cardiac real time prescription and
Optional acquisition. MR-Echo real time is particularly useful in patients with
irregular heart beats and with patients who cannot perform a breath-hold
acquisition.
MAVRIC SL MAVRIC SL is a one-click application that uses a multi-spectral 3D imaging
Optional technique to help reduce susceptibility artifacts caused by the presence of
MR conditional metallic implants.
MR-Touch MR-Touch is a Phase Contrast (PC) application that generates an image
Optional contrast related to the shear stiffness of soft tissue. MR-Touch is a single
touch application that sensitively images the propagation characteristics of
acoustic shear waves generated in the tissue of interest. A liver exam is an
example of where the application is used.
QuickStep QuickStep is a multi-station, multi-phase acquisition technique that
Optional minimizes the set-up and acquisition time for lower extremity run-off
examinations. The acquisition technique eliminates the need for a localizer
scan and employs efficient prescription methods including an auto volume
prescription system with specific coils, which reduces the exam time to
approximately 6 to 8 minutes.
Silenz Silent Scan (Silenz) is a one-click application neurological data acquisition
Optional and reconstruction technique. It is designed to significantly reduce the
acoustic noise generated during an MR examination. For compatible
systems, see Silent: scan procedures.
T1MAP-SPGR T1MAP is used to acquire scans that sample the T1 recovery curve at mul-
T1MAP-FIESTA tiple inversions times that allow the application to measure T1 using curve
fitting methods.
Optional
T2 Map T2 Map is used cardiac images that can be processed in READY View to pro-
(Cardiac) duce T2 color maps.
Optional
T2 Map T2 MAP is used to noninvasively detect changes in the collagen component
(Cartigram) of the extracellular matrix of cartilage. T2 MAP acquires multiple scans at
each location; each set of scans has a unique TE resulting in a set of gray
Optional
scale images that represent different T2 weighting.
TRICKS TRICKS is a CEMRA multi-phase, single station, acquisition technique to
(Time Resolved Imaging of visualize dynamic processes, such as the passage of blood with contrast
Contrast Kinetics) agent through the peripheral vascular system. It eliminates the need for a
timed or automatic triggering of contrast.
Optional
IDEAL IQ IDEAL IQ expands on the IDEAL technique to produce triglyceride fat
1MAGnetic resonance image Compilation
1-18 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List
One-click
Description
applications
Optional IDEAL IQ acquisition.
MUSE# MUSE1 is used to acquire high resolution, multi-shot DWI/DTI scans
Optional
Post Processing
Post Processing Description
ADC and eADC maps in These READY View parametric maps The ADC algorithm subtracts the T2
READY View information from the DWI image. The Ratio (eADC) map is a relative inverse of
Standard the ADC map.
BOLD Correlation
Coefficients in READY The correlation coefficient algorithm returns a value, on a pixel-by-pixel basis,
View that characterizes similarity between the temporal variations in time course
data and a user-specified reference pattern.
Standard
The BrainStat algorithms provide accurate spatial resolution for brain tissue
viability given by hemodynamic parameters: BV (Blood Volume relative), BF
BrainStat in READY View (Blood Flow relative), TTP (Time to Peak), MTT SVD (Mean Transit Time with
Standard standard deviation). These hemodynamic parameters can provide unique
information on tissue changes and improve delineation of vascular-deficient or
vascular-rich regions in normal and abnormal anatomy.
FiberTrak in READY View FiberTrak is an optional feature with Diffusion Tensor, that allows you to display
Optional white matter tracks.
MAGiC post-processes a single scan to create Qmaps and several conventional
MAGiC contrast weighted images such as T1W, T2W, PDW, FLAIR. The image contrast
is controlled by virtual scanner settings of TE, TR and TI that can be adjusted
Optional after the scan has been completed. The resulting contrast-weighted images can
be viewed in real-time.
Fusion in READY View Fusion is a READY View feature that allows you to fuse and overlay high-
Standard resolution anatomical images with computed functional maps.
MR-Touch READY View application allows you to draw ROIs on an MR Touch
MR-Touch in READY View image and to view the wave images in a movie mode. You can fuse magnitude,
wave or elastogram images with the original or user selected series and then
Optional display two images types side-by-side as you draw an ROI over the desired
area.
R2 Starmap in READY The R2 Star feature uses a water proton transverse relaxation rates (R2)
View technique. The R2 Star values vary with tissue characteristics such as iron
Optional concentration.
SER and MR Standard The SER and MR Standard READY View applications allow you to use SER or
algorithms in READY Standard MR for analyzing T1-contrast changes in the breast and use MR
View Standard to analyze T2 contrast changes in the brain. SE-EPI is used rather than
Standard GRE-EPI because it results in fewer artifacts.
Spectro in READY View The READY View Brain and Prostate MR spectroscopy protocols are used to
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-19

Post Processing Description

display functional maps for metabolites and metabolite ratios in the brain and
Standard
prostate.
T2 Map (Cartigram) in The T2Map READY View application displays the T2 Map acquisition, where the
READY View T2 relaxation time color map is coded to capture T2 values from the TE range of
the acquired images. Blue and green reflect the longer T2 values, yellow the
Optional intermediate T2 values, and red and orange the shorter T2 values.
Breast images can be viewed with CADstream 5.5. from an AW system or from
CADStreamTM the system console. CADstream is comprised of a CADstream server and
Optional software that is installed on the operator console and AW Volume Share 7 or
later.
Flow Analysis The Flow Analysis feature allows automatic segmentation of 2D FastCine Phase
Contrast and Cine Phase Contrast (PC) images with through plane encoding, to
Optional calculate flow and velocity information at various points in the cardiac cycle.
Cardiac VX is the newest version of cardiac reporting and analysis available on
Cardiac VX an AW system.
AW
Optional Before a report is distributed, always preview the report to ensure content
accuracy.
SAGE 7
Sage is a spectroscopy tool.
Optional
3D, MRA, and Reformat are Volume Viewer applications that allow you to view :
a 3D view is different in that it displays an image of the 3D model (which

MR General Review may consist of one or more 3D objects), and that you can manipulate
(Volume Viewer): this 3D model.
MRA, Reformat, 3D an MRA view, which is projection images from a 2D stack or 3D volume
of MRA images and allows you to view the data from different angles.
Standard
a Reformat view, which is allows you to define and display cross-
sections of a 2D stack or 3D volume of image data that are oriented
differently from the original acquisition images.
Other
Feature Description
PURE PURE is designed to reduce coil intensity variations through a calibration
Standard process. PURE is an intensity correction scan option selected from the
Details tab that can only be used with compatible coils. PURE requires that a
calibration scan be acquired prior to the PURE scan.
SCENIC or SCIC SCIC and SCENIC are designed to improve the quality of images acquired
Standard# using surface coils. They automatically corrects the low spatial frequency
intensity modulations. They use different methods to reduce coil intensity
variations, and SCENIC is the latest version based on a calibration process.
ConnectPro ConnectPro is a feature that allows your MR system to connect to a
Standard HIS/RIS system.
SPECIAL SPECIAL uses an inversion pulse transmitted at the frequency of fat and
1-20 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Feature List
Feature Description
Standard timed to the null point of fat. This results in a signal produced from protons
bound in water and a decreased signal from nuclei precessing at the
frequency of fat.
Cardiac Tagging Cardiac tagging is available with FastCard. Stripe tagging is typically used
Optional for long axis images and grid tagging is used for short axis images.
Performed Procedure PPS is a feature that allows your MR system to connect to a HIS/RIS system.
Step
Standard
RSvP Agent Remote Service is deployed on RSvP platform.
configuration#
Standard
Second level If the system is operating in Research mode, a second-level operating mode
controlled mode# can be selected from the Exam dB/dt SAR Limits screen. A password can be
Optional set to allow your system to operate in this mode.
Calibration in prescan# A calibration scan is required to precede a series that includes one or more
Standard of the following scan parameters:
l HyperBand Imaging Option

l ASSET Imaging Option
l PURE Intensity Correction Filter
AIRx™ # AIRx uses deep learning algorithms that automatically identify anatomical
Standard structures to graphically prescribe a slice range for brain scans based on
specified anatomical references.
Auto Coil Select# Compared with legacy coil selection, auto coil select means that your MR
Standard system automatically selects the coils that are currently connected to your
system that will best cover the slices graphically prescribed from a 3-plane
localizer.
Distortion Correction# Select Distortion Correction from the Details tab with DWI or DTI acquisitions
Standard to estimate and correct for B0- inhomogeneity induced distortion. It is optim-
ized for neuro scans.
# New features applicable in the configuration of type II.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-21

ONLINE HELP
Online Help concept

Your manual can be viewed in an Online Help format from a CD/DVD that is formatted for your GE system or as a pdf
file from a personal computer.
The Online Help is an HTML document, which allows much of the content to be hyper-linked and allows the use of
various display effects.
Click blue text to link to another topic for more information.
Use the Contents, Index, Search, Glossary and Favorites tabs to navigate to the information you need. If you have
linked to another topic, use the back and forward arrow icons to navigate between topics.
Figure 1-3: Online Help on GE system
Use the menu bar icons to navigate in your online help or add a favorite topic to the Favorite tab.
Table 1-5: Online Help GE system icons
Icon Description
Toggles navigator pane: Hide/Show.
1-22 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Online Help concept
Icon Description
Home returns content pane to the topic that appears when
online help is first opened.
Moves back and forward between selected topics.
Moves to next or prior topic in the TOC.
Favorites adds a topic to the Favorites tab.
Searches for a term only in the currently displayed topic.
PDF file of the manual

Use the bookmarks or the Table of Contents to navigate to the information you need. Simultaneously press Ctrl + F to
open a search user interface, from which you can type and enter key words for a search.
Figure 1-4: Example of Online Help on PC
Procedures
Open/close the manual
Add a topic to Favorites
Print a topic
View a movie
Related topics
About this manual
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-23

ONLINE HELP
Open/close the manual procedure

1. To open the manual on your system, follow these steps.
a. On your GE system, click the Online Help icon located in the footer area of the screen.
The default state for the Table of Contents is open.
b. Click a book to display the topics related to the book title.
c. To view the Index or Glossary or to perform a search, click the appropriate tab in the lower-left corner of
the screen.
d. To return to the Table of Contents, click Contents.
2. To resize the Online Help window, click and drag any edge of the window.
3. To close the Online Help manual, click the Close icon in the upper-right corner of the Online Help window.
The next time you open help, it will open to the default page, size, and location.
4. To open the manual in a PDF format on a personal computer, follow these steps.
a. Load the CD/DVD that contains the manual into the CD/DVD drive of a PC that has a PDF reader
application.
b. Click My Computer on your desktop.
c. Navigate to your CD/DVD drive.
d. Select the desired operator manual file (language PDF file) and right-click > Open.
The pdf file title page displays.
e. From the bookmark panel, click a chapter to display the related topics.
f. Click the topic link to open the desired topic.
g. Consider using the PDF search function to navigate to the desired topic. Simultaneously press Ctrl + F to
open a search user interface, from which you can type and enter key words for a search.
Related topics
About this manual
Online Help
1-24 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Add a topic to Favorites procedure
ONLINE HELP
Add a topic to Favorites procedure

Use this procedure to add a topic to the Favorites tab in your Online Help. This lets you save links to topics that you
may reference frequently.
Online Help on your system

1. Select the topic that you want to add as a Favorite.
2. From the menu bar of your Online Help, click the Favorites icon .
The selected topic displays in the Favorites tab.
To remove a favorite topic, select the checkbox next to the topic to be removed in the Favorite's list and click the
red X.
Related topics
About this manual
Online Help
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-25

ONLINE HELP
Print a topic procedure

Use this procedure to print topics from a Personal Computer displaying a pdf file of your operator manual.
1. Open the pdf version of the manual on a PC.

2. Navigate to the topic you want to print.
3. From the PDF menu bar, click File and navigate to the Print selection.
4. From your PDF print window, make the appropriate selections.
5. Click OK.
Related topics
About this manual
Online Help
1-26 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

View a movie procedure
ONLINE HELP
View a movie procedure

Movies are only available on the MR system online help. They are not available on the PDF version of the manual.
1. Navigate to a topic that has a movie file. For example, chapter 4: Patient Handling > Padding > Padding
introduction.
2. Click the view movie link to view the movie.
A new browser tab opens in which the move plays.
Figure 1-5: Example of a movie
3. Move the cursor over the movie to view the movie controls at the bottom of the movie.
4. Click the movie Pause icon to pause the movie.
5. Click the movie Play icon to resume play of the movie.
6. Click and drag the slider to scroll to a new movie location.

7. Click the X on the tab to close the movie.
Related topics
Online Help
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-27

ONLINE HELP
Search procedure
Use these steps to search for content in the online help.
1. To search the contents of the entire online help follow these steps.
a. From the Navigation pane, click Search.
Figure 1-6: Navigation pane
b. In the search text field, type text that describes what you want to search for and surround the content with
quotes. For example, "Safety label".
c. Click Search.
Figure 1-7: Example of search results with content surrounded by quote marks
1-28 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Search procedure
It is important to surround the text with quote marks. If the text has no quote marks, it will widen the
search to include topics that have parts of words that are in the search field.
Figure 1-8: Example of search results with content not surrounded by quote marks
2. To search the contents of the currently displayed topic, follow these steps.
a. From the Navigation pane, select any topic from the Contents.
b. In the Quick Search text box, type the text you want to search for.
c. Click the Search icon.
If the text appears within the topic, it is highlighted.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-29

Figure 1-9: Example of Quick Search and the highlighted text
Related topics
Online Help concept
1-30 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

User Interface
U SE R INT E R FA C E
System user interface concept

The system screen design has three major areas:
1. Header: contains the Worklist Manager, Image Management, and System Management icons and Scan,
Protocol, and Review session tabs for changing the work area display.
2. Work area: contains the Scan, Display, Tools, or Patient List work area, depending on the icon or session tab
selected in the Header area. For details see:
Image Management work area

Scan work area
Viewer work area
READY View work area
MR General Review work area
System Management work area
3. Footer: contains system status messages, icons for Reconstruction, Network, Archive, Film, and Disk Space
status, and icons to access Hardware, Stopwatch, and Online Help.
Procedures
Image Management open work area
Protocol Session open/close
Review Session open/close
Scan Session open/close
Scan workflow
System Management open work area
Worklist Manager open work area
Related topics
Terminology
Sessions
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-31

User interface terminology

Control panels
Control panels are comprised of selectable buttons. Feature applications such as READY View, Volume Viewer, and
Viewer all have control panels.
Linking
Linking allows you to connect series or images in scan and volume viewer.
Pull-down menus
A drop-down or pull-down menu capability is indicated by an arrow. For example, all session tabs have drop-down
menus.
Screen
Screens or windows are free floating. They typically appear within a workflow and require you to respond before you
can move to the next step in the workflow. An example of a screen is the SAR and dB/dt screen that appears in the
New Patient workflow.
Session
A session is a workflow activity involving scan, review, and/or protocols. Sessions are identified by tabs displayed in
the header or across the top of the screen. The tab always indicates the session type.
Tabs
Tabs are used through-out the user interface to organize applications and features. For example, in the Workflow
Manager area of the Scan work area, there are two tabs: Task and Series Data tab. Click a tab to view it's contents.
1-32 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

User interface terminology
Figure 1-10: Workflow Manager screen
Task
A task is a piece of work assigned in the Workflow Manager. The tasks can be scan data or post-processed data tasks.
Workflow
A workflow provides an order in which specific tasks are to be performed. You can find workflows in Procedure
folders, such as the Manual Prescan workflow. Another example is the Workflow Manager, used for scan and post-
processed data tasks.
Worklist
A worklist displays a list of "to do" tasks. From the Worklist Manager, you can schedule and select patients for scan
activities, enter patient demographic information, complete HIS/RIS tasks, and start an exam.
Related topics
User Interface introduction
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-33

Header area
The icons and session tabs in the header area always appear on the screen.
Header area Work area
Click Scan Session tab to view the:
Scan work area screen

Viewer work area displays when
Viewer is active in the scan session
Three scan sessions are allowed
(one active and two Scan Done)
Click Protocol Session tab to view the

Protocol work area.
One protocol session is allowed.
Click Review Session tab to view Review

work area.
Up to two review sessions are allowed if
system resources are available.
Click Worklist Manager icon to display

the Worklist Manager work area. The
Worklist Manager area is used to:
Schedule patients
Select patients for scan activities
Enter patient demographic
information
Complete HIS/RIS tasks
Start an exam
Click Image Management icon to
display the Image Management work
area. The Image Management work area
is used to:
Archive/network images
1-34 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Header area
Header area Work area

Select an exam/series/image
Launch an application from the
Session Management, Data
Management or Tools lists
Click Tools icon to display the Tools work
area. The Tools work area has multiple
tabs that open unique work areas that
are used to:
Open a protocol session to create or

edit protocols from the Protocol
Organize tab
Initiate a TPS Reset from the Service
Desktop Manager tab
Define multiple system settings from
the Guided Install feature on the
Service Desktop Manager tab
Define several system preferences
from the System Preferences
selection on the Tools pull-down
menu
View error log and write a note to
your service representative. For
details, see Service Notepad write a
message procedure.
View and select options on the
Gating Control screen from the
GATING tab
The menu allows access to additional
functions
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-35

Footer area
The message and icons in the footer area always appear on the screen.
Footer area Description

Message area that displays messages regarding the
system status. Click the arrow next to the message to
display the error log screen.
The Scan Parameter area also has a Scan messages area
that is related to the series in an INRX state.
Click the Gating, Fan, Light controls icon to display the
Gating Controls screen for:
gating
magnet light and fan
The current Date and Time is displayed. See Adjust
system date/time to change the date or time.
The Reconstruction Status area displays the status of the

examination, series, and images currently being
reconstructed. The most recently reconstructed image is
displayed until the next image is ready for reconstruction.
The Network Status area displays the status of the

examination, series, and images currently being
networked and the destination location.
The Archive/Remove Status area displays the status of the

examination, series, and images currently being archived
to the primary archive device. The Remove Status simply
shows "Removing" or "Removed." The individual exams,
series or images are not listed.
The Film Status area displays the status of the

examination, series, and images currently being filmed.
Roll the cursor over the icon to display the disk capacity for
256 and 512 images.
The graph displays multiple disk capacity states:
empty
1-36 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Footer area
Footer area Description

¼ full
½ full
¾ full
a red segment when there is insufficient space
available for the currently prescribed acquisition.
Click to open an iLinq window.
Click to open the Stop Watch screen. See Set count down
time on Stop Watch.
Click to open the online help window.
Click SAR 1 icon to open the SAR display.
Click e-Reporting icon to launch the e-Reporting tool, from

which you can view, export or print a report. The icon
displays "i" when there are unread reports.
1Specific Absorption Rate
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-37

Work areas introduction

The Work area content changes based on the session or icon selected from the header. Once a session tab or icon has
been selected, the work area content can be changed based on your selections. Below is a list of work areas.
AutoView work area

The upper right corner of the screen displays AutoView.
Gating/Protocol Notes work area

There are two tabs in the lower right corner of the screen: Protocol Notes and Gating. Both are covered when the
Details tab is selected from the Scan Parameters area.
Scan related work areas

Scan work area
Worklist Manager work area
Viewer work area
Display related work areas

Viewer work area
System Management work areas

Image Management work areas

1-38 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Click the Worklist Manager icon from the header area of the screen to open the Worklist Manager work
area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to view details.
Figure 1-11: Worklist Manager work area
Table 1-6: Worklist Manager image legend
# Description
1 Screen header area
2 Worklist Manager header area
3 Worklist Manager Patient List
4 New Patient screen
5 New Exam screen
6 New Other Information screen
7 AutoView
8 Gating waveform or Protocol Notes area
Header area
Figure 1-12: Header
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-39

Patient Record area

Figure 1-13: Patient Record area: New Patient (1), Edit Patient (2), Duplicate Patient (3), Delete Patient (4)
The New icon allows you to enter a new patient into the Worklist Manager. The patient is added to the
Patient List once you click Save in the Other Information area.
The Edit icon opens the currently selected patient in the Worklist Manager so that you can change patient
information.
The Duplicate icon duplicates the currently selected patient in the Worklist Manager. This feature is typically
used to generate a new scan session on a patient that is still listed in the Worklist.
The Delete icon removes a patient from the Worklist Manager.
View area
The Patient List contents, by default, is comprised of all patients that have been added to the Worklist but have not
been scanned. There are two Status options that change the patient list contents.
In Progress: expands the Patient List contents to include patient exams that are still in progress. An exam in
progress means that the exam has had scanning ended or placed in suspension but it has not been placed in
an End Exam state.
Completed: expands the Patient List contents to include patient exams that have been completed. An exam is
completed when End Exam has been selected from the End menu on the Workflow Manager.
Find area
Figure 1-14: Find area pull down menu
1-40 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

The Find menu contains all the patient list menu bar columns. Several of the menu selections require text fields to be
completed resulting in a more refined sorted Patient List.
Last Time Refreshed

The last date and time the list was refreshed.
Refresh
Refresh updates the Patient List with the most recent data from the HIS1/RIS2 system.
The Refresh arrow opens the Refresh screen.
Search Data
The Search Data button opens the Search Data screen.
Footer area
Figure 1-15: Start Exam button
Start Exam
The Start Exam button starts a new scan session.
Related topics
Worklist Manager orientation
1Hospital Information System

2Radiology Information System
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-41

Scan work area

Click Start Exam on the Work List Manager to view the scan work area.
Scroll to the bottom of the graphic to see details.
Figure 1-16: Scan work area
Table 1-7: Scan work area image legend
# Description
1 WorkFlow Manager: for details, see the Workflow Manager introduction.
2 Scan controls
Graphic Rx area
3 The localizer viewports display the images from which you graphically prescribe a series. Images
from the localizer series are the default images displayed. Images from other series can be
displayed in these three viewports. For details see Select a series for GRx viewport.
Scan Parameters area
The system default is to have the lower right quadrant viewport display an image. This viewport is
4 overlaid with more scan parameters when you click the arrow on the Scan Parameter menu bar.
You can change the system default so that the normal behavior is to display more scan parameters
rather than the third localizer image. For details, see the Scan parameter details procedure.
AutoViewer area
5
For details see AutoView considerations.
Tabs: Waveform display, Protocol Notes area, Coil
6 For detail on Protocol Notes, see the Add an image.
For details on Coil tab, see Select a coil procedure.
1-42 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan work area
Related topics
Scan orientation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-43


From the header area of the screen, click the Image Management icon to open the Image Management
work area.
The exact content of all the screen areas may vary based on your system configuration.
Figure 1-17: Image Management work area
Table 1-8: Image Management image legend
# Description
1 Screen header area
2 Image Management Patient List controls
3 Image Management Patient List
4 Archive/Network destinations
5 Screen footer area
6 Session Apps list
7 Data Apps list
8 Tools
9 Message area
10 AutoView
11 Gating waveform or Protocol Notes area or Coil tab
1-44 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

# Description
12 SAR screen
Patient List controls
Source menu
The Source menu controls the contents of the Patient List and displays the host databases to which you are currently
connected. The host data base names are also visible at the bottom of the Image Management work area. The default
source list is the Local data base of your scanner.
Figure 1-18: Source menu
The Archive device icon identifies the node as a DICOM1 device that can be used as an archive device. Not all hosts
can be used as archive nodes (for example, another MR system cannot be used as an archive node, but a PACS2 can
be used as an archive node). To be a successful archive node, the node must meet certain DICOM requirements so
that when the data is transferred from the host system to the node, the DICOM handshake can be successful. This is
not necessary for networking images. The same handshake is not required. This icon is assigned if Archive node is
selected on the Archive Node Settings area of the Configure Network Hosts screen.
The Network node icon indicates that the node is identified as a network and not archive node. The network icon is
assigned if Archive node is not selected on the Archive Node Settings area of the Configure Network Hosts screen.
Filter menu
The Filter icon opens the Filter Data screen.
The Eraser icon removes the filter and display all of the exams in the active remote Patient List.
Refresh
The Refresh icon updates the currently active data base that is listed next to Source.
Patient List
The Patient List contains the information in the following order:
1Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine

2Picture Archiving Communications System
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-45

Exams
Series
Images
Image thumbnails.
The size and sorting of each data area can be adjusted. For details, see the Size exam/series/image areas in patient
list procedure.
Figure 1-19: Patient list
1-46 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-20: Patient List from remote browser
Note that the remote browser has an exam and series column that displays the images in the remote and local exam
and series. For details, see View remote browser procedure.
The image thumbnails do not display on the remote browser; this is expected behavior.
Figure 1-21: Exam title area
The # Exams displays the total number of exams listed in the currently selected data base.
The Select menu selects all exams, all archived exams, all unarchived exams, or no exams.
The Find menu finds a category or a descriptive word of the specific exam you are trying to locate.
The Remove icon removes a selected exam from the local data base.
Figure 1-22: Series title area
The # Series displays the total number of series listed in the currently selected exam.
The Select menu selects all series, all archived series, all unarchived series, or no series.
The Remove icon removes a selected series from the local data base.
Figure 1-23: Image title area
The # Images displays the total number of images in the currently selected series.
The Select menu selects all images or no images.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-47

The Remove icon removes a selected images from the local data base.
Destinations
Local DB displays the name of the data base that is currently active in the Patient List.
The Archive area displays all the available Archive Nodes. The slider becomes active when more than three archive
nodes are available. If the archive node is a device such as an UDO1, then a bar graph icon appears above
the button. Roll the cursor over the button and a tool tip appears indicating the available space on the device.
Figure 1-24: Archive destinations
The Network area displays all the available Network Nodes. The slider becomes active when the number of nodes is
greater than the space available.
Figure 1-25: Network destinations
Recycle Bin
The Recycle Bin icon opens the Recycle Bin screen from which you can retrieve exams that were deleted
before they were archived.
Job Management
The Job Management icon opens the Job Management screen from which you can view jobs in a queue and
jobs that are completed.
Image Management messages

The Image Management message area displays messages related to archive, network, and image display.
1Ultra Density Optical disk
1-48 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-26: Message area
Related topics
Image Management orientation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-49

Viewer work area

The Viewer is accessed from two locations:
From a scan session Task or Series tab, select the desired series and click View from the Workflow Manager.
The series must be in the "Done" state.
From the Session Apps list on the Image Management desktop.
Figure 1-27: Viewer work area
Table 1-9: Viewer work area image legend
# Description
1 Viewer control panel
2 Data selector tab
3 Film Composer
4 Viewports
Related topics
Viewer orientation
1-50 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

M R G E NE R A L R E VIE WU SE R INT E R FA C E

Open READY View to display the READY View work area.
Figure 1-28: READY View work area
Table 1-10: Image legend
# Description
1 List of review steps
2 Application panels
3 Source image/ image maps/graph viewports
4 Tool menus that can be displayed at the top or side of the image viewports
Review steps area

Review steps are displayed at the top of the MR General Reviewscreen: the displayed review steps correspond to the
series that exist in the current exam and were selected from the Series Loading Page.
Mini Patient List
Click the Mini Patient List icon to open the list of series for the currently active exam. The series already
present in the session are shown in italics. To add series not present in the session, select a series from the list and
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-51

drag and drop it into any viewport.

Figure 1-29: Mini Patient list screen
Click the X on the Mini Patient List screen to close the Mini
Patient List and return to the current review session.
Protocols
For more details see Protocol selection work area.
The + icon opens/closes the Protocol List screen from which you can select another review step. Protocol list is
the list of all the protocols and review steps compatible with your data set. The list is filtered based on the selections
made from the Protocol Filters menus.
Click My Protocols to only display protocols you have chosen as favorites.
Type any key words in the Search field to easily find protocols within the protocol list.
The protocol list is ranked alphabetically with first the favorite protocols and in a second part, all the other protocols.
Click Protocol Page to open the Application Selection screen. If a new protocol is chosen within the protocol page, the
loaded / selected series is launched into a new session and the previous session is lost.
Application screens area

The content in this panel changes based on the currently active application and the selected review step.
1-52 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-30: Example of a DTI application screen area
Screens that have a hash-marked symbol in front of the screen name can be picked up and moved to a
new location on the screen.
The Tools icon displays additional selections. It is a toggle button that moves the screen area between two
sets of screens.
The Help icon located at the top of each panel is a toggle button. It opens and closes a screen with
explanations about the application screen.
Source image/ image maps/graph viewports

The content in the viewports changes based on the currently active application and selected review step. The viewport
can display images, image maps, spectrum, graphs, etc.
Tools panels
Note that this panel may be placed either on the user interface at the top of the screen (horizontal display) or at the
side of the screen (vertical display).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-53

Each tool panel has an arrow in the lower right corner. Click on the arrow to see other icons in that tool group. Click on
an icon and many display a screen in the upper right corner of the user interface.
For details on all tools, see MR General Review (Volume Viewer) introduction
Related topics
READY View introduction
1-54 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

M R G E NE R A L R E VIE WU SE R INT E R FA C E

Open MR General Review, 3D Viewer, Reformat or READY View to display the Volume Viewer work area.
Figure 1-31: Example of Volume Viewer work area
# Description
1 Mini Patient list
2 List of review steps
3 Top level toolbar icons, for details, see Top level toolbar considerations/procedures
4 Toolbar icons, for details, see Toolbar introduction
5 Application panels
6 Source image/ image maps/graph viewports
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-55

Mini Patient List
Click the Mini Patient List icon to open the list of series for the currently active exam. The series already
present in the session are shown in italics. To add series not present in the session, select a series from the list and
drag and drop it into any viewport.
Figure 1-32: Mini Patient list screen
Click the X on the Mini Patient List screen to close the Mini
Patient List and return to the current review session.
Review steps area

Review steps are displayed at the top of the MR General Review screen: the displayed review steps correspond to the
series that exist in the current exam and were selected from the Series Loading Page.
Protocols
For more details see Protocol selection work area.
The + icon opens/closes the Protocol List screen from which you can select another review step. Protocol list is
the list of all the protocols and review steps compatible with your data set. The list is filtered based on the selections
made from the Protocol Filters menus.
Click My Protocols to only display protocols you have chosen as favorites.
1-56 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Type any key words in the Search field to easily find protocols within the protocol list.
The protocol list is ranked alphabetically with first the favorite protocols and in a second part, all the other protocols.
Click Protocol Page to open the Application Selection screen. If a new protocol is chosen within the protocol page, the
loaded / selected series is launched into a new session and the previous session is lost.
Global icons
These icons are always available. For details, see Top level toolbar considerations/procedures.
Toolbar icons
Note that this panel may be placed either on the user interface at the top of the screen (horizontal display) or at the
side of the screen (vertical display), for details, see Toolbar move procedure.
Each tool panel has an arrow in the lower right corner. Click on the arrow to see other icons in that tool group. Click on
an icon and many display a screen in the upper right corner of the user interface.
For details on all tools, see Toolbar introduction.
Application screens area

The content in this panel changes based on the currently active application and the selected review step.
Figure 1-33: Example of an application screen area when MR General Review is open
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-57

Figure 1-34: Example of a READY View application screen with the Help icon active
Screens that have a hash-marked symbol in front of the screen name can be picked up and moved to a
new location on the screen.
The Tools icon at the top of each panel displays additional selections. It is a toggle button that moves the
screen area between two sets of screens.
The Help icon at the top of each panel opens toggles a screen on/off with explanations about the
application screen.
Source image/ image maps/graph viewports

The content in the viewports changes based on the currently active application and selected review step. The viewport
can display images, image maps, spectrum, graphs, etc. For details, see Series/images/maps/graphs/tables
procedures.
Related topics
Getting Started introduction
MR General Review (Volume Viewer) introduction
1-58 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
Figure 1-35: System Management work area
Table 1-12: Systems Management work area image legend
# Description
1 Tools icon
2 Applications area
3 System Management work area
Applications and work area

Each tab displays different screens in the System Management work area.
Service Desktop Manager screen

Error Log screen
Gating Control screen
Protocol Man from Tools screen
Related topics
System management orientation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-59

SE SSIONS
Session introduction
This section contains information about sessions. In general, a session initiates a workflow in one of three areas: scan,
review, and protocols. Sessions are identified by tabs displayed in the header or across the top of the screen. The tab
always indicates the session type.
Procedures
Open a Scan Session
Close a Scan Session
Open Image Management procedure
Open Service Desktop Manager procedure
Open Worklist procedure
Protocol Session Procedure
Review Session Procedure
1-60 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Preferences
PR E FE R E NC E S
Preferences introduction
Preferences allow you to set default behaviors for a number of different features. Some system preferences require a
password to change the status.
Procedures
Auto Archive
Auto Network
Automatic table movement preferences
Graphic Rx toolbar preferences
Password preferences
SAR dB/dt
Scan parameter details preferences
Set Auto Calibration preference procedure
Save FTMRA Realtime images
Save localizers preference
Set Ready Brain reference line preference
Toggle Show Slices in Graphic Rx on/off
Anatomical Region menu preferences procedure
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-61

PR E FE R E NC E S

This feature is applicable only when the system is configured with legacy coil selection.
Use these steps to set a preference for Auto Calibration coil feature. When turned on, the system automatically
acquires a calibration scan prior to a series that has the following characteristics:
PURE filter is selected

ASSET Imaging Option is selected
Select Auto Calibration as a system preference
1. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

2. From the System Preferences screen, type your password in the Admin Password text field and click Apply.
This step is only necessary if your site uses password protection to access these features.
3. From the System Preferences screen, choose the desired Auto Calibration option.
Select On to always have a calibration scan automatically acquired prior to a TDI coil scan that requires a
calibration scan.
Select Off to either manually prescribe a calibration scan or turn on Auto Calibration on an Exam basis.
4. Click Close.
Select Auto Calibration for a currently active scan session

1. Click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences.
2. On the Exam Preferences screen, choose the desired Auto Calibration option.
Select On to activate Auto Calibration for all series within the exam that require a calibration scan.
Select Off to de-activate Auto Calibration if it is turned on at a System Preference level.
3. Click Close.
The changes apply to the currently active scan session as soon as you close the Exam Preferences screen.
Whichever selection is made from the Exam Selection screen, it only applies to the currently active scan
session. Therefore, the next scan session reverts to the selection made from the System Preference screen.
IMPORTANT
When Auto Calibration is turned off, then you must manually acquire a calibration scan. If you do not acquire a
calibration scan, you cannot post process scan data with the PURE filter.
4. Consider turning On Auto Calibrations for the scan. For details see Auto Calibrations.
When auto calibration is On, once you click Scan for a series that requires a calibration (PURE and ASSET),
then the system automatically starts Auto Prescan followed by the approximately 12 seconds calibration
scan. During this time, the workflow manager is unavailable.
1-62 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

If prescan fails for an automatically generated calibration series, that calibration series should be scanned
manually using Manual Prescan and Scan. The acquisition series that generated the calibration series will
also have to be manually scanned as well.
Note that each time you change the coil configuration and prescribe a scan that needs a calibration, the
system will acquire another calibration scan.
Figure 1-36: Auto Calibration turned On illustrating 3 different stages of an exam
# Description
1 Auto calibration is turned on and the first series, Localizer, is in prescription (InRx state).
The second series, Sag T1 FLAIR, is prescribed (RxD state) and since it has either ASSET or PURE
2
as part of the scan prescription, a calibration scan, Cal Head 24, is active (ACT state).
The AX T2 FLAIR series is prescribed (RxD state) and it uses a different coil configuration than the
3
previous series. Therefore, another calibration scan, Cal Head 32, is active (ACT state).
Related topics
Preferences orientation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-63

PR E FE R E NC E S
Graphic Rx Toolbar procedure

Use these steps to specify whether the Graphic Rx Toolbar automatically displays when a series is in Setup mode or to
open it manually.

This is only necessary if your site uses password protection to access these features.
3. Choose the desired Graphic Rx Toolbar option.
Select Hide to keep the Graphic Rx Toolbar hidden when a series is in Setup mode. To view the Graphic Rx
Toolbar click the Graphic Rx icon on the Scan Parameters screen.

Select Show to have the Graphic Rx Toolbar always visible when a series is in Setup mode. To temporarily
hide the toolbar, click the X icon on the Graphic Rx Toolbar.
4. Click Close.
Related topics
1-64 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Set Ready Brain reference line preference procedures
PR E FE R E NC E S
Set Ready Brain reference line preference procedures

Use these steps to set a default preference for the reference line used in a Ready Brain scan.
The Ready Brain reference line can be set from the Exam Preference screen before saving the first task or the
System Preference screen before starting an exam. To set the Ready Brain reference line from the Exam Preference
screen, click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences. and follow step 3 in the steps below.

2. On the System Preferences screen, type your password in the Admin Password text field and click Apply. This
is only necessary if your site uses password protection to access these features.
3. From the Ready Brain Reference Line menu, select either ACPC or OM.
ACPC sets the ACPC line, which extends from the superior surface of the anterior commissure to the center
of the posterior commissure.
Figure 1-37: ACPC line
OM set the Orbitomeatal line, which extends from the nasal root through the pontomedullary junction.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-65

Figure 1-38: OM line
4. Click Close.
Related topics
Ready Brain
1-66 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Save localizers preferences procedure
PR E FE R E NC E S
Save localizers preferences procedure

Use these steps to automatically save the graphic lines displayed in all three graphic viewports to a series within the
exam.
The Save Localizers option button must be selected from the Graphic Rx toolbar or Graphic Rx screen in
PROPELLER for a successful save localizer action.

2. From the System Preferences screen, click the Enable Save Localizers option buttonOn orOff.
This action allows Save Localizer on the Graphic Rx toolbar to be an active selection. If it is turned off, the
Enable Save Localizer option button on the Graphic Rx toolbar is grayed out or inactive.
If you change the on/off state during an exam, it is not active until the next exam.
3. Click Close to exit from the System Preferences screen.
4. From the Exam Preferences screen, click the Enable Save Localizers option button On or Off.
If you select Off, then the localizer is not saved to a separate series in the patient list, even though you have
set the system preference for Save Localizers On.
If you select On, then the system saves the localizer to the patient for each series within the exam for which
you have selected the Enable Save Localizer option button on the Graphic Rx toolbar.
5. Click Close to exit the Exam Preferences screen.
Related topics
Save localizer images
View localizer images
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-67

PR E FE R E NC E S
Scan parameter details procedure

Use these steps to automatically hide or show the scan Details tab in the third Graphic RX viewport.

3. Choose the desired Additional Scan Parameters Screen option.
Select Hide to display three Graphic Rx viewports.
Select Show to display two Graphic Rx viewports with the lower-right viewport displaying the Details tab. At
any time, you can close the Details tab to view the third Graphic Rx viewport.
4. Click Close.
Related topics
1-68 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Save FTMRA Realtime images procedure
PR E FE R E NC E S
Save FTMRA Realtime images procedure

Use these steps to set a default preference to save pre-trigger FTMRA1 real-time images as a separate series. The
series number for these pre-trigger images may contain a duplicate series number with some existing series of the
same exam.

3. Choose the desired Save FTMRA Realtime images option.
The initial state of the Save Image toggle button on the FTMRA screen for the first FTMRA task in an exam, is
derived from the status of the Save FTMRA Realtime images option on the System Preferences screen. The
subsequent FTMRA task in the same exam will inherit the previous state of the Save Image toggle button.
Select Off to not save the pre-trigger realtime images.
Select On to save the pre-trigger real-time images as a separate series.
Figure 1-39: Save Image button located on the RealTime screen
4. Click Close.
Related topics
Acquire a Real Time scan with Fluoro Trigger
1Fluoro Trigger Magnetic Resonance Angiography
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-69

PR E FE R E NC E S
Show Slices in Graphic Rx procedure

Use these steps to set a default preference to hide or show the 2D scan lines on a localizer when in Graphic Rx.

3. Choose the desired Show Slices option.
Select Hide to display the first and last slices and the center of a 2D graphic prescription.
Select Show to display all the scan lines for your 2D scan graphic prescription.
4. Click Close.
For details on how to turn Show Slices on/off within a graphic prescription regardless of the system preference,
see Show Slices in Graphic Rx.
Related topics
1-70 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Automatic table movement procedure
PR E FE R E NC E S
Automatic table movement procedure

Use these steps to specify automatic or manual start of the table movement for all exams or an individual scan
session.
When a session is saved to a protocol, the last preferences selected during the session are saved and then
restored when the protocol is loaded. This can be useful if you want to disable one of the on/off options such as auto
table movement for all emergency trauma protocols because you are concerned about life lines, for example.
Set preference to cross exams
1. Click the Tools icon and select System Preferences.

This is only necessary if your site uses password protection to access these features.
3. Choose the desired table movement option.
Select On to have the table move automatically to the scan location if the table travel distance is less than 5
cm.
Select Off to have the table not move to the scan location, thus requiring you to press Move to Scan on the
keyboard.
4. Click Close.
Set preference for currently active scan session

1. Click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences.
2. On the Exam Preferences screen, choose the desired table movement option.
Select On to have the table move automatically to the scan location if the table travel distance is less than 5
cm.
Select Off to have the table not move to the scan location, thus requiring you to press Move to Scan on the
keyboard.
3. Click Close.
The changes apply to the currently active scan session as soon as you close the Exam Preferences screen.
Whichever selection is made from the Exam Selection screen, it only applies to the currently active scan
session. Therefore, the next scan session reverts to the selection made from the System Preference screen.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-71

PR E FE R E NC E S

Use these steps to set the default for the Anatomical Region menu to either an extended or limited list.
1. From the screen header area, click the Tools icon .

2. Click System Preferences.
3. From the System Preferences screen, complete one of the following:
Figure 1-40: System Preferences screen
a. From the Extended Anatomy Selection list option, click Hide for a limited number of options to display on
the list.
1-72 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-41: Limited Anatomical Region list
b. From the Extended Anatomy Selection list option, click Show for all options to display on the list.
Figure 1-42: Extended Anatomical Region list
Related topics
Anatomical Region procedure 1
Anatomical Region procedure 2
Anatomical Region considerations
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-73

PR IVA C Y A ND SE C U R IT Y
Privacy and security introduction

This section describes Privacy and Security considerations regarding:
Expected intended use

Privacy & Security capabilities and how they are configured and used appropriately
This manual assumes that you understand the concepts of Privacy and Security.
Privacy is the property of protecting the personal private interests of patients. Privacy requires security.
Security protects both the system and information from risks to confidentiality, integrity, and availability.
Security protects Privacy but also protects more broadly against these risks.
In healthcare one must balance privacy, security, and safety. Most of the time there isn’t a conflict between these
three domains of risk. The healthcare provider organization is encouraged to use risk management procedures to
assess and prioritize privacy, security, and safety risks. Through the use of risk management one can determine how
to best leverage the capabilities provided in the system.
Definitions
Term Description
InSite Agent The client part of the InSite ExC platform.
InSite ExC A GE Healthcare remote service platform.
InSite Server The server part of the InSite ExC platform.
Online Center A GE Healthcare service center
Archive containing images and patient information, residing locally on
Local Archive
the system.
GE healthcare proprietary remote archive with images and patient
Remote Archive information. Both Image Vault and EchoPAC Share can act as a
remote archive for the Vivid Ultrasound System and EchoPAC.
MDS2
The Manufacturer Disclosure Statement for Medical Device Security (MDS2) is available upon request as a statement
of the security and privacy capabilities. Contact your sales representative.
Considerations
Intended Use considerations
Capability considerations
Network connectivity considerations
Information protection considerations
System protection considerations
Remote Service considerations
Personal information considerations
Security vulnerability considerations
Hazardous situations due to network failures considerations
1-74 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The GE Healthcare system has been designed for an intended use with the following expectations of Privacy and
Security protections included in the environment where this product is used:
The system should be connected to a secured network, not open to unintended users.
The system should be physically secured in a way that it is not accessible for unintended users.
External media containing images, patient data, reports and logs should be secured. When no longer used, the
data should be securely erased and/or the media should be securely deleted.
The monitors of the system should be placed in a way limiting the visibility to the user only.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-75

The system incorporates a broad assortment of capabilities to enable Privacy and Security. This section describes the
capability and use of these Privacy and Security capabilities.
Access controls
The access control features may be used to help control access to sensitive information. Access control includes user
account creation and assigning privileges.
Identity provisioning
The provisioning of user accounts includes the steps of account creation, maintenance, and suspension of the account
when it is no longer needed. A user account is created for the use by a specific individual. This user account is
associated with access rights, and is recorded in security audit logging.
Management of user accounts
The system is delivered from the factory with four application predefined user accounts:
l root: an administrative user account
l service: a GE service user account
l mruser: a normal user account with no administrative privileges
l insite: a GE remote service user account
When receiving the system or after installation, it is recommended that you complete the following steps to ensure
customer control of the user accounts:
1. Create user accounts for each user of the system.

2. Give each user the privileges needed for the user.
3. Give administrative rights only to users intended to do administrative tasks on the system. (This should be a
limited number of users).
4. Create individual users for each person that uses the system. This is needed to associate actions performed on
the system with individual persons in the audit logs.
5. Maintenance of user accounts: establish routines for removal of user accounts that are no longer being used.
User name and password restrictions

The system allows you to set password minimum length. It is recommended you establish a policy for password
length, complexity and expiration.
User authentication
The user authentication step verifies that the user attempting to use the system is indeed the user associated with the
account given.
A user authenticated by a valid user name and password is granted access to the system.
The exception is for emergency access.
Assigning access rights

The Assigning of Access Rights is the administrative process to associate permissions with user accounts.
1-76 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

A user defined on the system is assigned with a set of operator rights. This is done by granting the user account
membership to zero or more role based groups in the system.
Only users with the Admin right have access to manage user accounts.
Emergency access to the system

The system has an emergency access mode. The emergency mode is for making the system available for acquiring
scans in emergency situations. This is especially important in emergency situations as the normal staff may not be
available. The recognition of an emergency mode access is in recognition that patient care is more important than
limiting access to patient data. No authentication is needed for using the system in emergency mode.
Service access
Service Access provides the service engineer with access to the system, including access to the systems file system.
When remote service connection is in progress, the system provides visual notification. You can terminate the
connection at any time.
Patient privacy consent management

Patient Privacy Consent Management is the process of supporting the patient that requests their privacy
requirements. This is distinct from other forms of consent such as the consent to treat.
There is no integrated functionality in the system for Patient Privacy Consent Management. If needed operational
routines must be established.
Privacy and Security audit logging and accountability controls

Privacy & Security Audit Logging and Accountability Controls support Security surveillance and Privacy investigations
and reporting.
The system has integrated functionality for audit logging that includes audit logging of privacy related events and
display capabilities for the logged events on the system.
Audit logging content

The following events are captured by the audit logging:
User Management events

Account creation, modification, enabling, disabling, and removal
Group creation, modification, enabling, disabling, and removal
Access to, or modification of, the equipment service password(s)
Login events
User login
Failed login
Emergency user login
Logout
Study or exam/Patient data handling events - creation, modification, deletion and access.
Patient Scan events - start and stop scan.
Protocol Modification events
Transfer of patient data (both automatically and manually).
Modality Work List transfers and MPPS transfers.
Problem Report events – creation of Problem Reports containing patient study.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-77

Remote Access events

Configuration-related events, such as changes to the system configuration or changes to the DICOM list.
External media events, such as mounting of an external USB device, or an empty CD.
Information elements of the audit log:
Type (activity)
Time stamp in UTC
Place (system)
Source
User
The information elements are logged for the events where they are applicable.
Related topics
1-78 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Network connection for the system is required by several system features:
DICOM connectivity to other DICOM devices

Remote archive storage on another networked, compatible GE system
Remote service capabilities given by GE’s InSite remote service platform
System interconnections
The possible system interconnections are shown in Figure 1-43. For a particular installation, typically a subset of the
interconnections is utilized.
Figure 1-43: Interconnections
# Description # Description
1 Workstation or operator console 9 Image reading station
Switch on Base/Hospital accredited
2 10 DICOM filmer
network
3 Internet LAN 11 RIS/Work list server
4 Radiologic technologist 12 PACS
Modality Performed Procedure Step Noti-
5 Scanner 13 fication to remote AE, query and receive
images sent by remote AE
6 Field service engineer 14 Synchronize Time (NTP1)
Perform Remote Service on the system
7 Media: CD/DVD 15
(Secure Tunneling)
1Network Time Protocol
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-79

# Description # Description
Launch post processing applications
8 Media: USB device 16
(HTTP)
More interconnection details are described in Table 1-15 (below)

Table 1-15: Interconnection details
Source/Destination Description
Manual / Terminal User console manual operations
Modality Work list query from remote AE ( RIS1/Worklist
RIS/Worklist Server
Server)
Transfer images to remote AE for review/storage (DICOM2
SCP e.g., PACS3, Image Review Station)
Transfer images to a remote AE for archival (DICOM
Remote DICOM AE Archival Node e.g., PACS)
Query/Retrieve images from remote AE
Receive the images sent by remote AE
DICOM Print-
Transfer images to a remote AE for Printing/Filming
er/Filmer
Save/Restore images to/from external media
(CD/DVD/USB 4) Save/Restore system state to/from
Removable Storage external media (CD/DVD/USB)
Save/Restore Scan Data to/from external media
(CD/DVD/USB)
NTP Server Synchronize Time
Local Service Field Service Engineer performs local service for system
Optional connection to InSite remote service:
Terminal (SSH)
Remote Service OLC
TVA (VNC through SSH)
Imaging Performance Manager
AW/Post Processing Launch Post Processing Applications
Network requirements
Minimum throughput:
Recommended minimum 100 Mbit/sec for wired network for large image file transfer
Host characteristics:
1Radiology Information System

2Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine
4Universal Serial Bus
1-80 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

TCP/IP1 network
Both DHCP and static IP allocation are supported
AD/Domain integration is not supported
Network protocols
Physical and link layer interface:
Ethernet IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T

Isolated LAN connection to prevent increased leakage current
Wireless protocols:
No wireless protocols are supported.
Internet protocol version:
IPv4
Related topics
1Internet Protocol
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-81


This section has information to guide in the preparation of a secure environment for your system.
Security operations are best implemented as part of an overall defense in depth information assurance strategy to be
used throughout an Information Technology system that addresses personnel, physical security and technology. The
layered approach of defense in depth limits the risk that the failure of a single security safeguard would allow and
compromise the system.
NETWORK SECURITY
GE strongly recommends that medical information systems operate in a secure network environment that is
protected from unauthorized intrusion. There are many effective techniques for isolating and protecting medical
information systems, including implementing firewall protection, demilitarized zones (DMZs), Virtual Local Area
Networks (VLANs) and network enclaves.
To assist in secure network design, the following network profile outlines the required network services for the
System.
The system is supported with an internal firewall. The following two chapters describe the configuration of the firewall
and the guidance for configuring the IT infrastructure where it is connected. Recommended firewall configurations for
the computer hosting is described in chapter 5.2.
Inbound firewall configuration

All inbound connections are blocked by the system’s internal firewall, with the exemptions listed in Table 1-16 (below)
The column “Recommended configuration of network infrastructure” describes the suggested configuration of the
network infrastructure regarding the different network services.
Table 1-16: Inbound firewall and recommended configuration
Recommended con-
Local Remote
Protocol Programs figuration of network infra- Network service
port port
structure
Open to DICOM server(s) con- DICOM Storage Ser-
4006 Any TCP All
figured on the system vice SCP
3002
3003 Enterprise Authentic-
Any TCP All Optional
3004 ation/ Authorization
6386
443 Any TCP All Optional InSite
22 Any TCP All Optional Secure shell
* Any ICMP All Optional Ping
Security capabilities
Local archive: The system is provided with internal archive, for storing images and patient data locally on the system.
The local archives file repository and patient database are not supporting file sharing or remote connection. These can
only be accessed locally.
DICOM connections: Works as defined by DICOM guidelines. The application accepts connection only to/from DICOM
entities with an IP-address, AE Title and port number matching the configured parameters in the system.
1-82 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

The communication sessions are on demand, always initiated locally from the system.
The system’s internal firewall will have exemptions for ports used by the defined DICOM data flows in the system.
Remote service: See Remote service considerations for description of the Remote Service and the Remote Service
security capabilities.
Network infrastructure: The infrastructure of the network where the system is connected must be configured to
allow traffic as described in Table 1-16 (on the previous page)and Local archive security capabilities. All other traffic to
and from the system can be blocked in the network infrastructure to prevent unintended access.
Removable media security

The system has an integrated CD/DVD drive and it supports USB connected storage devices. CD/DVD discs and USB
storage device are used for:
Exporting and importing scan data and images

System back-up and restore
Upgrading system and application software
Storing service logs during service sessions
Data stored on CD/DVD media is stored unencrypted. As this data could contain personal information (PI), the CD/DVD
and the content on the CD/DVD must be handled according to applicable regulations and guidelines for handling
personal information (PI) / protected health information (PHI).
Booting from USB removable media is disabled in BIOS. Priority 1 boot device is the systems internal hard disk.
Data stored on removable media is stored unencrypted. As this data could contain personal information / protected
health information , removable media and its content must be handled according to applicable regulations and
guidelines for handling personal information / protected health information.
The system does not have an internal functionality for secure deletion of data stored on the removable devices.
Approved procedures and tools should be used for secure removal of data stored on removable media, according to
applicable regulations and guidelines for handling patient information / personal information / protected health
information.
Data at rest security

System's internal hard disk: Data stored on the system is stored unencrypted on the system’s internal hard disk.
Access to the file system is prevented for without system administrative or service privileges.
Back-up: The system stores data unencrypted to the back-up target. This may include PI/PHI. The target for the back-
up, either removable media or servers, must be secured to ensure the required security of the backed-up data from
the system.
External data flows: The system supports interconnections to external storage systems. This includes connections to
DICOM servers. The security of data stored on the interconnected system must be secured on the external storage
system (outside the scope of the system).
Stored data: Data stored on the host computer is stored unencrypted on the systems file system. This includes patient
information in database, images, debug logs and audit log.
The data stored on the host computer should be secured to prevent unintended access to personal information /
protected health information being part of this data.
Table 1-17: Directories potentially containing PI / PHI on the host computer
Data Description Typical path

Local
Database containing PI / PHI /usr/g/sdc_image_pool
Archive
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-83

Data Description Typical path

Audit log Readable audit log containing PI / PHI /usr/g/gehc_security/eat/logs
/usr/g/service/log
Debug log Logs for debugging purposes, potentially /usr/g/insite/logfiles
files containing PI / PHI /usr/g/ctuser/logfiles
/var/adm
Data integrity capabilities

The system has integrated audit log capabilities to log changes to the data. For details, see Privacy and Security
audit logging and accountability controls.
De-identification capabilities
The system contains de-identification (anonymization and pseudonymization) capabilities to limit privacy and security
risks to sensitive information. De-identification is done by clearing or overwriting all information in the image
containing PI / PHI.
When creating a problem report, the option may be selected. The option is also selected for transferring the data via
the Online Center.
Business continuity
To ensure business continuity several options must be considered related to the data storage. The target for the
images and patient archive must be chosen to ensure safe storage of the data. Both internal and external alternatives
are supported.
Patient archive solutions

The system supports following alternatives for storing images and patient information, both internally and externally:
Local Archive: local storage on the system (intended for temporary storage only)
DICOM storage: storage on DICOM / PACS server
Securing data on remote archive and DICOM/PACS servers

If external archive is used, make sure to establish backup procedures for the external archive. The business
contingency planning of data stored on DICOM / PACS servers is outside the scope of this document.
Related topics
1-84 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The System needs to be configured and maintained in a way that continually protects Privacy and Security.
Maintaining appropriate firewall settings and limiting physical access to the your system reduces the possibility of
introducing malicious software to the system. Your system does not support anti-malware software.
System protection
Your GE Healthcare system contains additional features to improve local operational security.
Linux services disabled

Unused Linux services are disabled on the system.
GE Healthcare service access

To access advanced service software on your system, a USB service dongle and a service password is needed. GE
service engineers have the USB service dongle and credentials. This is also available for purchase by in house and
third-party service organizations.
Remote service access through InSite is limited to scanners that have a service contract with GE Healthcare. When
enabled, the InSite remote service connection is established between the scanner and GE Healthcare through
dedicated proprietary servers at GE Healthcare via a secure encrypted SSH tunnel. InSite service is entirely optional
and can be completely disabled and blocked by the firewall with no impact to operation of the scanner.
Automatic screen lock

Your system has a configurable inactivity screen feature. It can be configured to lock the screen after a predefined
inactivity time. The configurable inactivity time is by default 15 minutes. When the screen is locked, no patient
information is visible on the screen. To unlock the user must enter the password of the current logged in user of the
system or login as another user.
Firewall
For details, see Table 1-16 (on page 1-82)
System change management

The system is based on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server Release 11 SP3.
For privacy and security concerns regarding GE products, please see http://www.ge.com/security.
Third-Party Software
The following third-party applications are included as part of the Revolution CT software:
Oracle JRE 1.6.0_115 and 1.7.0_101

Apache HTTP Server 2.2.11
Apache Mod-jk 1.2.27
Mathworks MATLAB Compiled Runtime 8.2 (2013b)
Mozilla Firefox 38.8
openssl 0.9.8x
RTI Connext DDS Professional 5.2
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-85

Security updates / patches

GE Healthcare is constantly monitoring for security vulnerabilities applicable for the products. This includes
vulnerabilities in the application software, third-party components and the underlying operating system.
Announced vulnerabilities in the operating system or other third-party components, are assessed based on the
system's configuration and use.
When needed, GE Healthcare will make security updates / patches for the products and make these are available to
customers. When applicable, these updates will include patches for the operating system and third-party
components.
Disaster recovery
To recover from a disaster, it would be necessary to repair any damaged hardware, re-install software, and restore
system state, which contains all the calibrations and customer settings used to configure your system. Patient images
are not archived on the system. It is recommended that all patient images be networked to a PACS as soon as possible
after a patient exam is complete so that they can be recovered on the PACS.
The System State media is created after the system is installed, configured, and calibrated for the specific site and
device. It is recommended that the System State media be refreshed or a new copy be made whenever the system
calibrations or configuration changes.
Related topics
1-86 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Often the fastest, most efficient and cost-effective manner to provide service is to connect to the system remotely.
Every effort is made to ensure that this connection is as secure as possible.
The GE Healthcare InSite remote service platform is integrated in your system. InSite enables real-time application
support, problem diagnosis and repair.
InSite remote service

The two major technical components of InSite are the Agent and the Server. The Agent is installed on the your system,
while the Server resides within GE Healthcare. The Agent establishes secure communications to the Server via the
Internet. Key features of the InSite platform include:
Communication from the Agent to the Server is initiated by the on-site user securely via an outbound
connection over port 443 (HTTPS).
The Agent always connects to a known IP address (the Server). The ability to identify the Server is therefore
guaranteed, because the Server is visible to the Agent only via a known IP address.
The Agent communicates with the Server via transmissions that require password authentication. Data
transmissions are encrypted using the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol over port 443.
Inbound Firewall on the system is not compromised. Web services standard protocol uses only outbound
HTTPS Port 443.
Inbound connections are managed using SSH tunneling over port 22.
Data Privacy
In some cases, GE Healthcare may encounter personal information (PI) / protected health information (PHI) as part of
the troubleshooting procedures or under data access rights granted to GE Healthcare. Access to this data is limited to
GE Healthcare authorized personnel only. PI / PHI encountered as part of remote service sessions will be handled
according to GE Healthcare’s standards for handling PI / PHI.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-87

Personal information considerations

Your scanner collects patient demographic and personal or protected health information for use within the system.
The information entered for the selected application is also collected.
The following types of information are collected for the purposes of patient medical diagnosis, user management,
audit logging and debug logging:
Patient demographics
Medical diagnostics and measurements
Medical images
Facility information
Provider information
Device data
If your system is connected to external archive systems, patient demographics, medical diagnostics, measurements
and images will be communicated to/from the external archive sysems. For details see Network connectivity
considerations
Related topics
1-88 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Security Vulnerability scanning is done on your system using Nessus Security Center. All Identified vulnerabilities are
mitigated as appropriate based on risks they pose to the product. Critical and High-risk vulnerabilities, if any, are
mitigated before the software is released.
Security scanning is performed before the release of the product.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-89

Hazardous situations due to network failures con-

siderations
Hazardous situations
The following general hazardous situations have been identified as potentially hazardous as a result of the IT network
failing to provide the required characteristics specified above.
Delayed or impaired access to images or other exam information or patient data.

Permanent loss of images or other exam information or patient data.
Corruption of images or other exam information or patient data.
LAN connection loss during operation may cause loss of data, and damage data integrity.
Warning
In addition to the hazardous situations identified above, connection of the system to a network that includes other
equipment could result in other unidentified risks to patients, operators or third parties. The responsible organization
should identify, analyze, evaluate and control these risks on an ongoing basis including after changes to the network
such as those listed below, which could introduce new risks and require additional analysis.
Changes in network configuration

Connection of additional items to the network
Disconnecting items from the network
Update of equipment connected to the network
Upgrade of equipment connected to the network
Related topics
1-90 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Enterprise Audit Trail procedure
E NT E R PR ISE A U D IT T R A IL

The main purpose of EAT is to provide an API for application generated audit messages and to send those messages to
an audit repository. The transportation protocol between EAT and Audit Repository is configurable. EAT supports
multiple transportation protocols and multiple repositories. EAT provides a web based tool to configure EAT settings. It
also provides a basic viewer to view local stored audit events.
Use these steps to open the Enterprise Audit Trail user interface.
Service assistance is required for initial setup of either the Local or EAT Repository Server information, which
must be supplied by the customer.
1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon .
2. From the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Service Browser.
4. From the MR Service Desktop screen, click the Utilities tab.
Figure 1-44: MR Service Desktop tabs area
5. From the Security Tools folder, click Enterprise Audit Trail.

Figure 1-45: Toolbox list
6. From the Enterprise Audit Trail area of the InSite Browser screen, click Click here to go to the link.
7. From the Enterprise Audit Trail screen, select a tab.
Audit Message Settings tab.
Audit Source ID: the system identifier chosen by the customer.

Patient Name Anonymized: can be set to On or Off to anonymize the patient name.
Save: saves your selections.
Figure 1-46: Audit Message Settings tab
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-91

Enterprise Repository tab, which only applies if your system has an Enterprise Audit Trail Repository Server.
Enterprise Repository On/Off: On enables Enterprise Audit Trail Repository Server. Default = Off.
Host Name / IP: the Host Name / IP Address for Enterprise Audit Trail Repository Server.
Port Number: the Port number for Enterprise Audit Trail Repository Server.
Protocol: appropriate transfer protocols (necessary for Enterprise Audit Trail Repository Server) are
displayed in the menu.
Send Test Message: used to test server configuration and connection.
Save: saves your selections.
If you have more than one Enterprise Audit Trail Repository Server, configure a second Repository
Server information.
Figure 1-47: Enterprise Repository tab
Local Repository tab

On/Off: use On if no Enterprise Audit Trail Server is available and/or Customer desires to keep event
logged locally to the system, otherwise use Off. Default = On.
Display Raw XML: shows Event XML data when an event is selected and you click Display Raw XML.
1-92 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-48: Local Repository tab
8. Click X to close the screen.
Related topics
Enterprise Audit Trail introduction
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-93

DAT A PR IVACY
Data Privacy introduction

Globally, laws and requirements for patient data privacy have been enacted to protect the health information of
individuals against access without consent or authorization. Examples of global privacy standards are:
Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA)

Directive 95/46/EC on Data Protection (the Data Protection Directive)
Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA)
Department of Defense Platform IT (PIT)
EA3 (Enterprise Authentication, Authorization & Audit trail)
Data Protection Act UK
European Union Data Protection Direction EU
EA3 is the global term for data privacy. HIPAA is the term used for data privacy on the MR system user interface.
The Privacy Rule establishes regulations for the use and disclosure of Protected Health Information. Your MR system's
Data Privacy features help your site control access to the scanner and to patient data.
GE Medical Systems has a longstanding reputation of providing customizable, clinical solutions to protect the privacy
and security of your organization’s unique clinical workflow, as well as your patient’s confidentiality.
Please recognize the intended use of the product when determining how critical any privacy risk is, relative to patient
care and safety. GE is very concerned with providing the best care to the patients, and in some cases we have
determined that patient care is more important than the risk to privacy. In these cases we take every precaution to
minimize privacy risk.
Security and Privacy are maintained across a Healthcare system. Any product that is placed into an uncontrolled
environment will not be secure and cannot protect privacy. As we design scanners, we design them to be
implemented in a “Secure Environment”. A secure environment is based on multiple layers of security, a concept
known as defense in depth. For example, a Best Practice that is gaining much attention places firewalls between
departments, as well as at a DMZ, between all extranets, and the external Internet access point. In this example a
radiology firewall may allow DICOM and HL7 traffic through, but no other protocols. These DICOM and HL7 protocols
would be blocked at the DMZ and again at the Internet Firewall.
Data Privacy using EA3 requires you to log on to the scanner and log off when you are done scanning for a period of
time. If you do not log off, the system will log you off and you will have to log back on. Data Privacy using EA3 contains
the following permissions. You can have Administrative, GE Service, Standard User or Limited User. Standard User
can perform scanning functions and modify protocols. Administrator can set up and delete users. Limited users can
perform all scanning functions. GE Service can do all functions. You must have Administrative permission to add or
delete users.
When you are adding users for local databases, certain rules apply. You must use the following guidelines:
Users/Groups – Lower case letters and numbers only

Users/Groups – No limit on length
Passwords – for details, see Password procedures.
Administrator and Limited User permissions have different abilities when logging on. The Administrator permission
can add users. The Standard User permission can scan and modify protocols in Protocol Management. The Limited
User can only scan. Emergency User login has Limited User permission.
Data Privacy is an option that can be enabled or disabled by your Field Engineer through reconfiguration of your
system.
1-94 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Permissions
Data Privacy using EA3 contains the following permissions:
Administrative User - can add and delete users

GE Service - Limited User scanning functions
Standard User - can perform scanning functions and modify protocols
Limited User- can perform all scanning functions
Emergency User - has Limited User functions as designated by the administrator
Users and groups

Every person who has permission to use the system is a user. Users are set up by system administrators. These
administrators may be IT personnel in an enterprise environment, or a site manager or lead tech in stand-alone
environments. The administrator adds new users and assigns the users to a group, which dictates the level of
privileges a person will have.
For example, a person named Sue Smith could belong to a group called technologists, radiologists, administrators, or
any combination.
Groups and privileges

The group to which a person belongs has privileges. If you do not have an enterprise system, the assignment of group
privileges is probably limited to those who have administrator privileges and those who do not. Additionally,
permission for protocol edit may be assigned to groups. If your system is set up for enterprise login, your IT person or
administrator may use more of the features.
If you make modifications to the following tabs the changes don’t appear until after a system reboot:
Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab
Procedures
Activate data privacy procedure
User Account procedure
Role based membership procedure
Passwords
Password procedures
Force a user to change password procedure
Change your password procedure
EA3 procedures
Configure HIPAA/EA3 properties procedure
Local user procedures

Local User Procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-95

Add a Local user procedure

Configure user login procedure
Change a user's name procedure
Remove a user procedure
Add or remove a user from a group procedure
Lock/unlock a user procedure
Group procedures
Group procedures
Add a Local or Enterprise group procedure
Add users to a group procedure
Remove a Local or Enterprise group procedure
Remove a user's group membership procedure
Enterprise procedures
Configure the enterprise tab procedure
Auto enterprise configuration procedure
Manual enterprise configuration considerations
1-96 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Activate role based or auto start procedure
DAT A PR IVACY
Activate role based or auto start procedure

The use of the HIPAA screen is no longer optional; it is always enabled. Each user can have their own account and
password.
Use these steps to activate role based or auto start features.
2. Click the Service Desktop manager tab.
3. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install.
4. Select GI: FE mode in the program list and click Start.
5. Place the cursor in the Install window and click to activate.
6. At the root password prompt, type your password and press Enter to display the Guided Install screen.
operator is the default password. If your facility has changed the password, consult your site administrator.
7. To activate the Role Based feature or Enable Auto-start, follow these steps.
a. From the HIPAA/Security screen, click the Enable features using role-based policies option.
Figure 1-49: 1 = Enable features using role-based policies, 2 = Enable Auto-start
Every person who has permission to use the system is a user.

Users are set up by a system administrator (there can only one system administrator).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-97

The administrator may be an IT person in an enterprise environment, a site manager, or a lead tech in
stand-alone environments.
The administrator adds new users and assigns the users to a group, which dictates the level of privileges
a person will have. For details, see Role based membership procedure.
b. From the HIPAA/Security screen, click the Enable Auto-start option.
Auto-start enables the scanner applications to automatically begin before a user logs on. A message
displays with a 30 second count-down at logon.
c. Click Configure to accept your configuration changes.
8. To close the Guided Install screen, click File >Quit.

9. In the Message box, click Yes to confirm the quit action.
10. From the Tools menu, click System Restart to reboot the computer.
Related topics
1-98 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Data Privacy Controlled Access considerations
DAT A PR IVACY
Data Privacy Controlled Access considerations

Data Privacy using Controlled Access always enables the HIPAA1 Logon screen and a level of security for your
system. The security level setting is set by your service representative during software installation. Your site should
collaborate with your service representative to choose the security settings for your system. Once configured, this
security setting cannot be changed without reinstalling the software.
There are three levels of security:
Highest Security Settings

Typical Security Settings
Recommended for most customers. Customers can increase security settings from the defaults provided by
selection.
Security settings for systems networked to certain optional devices.
At installation, a default "sdc" account is provided. Your site can choose to use this shared account or accounts can be
created for each user. If the default account is used, it is strongly recommended to change the password.
Logon and logout is done using a lock-screen. Entering a username and password opens the lock-screen. If you are
not performing a system shutdown when you finish using the system, you should lock the screen so others can log on.
Your site should assign an administrative user to further customize the security settings. The administrative user can
perform the following functions:
Create a unique account for each user

Delete accounts, such as the default sdc account
Enable/disable an Emergency Logon feature that allows a user to log on without a password
Set an inactivity timeout to automatically lock the screen
Set the password complexity rules
Assign which users can use certain features
Procedures
Password procedures
System logon and logout procedures
1Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-99

DAT A PR IVACY
Product Network Filters procedure

Use these steps to set filters that restrict which system services are allowed to be controlled by other devices trying
to access the Operator console.
4. From the MR Service Desktop screen, complete the following
a. Click Utilities tab.
b. From the Utilities tab, click Product Network Filter.
c. From the Product Network Filter area of the Service Desktop screen, click Click here to go to the link.
Figure 1-50: Utilities tab
5. From the Product Network Filters screen, click the help icon in the upper right corner and follow the help
screen instructions.
Your Field Engineer can assist you and your IT Department in configuring PNF.
1-100 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Product Network Filters procedure
Figure 1-51: Product Network Filters screen and help icon
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-101

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to open the Controlled Access User Accounts interface to configure data privacy settings. Only
administrative users have permission to access the User Accounts configuration.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click User Accounts.
Figure 1-52: Service Desktop Manager
1-102 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

4. Type the administrative user name and password.

To initially set up User Accounts, you must have administrative privileges.
The default user name = root.
The default password = operator.
It is advisable to change the default username and password to your facility created defaults.
Figure 1-53: User Accounts Login
5. Click Login.
When you log in, the User Accounts interface opens to the Application tab.
System administrators can perform a number of tasks that affect what users can do or will see when they
log into the system.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-103

DAT A PR IVACY
Role-based membership procedure

Every person who has permission to use the system is a user. Users are set up by a system administrator (there can
only one system administrator). The administrator may be an IT personnel in an enterprise environment, or a site
manager or lead tech in stand-alone environments. The administrator adds new users and assigns the users to a
group, which dictates the level of privileges a person will have.
If role-based membership is enabled by your GE Service engineer, then when a Local User is added to a group from
the Local Users tab, the administrator can define the groups to which a user belongs. For example, a user named Sue
Smith could belong to a group called technologists, radiologists, administrators, or any combination. Sue may have
privileges for Protocol Edit, System Preference but no permission for GE Level 2 Group.
The following groups require a password:
ProtocolEdit, which means that the user can edit site protocols.
GESystemPreferenceGroup, which means that you can change Administration Privilege settings on the
System preferences screen once you have entered your personal password in the Administration Password
text field and click Apply.
1-104 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-54: Example of a 1.5T System Preferences screen accessed from the top level Tools menu
Considerations
If your facility uses the Enterprise option with Role-based membership, and you have clicked Enable
Authorization on the Application tab and clicked Enable Enterprise Authentication on the Enterprise tab,
contact your IT department for the Group Membership name that has access to the scanner.
After obtaining the Enterprise Group Membership name, from the Groups Tab, click Add Enterprise Group and
enter the name provided by the IT department. From the Groups Tab, apply the roles for the group; at a
minimum a single role must be selected.
Failure to add these roles to the Group tab may inadvertently lock all users out of the scanner.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-105

Prerequisite
The GE Service engineer enables the use of role-based policies by selecting the following from the HIPAA/Security
screen:
Enable features using role-based policies
If you are unable to access your role-based membership, contact your GE Service engineer.
Procedure
Use these steps to define group privileges for a user.
1. Open the Controlled Access User Accounts interface.

2. From the Application tab, follow these steps.
a. In the upper left corner, click Enable Authorization.
When authorization is enabled, anyone logging in through EA3 (both local and enterprise users) must
have a role. Anyone without a role is denied access.
Figure 1-55: Upper left corner of Application tab.
b. In the lower left corner, click Apply Configuration.

3. From the Local User tab, follow these steps.
a. From the list of Local Users, click a name to which you want to assign group privileges .
1-106 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-56: Local User list
b. From the Groups area, click Add to Groups.

c. From the Groups area, click the group(s) you wish to add for this user. If you want more than one group
press and hold Ctrl and click each desired group.
Figure 1-57: Groups list
d. Click Add Membership.

e. In the lower left corner, click Apply Configuration.
Note that if a user does not have permissions for one of the roles, and the user tries to access that privilege, an
error message displays. The user must acknowledge the error message to proceed.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-107

DAT A PR IVACY
Password procedures
Considerations
Read these password guidelines before completing the procedures below.
By default, the following password rules are enforced in Controlled Access Data Privacy / HIPAA account
management.
Must have a minimum of X alphanumeric characters, where X is specified by the system administrator on
the Local Users tab.
Must not include the users Logon Name
By selecting the Advanced Password Rules option on the Local Users tab, the following additional password
rules are enforced in addition to the default rules.
Must not contain a white space character
Must have a minimum of 15 alphanumeric characters
Must have at least one lower case alphabetic letter
Must have at least one upper case alphabetic letter
Must have at least one numeric character
Must have at least one non-alphanumeric special character, e.g., $, #, etc.
Must not contain more than three consecutive repeating characters
Procedures
Related topics
1-108 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to force a user to change his or her password on the next login. This procedures is to be performed by
an administrative user with access to User Accounts.
1. From the Local Users tab, select a user from the Local Users list.
2. From the bottom of the Local Users tab, select Change Password on Next Login.
3. Click Apply Configuration.
The next time the user logs in, he or she will be required to enter a new password.
Once the new password is entered, the Change Password on Next Login option is de-selected.
Related topics
Password procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-109

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to change your password.
1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Lock Screen Switch User.
4. From the Logon screen (Figure 1-58), click Change Password.
Figure 1-58: Logon screen
5. From the Change Password screen (Figure 1-59), update your password.
Type your old password.
Type your new password.
Type your new password again to confirm.
6. Click OK.
1-110 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 1-59: Change Password screen
Related topics
Password procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-111

DAT A PR IVACY
Configure HIPAA/EA3 properties procedure

Use these steps to configure application properties.
1. From the Applications tab, enter the desired selections.

Enable Authorization - enable or disable authorization. If authorization is enabled, anyone logging in
through EA3 (both local and enterprise users) must have a role. Anyone without a role is denied access, if
authorization is turned on. The User role does not matter for logging into EA3, however, other EA3 client
applications may restrict which roles can login.
Emergency Logon Allowed - enable or disable emergency access. If EA3 is used in GUI mode, this entry
decides whether or not to display the Emergency login button. If this is disabled, emergency user access is
prevented.
Emergency Roles - the roles assigned to the emergency user. The defaults allow an admin to assign a
Standard user role, Limited User role, or both roles.
Inactivity Timeout (minutes) - The minutes that must elapse without any mouse/keyboard, etc. activity
before a timeout is generated. When a timeout is generated, the EA3 logon screen is displayed. This value
can be any positive integer, or it can be 0. If the value is 0, this indicates NO inactivity timeout; regardless of
how much time has elapsed the system does not timeout.
Display Last Logon Name - enable or disable to display the username of the last user that has logged in on
the splash logon screen.
Administrator Message - under certain circumstances / error conditions, the user of EA3 is asked to contact
an administrator. This field allows the administrator to specify contact details for himself / herself and a
custom message.
Emergency Prompt - the text that is displayed to any user logging in as emergency. The user is asked to
enter information (usually their actual user name). This text appears in that prompt for information.
2. Click Apply Configuration to accept your configuration changes. Alternatively, click Restore Configuration to
undo any changes made that have not yet been saved.
If there was a problem with making the changes (such as an invalid value or a problem contacting the back
end Servlet) an error message box appears with a description of the error.
If the changes are successful, then a brief message appears indicating that the changes were applied in a
green label.
Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab
Related topics
1-112 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

When you are adding users for local databases, certain rules apply. Follow these guidelines:
Users/Groups
Lower case letters and numbers only
No limit on length
Passwords, for details, see Password procedures.
Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab
User restricted fields

Some fields and buttons on the Local User tab are not selectable under the following conditions. The following roles,
users or groups have one or more of these criteria and they cannot be modified. Roles: limited user, standard user, GE
service, administration. Users: root, sdc, insite.
Permanent - if a user is permanent, he can never be removed. When a permanent user is in context, the
Remove User button is disabled.
The following procedures are to be performed by an administrative user with access to EA3. All procedures assume
EA3 is open and the Local Users tab is selected.
Procedures
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-113

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to add a local user to have permission to log onto the system.
1. From the Local Users tab, click Add Local User.

2. From the Add User screen, type information for each of the following:
A unique User ID
Full Name
Password
Confirm Password
Figure 1-60: Add User screen
If an error occurs, a message box displays, and your changes are not committed to the database. Correct your
errors and try again. Common errors include:
Password does not meet the minimum requirements. Review password guidelines and type a new password.
Password and Confirm Password box do not match. Make sure the passwords match.
3. Click Add User.
You may want to add all users and then assign them to groups or you can assign groups as users are entered.
Related topics
1-114 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to configure user lock and password rules.
1. From the Local Users tab, enter values for the following Lock selections.
Max Logon Attempts Before Lock - how many times a user can attempt to enter an incorrect passwords
before they are locked from logging on to the system.
Lock Duration (Minutes) - the number of minutes the user will stay locked if he or she becomes locked due
to failed login attempts. An administrator can unlock this user before the lock duration time has elapsed by
unchecking Locked at the bottom of the Local User tab when a user is selected.
2. Define the password rules.
Minimum Password Length
Advanced Password Rules - select this option to require the password to contain one number, one
uppercase letter, one lower case letter, and one non-alphanumeric character. The password also cannot
contain three consecutive characters or a whitespace character.
3. Click Apply Configuration to accept your configuration changes.
Alternatively, click Restore Configuration to undo any changes made that have not yet been saved.
If there was a problem with making the changes (such as an invalid value or a problem contacting the back-
end Servlet) an error message box appears with a description of the error.
If the changes are successful, then a brief message appears indicating that the changes were applied in a
green label.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-115

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to change a user's full name.
2. Click Change Name.
3. From the Change Name screen, type a new name.
Figure 1-61: Change Name screen
4. Click Confirm Change.
Related topics
1-116 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to remove a user from the Local user's list.
1. From the Local Users tab, select a user from the Local user's list.
2. Click Remove User.
3. From the Confirm Removal screen, click Confirm Removal.
Figure 1-62: Confirm Removal screen
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-117

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to add or remove a user from a defined group.
1. From the Local Users tab, select the user you want to modify from the Local Users list.
The groups that the selected user has membership are listed in the Groups area.
2. From the Groups area, click Add To Groups or Remove From Groups.
Figure 1-63: Add To Groups > Add Membership For User
3. Select the group you wish to add or remove for this user.
4. Click Add Membership or Remove Membership.
Related topics
1-118 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to lock/unlock a user from login privileges. The lock duration setting does not apply to a user who is
forcefully locked by an administrator. The user will be locked until the administration unlocks them.
2. From the bottom of the Local Users tab, select the Locked option.
This option locks the user from logging onto the system, even if he or she has a valid password.
If Emergency User is enabled on your system, the locked user can logon as an Emergency User.
3. Click Apply Configuration.
A message appears when a user attempts logon.

Figure 1-64: User Locked messages when user attempts logon
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-119

DAT A PR IVACY
Group procedures
The following procedures are to be performed by an administrative user with access to EA3. All procedures assume
EA3 is open and the Groups tab is selected.
Consider the following when performing Groups procedures:
Only one group and user can be in context at a time. If you choose multiple users, the system selects the top
user in your selected list. Once a user or group is in context, you can make any necessary modifications to that
user or group.
If there are no users or groups, then there no items in context. All of the buttons in the center panel are
disabled until a user or group is added.
To save the changes, Apply Configuration needs to be performed when the changes are completed.
Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab
Group restricted fields

Some fields and buttons on the Group tab are not selectable. The following roles, users or groups have one or more of
these criteria and they cannot be modified.
Roles: limited user, standard user, GE service, administration.

Users: root, sdc, insite.
Procedures
Related topics
1-120 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to add a Local or Enterprise group.
1. From the Groups tab, click Add Local Group or Add Enterprise Group.
2. From the Add Local Group (See "Add Local Group" on page 1-121) or Add Enterprise Group screen, type a
unique group name.
If an error occurs, a message displays, and your changes are not committed to the database. Correct your
errors and try again. Common errors include:
Group name already exists in the database
Application session timeout
Figure 1-65: Add Local Group
Figure 1-66: Add Enterprise Group
3. Click Add Group.

The group is added to the Local Groups or Enterprise Groups list.
All information and buttons in the center panel refer to the selected group.
This action does not add an Enterprise Group. It provides EA3 the ability to manage roles for that group that
already exists on the Enterprise directory server, e.g., if you add a group All Employees as an Enterprise
Group to EA3, and assign that group with the STANDARD role, then any enterprise user that logs in through
EA3 and belongs to the All Employees group has the STANDARD role.
You cannot manage group memberships for Enterprise Groups. This is managed by the directory server,
not EA3. Therefore, whenever an Enterprise Group is in context, both the Add Membership and Remove
Membership buttons are unavailable. This does not mean that no one belongs to the Enterprise Groups, but
rather that this is managed by the directory server and not EA3.
Once an enterprise group is added, it is automatically highlighted in the Enterprise Groups list box and it is
in context.1
4. To change a group's roles, select the desired Roles and click Apply Roles.
A green label confirms the applied roles.
An error message box displays if it is unsuccessful.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-121

Related topics
Group procedures
1A HIPAA term meaning that all information and buttons in the center panel refer to the selected user or group.
1-122 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to give users membership to a defined group.
1. From the Groups tab, select a group in the Local Groups list.
2. In the Group Members area, click Add Membership.
The Add Users To Group screen lists all the users that are eligible to be added to the selected group.
3. Select the users you want to add to the group.
If no users are eligible to be added to this group, an error message displays.
4. Click Add To Group.
Related topics
Group procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-123

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to remove a group from the Local Groups or Enterprise Groups list.
1. From the Group tab, select a group from the Local Groups or Enterprise Groups list.
2. Click Remove Group.
3. From the Confirm Removal screen, click Confirm Removal.
Figure 1-67: Confirm Removal screen
Related topics
Group procedures
1-124 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use these steps to remove a user's membership from a specified group.
1. From the Group tab, select a group from the Local Groups list.
2. Click Remove Membership.
The Remove Users From Group screen lists all of the users that are eligible to be removed from the
selected group.
If no users are eligible to be removed from this group, an error message displays.
3. Select the users that you want to remove from the group.
4. Click Remove From Group.
Related topics
Group procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-125

DAT A PR IVACY
Configure the Enterprise tab procedure

Use these steps to configure the properties necessary to make a connection to an Enterprise directory server (i.e.,
MSAD, Novell, etc.). The Enterprise tab is used by the site’s IT or GE Service personnel. It provides connectivity to the
site’s user database. If you do not have a network established in your hospital or clinic, this tab is not used.
1. From the Enterprise tab, enter desired selections.

Enable Enterprise Authentication - login authorization. If it is unchecked, only local EA3 users can log in. If it
is checked, both local users and enterprise EA3 users can log in and local EA3 user database is tried first.
Cache Enterprise Users - enables Enterprise users to be cached once they successfully login. If the
Enterprise directory server is not available due to network or other issues the following scenarios occur:
If it is checked, a local record of an Enterprise user is kept and you can login.
If it is unchecked, an Enterprise user is denied access.
Hashed passwords are cached; the actual password is not cached.
Enterprise Authentication Latency (Seconds) - the time the EA3 login process wait for a response from the
Enterprise directory server. Often times, there is a network latency when connecting to servers, which is
dependent on your network configuration. If the amount of time is reached without a response from the
directory server, the EA3 login process returns a failed login. A value of 5 seconds is typically enough time
to allow a properly configured directory server to respond, without causing undue user annoyance.
2. Modify properties in the lower two boxes of the Enterprise tab to make the Enterprise directory server
connection.
Local Users tab

Groups tab
Applications tab
Enterprise tab
Related topics
1-126 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Auto Enterprise configuration procedure
DAT A PR IVACY
Auto Enterprise configuration procedure

1. From the Enterprise tab, click Auto-detect Server Name.
The system searches for the Server Name of the directory server.
If the DNS allows service lookups, EA3 executes an auto-detection with the Enterprise Directory Server. If it
cannot find the server, it is not an error. Continue with these steps to configure the Server.
2. In the Server Configuration text field, type the Server Name or IP address of the Enterprise directory server
that HIPAA configuration should connect to.
The system must either have DNS enabled or the system must have static information in a hosts file (i.e.,
/etc/hosts).
3. Select the Authentication type the directory server supports.
If it is a Microsoft Active Directory Server, typically select Kerberos. If it is a Novell eDirectory Server,
typically select LDAP. If you do not know, check with the owner of the directory server for information.
If the enterprise server supports SSL connections, select the 'Use SSL' option.
If you use LDAP authentication without SSL, passwords are sent in the clear. This is not recommended. An
alert is posted for this configuration. With kerberos and non-SSL, the authentication is encrypted, but the
LDAP traffic is not.
4. Click Test Connection to test if the machine can connect to the directory server.
If the connection is successful, CONNECTION OK is displayed next to the Test Connection button.
If the connection is unsuccessful, CONNECTION BAD is displayed next to the Test Connection button.
If the connection is bad, then there is a problem connecting to the directory server. Check the following:
IP/server name
if system has DNS running
if the system can resolve the IP address / server name
Once the Test Connection procedure indicates that the connection is good.
5. Once the Test Connection is successful, select the type of directory server, either Microsoft Active Directory,
Novell eDirectory, or another.
6. Click Generate Defaults to populate the Realm Name, Format, DN, Login Attribute, First Name Attribute, Last
Name Attribute, and Group Attribute fields with default values for that directory server type.
If the directory type is MSAD, both the realm name and the DN are populated.
If the directory type is eDirectory, the realm name is left blank. If you are configuring a directory server that
is not MSAD or Novell eDirectory, the configuration must be done manually. Get the correct LDAP property
information from the owner of the directory server.
If this is a non-MSAD, non-eDirectory server, or is a server with a non-default configuration, manually
change some properties, as needed.
7. Enter a username and password of a user that resides on the directory server.
8. Click Login and view the result information to see if the login is successful.
The First Name, Last Name, and any group memberships for the user are printed. If First Name, Last Name,
or Group Memberships are not found, a warning is posted, which indicates that:
the LDAP properties are mis-configured (i.e., First Name Attribute, Last Name Attribute, and/or Group
Attribute).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-127

the user does not have a First Name, Last Name, or any Group Memberships configured on the
Enterprise directory server.
If you get these warnings, talk with the owner of the directory server to verify you have everything set up
correctly.
If the test login succeeded and you are satisfied with the first name, last name, and group membership
information, then your Enterprise directory server is properly configured.
Related topics
1-128 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAT A PR IVACY

Use this information to connect to a directory server other than MSAD, Novell eDirectory, or any other system that
has a custom configuration. The following LDAP definitions are for configuration properties that may need to be
manually selected.
Format - set to domain or dn.
domain is the 'MSAD' way of doing LDAP authentication (i.e <userId>@<realm name>).
dn is the eDirectory, and most other directory servers use (i.e. loginAttribute=<userId>,<ldap base dn>) way of
doing LDAP authentication. If you are connecting to a non-MSAD directory server, more than likely use dn.
DN - is the LDAP base DN of the LDAP server to which you are connecting. Typically this is the fully qualified domain
name separated by a bunch of 'DC='. For example, if the fully qualified domain name of the directory server is
'example.com', it is likely that the DN is 'DC=example,DC=com'.
Login Attribute - is the LDAP attribute to be used for the unique user identifier, that is the user id to login. Set it to the
unique identifier your server uses.
On MSAD it is: sAMAccountName

On eDirectory, it is typically: cn
First Name Attribute - is the LDAP attribute that is used for the user's first name.
Last Name Attribute - is the LDAP attribute that is used for the user's last name.
Group Attribute - is the LDAp attribute that is used to find group memberships for the user. On MSAD, it is
'memberOf'.
HIPAA Configuration finds all instances of this attribute (not just the first, like it does for other attributes). If a
user belongs to more than one group, EA3 finds all memberships.
Regarding LDAP parameter configurations, EA3 finds the first instance of the configured attribute for a user,
except for Group Membership. If you configure the First Name attribute to be an attribute that is listed multiple
times,HIPAA assumes the first one found during an LDAP query is the correct First Name. For Group
Membership, EA3 finds all instances of that attribute.
Save changes
No changes are saved to HIPAA on a tab unless you click Apply Configuration before you navigate to another tab or
click Confirmation on a popup panel. If there is more than one Apply Configuration button on a tab, click the one
associated with the data you changed (the buttons are grouped with the data they manage in a bordered panel).
Click Apply Configuration or Restore Configuration and in 5 seconds a label appears indicating that the changes have
or have not been saved, respectively:
Enable Authorization
Limited User
Inactivity Timeout (Minutes)
Emergency Prompt
Apply Configuration
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-129

G U ID E D INST A LL
Second Level dB/dt password setup procedure

Use these steps to setup or change your password.
1. In the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work area.
2. Click Service Desktop Manager tab .
4. From the list of applications, click SAR dB/dt.
5. Click Start.
6. Click SAR dB/dt Level to view the SAR dB/dt Level screen.
7. Verify the Enable SAR dB/dt Level prompt is Yes.
8. Enter your current password or new password if you are setting up the password for the first time.
If you are changing the password and you do not know your current password, consult your service
engineer, who will have to contact GE to clear the existing lockout.
You can also click Reset password to default. This action also requires a password that is set in the FE
MODE. Consult your service engineer or site administrator for the FE MODE password.
9. If you are changing your password, re-enter the new password.
10. Click Save the new password.
11. Click OK.
12. Click File > Quit at the top of the screen.
13. Click Yes.
Related topics
Guided Install introduction
1-130 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Research/clinical mode activate procedure
PR E FE R E NC E S
Research/clinical mode activate procedure

Use these steps to activate the research/clinical mode for all exams or an individual scan session.
1. To set preference to cross exams, follow these steps.
a. Click the Tools icon menu and select System Preferences.

b. From the System Preferences screen, select Research or Clinical. Respond to any message prompts.
This option is only available if your site has a research agreement with GEHC.
The new selection will apply to the next scan session. For example, if you are currently scanning in
clinical mode and you select research mode, the current exam remains in clinical mode and the next
scan session opens in research mode.
c. Click Close.
2. To set preference for currently active scan session, follow these steps.
a. Click the Scan Session menu and select Preferences.
b. On the Exam Preferences screen, select Research. Respond to any message prompts.
This option is only available if your site has a research agreement with GEHC.
All remaining un-scanned series in the Workflow Manager will be acquired in research mode. You
cannot switch from research mode back to clinical mode within a scan session.
c. Click Close.
Related topics
Preferences
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 1-131

1-132 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Chapter 2: Safety
Chapter 2: Safety
This section presents the concepts necessary to successfully complete the working safely process. Specifically, you
need to understand:
Introductions
Safety standards
Magnetic fields
Gradient fields
Electromagnetic fields
Clinical hazards
Equipment hazards
Clinical screening
Patient emergencies
Additional scan and display cautions and warnings
System maintenance
Safety procedures
Safety Review
MR Compatibility
Service Schedules
China RoHs
Introduction
The MR Safety Guide contains information applicable to the SIGNA Voyager system configuration. A topic heading, a
note, or other wording indicates information that is applicable to a specific system configuration.
This chapter focuses on the visible and invisible sources of hazard and concern in the magnetic resonance (MR)
imaging environment and emphasizes the need to work safely. To ensure safe operation of your scanner, you must
understand several components of your imaging system. This chapter provides brief guidelines for working in a
magnetic field, key concepts regarding the patient alert system, as well as magnet, quench, radio frequency (RF), laser
light, metal sliver, acoustic, peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS), and equipment hazards. It contains the step-by-step
instructions to help you learn how to:
Eliminate Magnet Hazards

Respond to Emergencies
Check the Cryogen Levels
Handle Contact with Liquid Cryogens
This chapter contains important safety information that you and the physician must understand thoroughly
before using the system.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-1

INT R ODU CT ION
Safety Information
The Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) system uses a magnet, which can have a field strength several thousand times
greater than that of the earth’s magnetic field. The magnetic field surrounding the magnet may present a hazard to
personnel and equipment within the immediate area. Therefore, the magnetic field safety information described in
this chapter is very important. You and your physician must understand it thoroughly before you begin to use the
system. You can find additional safety information throughout your Operator Manual. If you need additional training,
seek assistance from qualified General Electric (GE) personnel.
Make sure your training guides are readily available at all times. Review the procedures and safety precautions
periodically. Through Magnetic Resonance (MR) safety education, careful planning, and diligent upkeep of your MR
facility, a safe environment can be provided for both patients and personnel.
For any hazardous incident or system malfunction related to the use of the GE MR Scanner please use the following
contact methods:
If Serviced by GE: Please contact your Field Service Engineer to report out on the incident.
If third party serviced: Please contact your third party Field Service Engineer and have them send a manufacturers
notice to:
Complaint Handling Unit Manager
GE Medical Systems, LLC
3200 N Grandview Blvd WT-893
Waukesha, WI 53188
If the user is self servicing the GE MR Scanner please provide the following information:
System type
System ID
Date of incident
Description of incident
Contact Information (facility, address, contact name, title, and telephone numbers)
Locate the contact number on your scanner or visit GE on the web https://www.gehealthcare.com/about/contact-us
and locate the appropriate telephone number for your location. In the US please us: 1-800-437-1171.
WARNING
Do not modify this equipment without the specific authorization of GE.
2-2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

User Training
INT R ODU CT ION
User Training
GE provides purchasable on-site training by an MR Applications Specialist. GE advises that anyone who operates the
system should attend this session after reading the Operator Manual and related training materials.
GE strongly recommends that physicians who prescribe studies and review images on the MR system, attend at least
two full days of professional meetings dealing with MR imaging each year. Such meetings include the Radiological
Society of North America (RSNA), the Society for Magnetic Resonance in Medicine (SMRM) and the American Roentgen
Ray Society (ARRS). In addition, MR system user groups present symposia and workshops throughout the year that
provide additional learning opportunities.
The healthcare facility is responsible for training outside emergency personnel (e.g., fire department and other
outside emergency personnel) not to bring any ferrous fire-fighting equipment, including axes, ferrous stretchers, or
oxygen tanks into the magnet room. Be sure to show such outside emergency personnel where the Emergency
Magnet Rundown switch is located.
MR workers shall be adequately trained to minimize health effects of high static magnetic field as described above.
The training includes the following topics:
l Emergency medical procedures

l Security zone and exclusion zone
l Emergency stop and emergency off
l Fire precautions
l Emergency actions in the event of a quench
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-3

INT R ODU CT ION
Product identification labels

Product identification labels (ratings) can be found on the tops and sides of the cabinets, the rear of monitors, and
other exterior surfaces on the equipment. Such product labels alert you to specific hazards and the level of hazard
importance. The labels may also contain messages that communicate the specific hazard, the probable consequence
of involvement with the hazard, and how the hazard can be avoided. In the event you are unable to identify these
labels, contact your service personnel.
One or more of the product identification labels in the tables below may be on your system or peripheral equipment.
Please familiarize yourself with the labels that apply to your particular system.
Table 2-1: Warning symbols
Label Description (typical use)
Warning: Crushing of hands
Warning: Hot surface
Warning: Magnetic field
Warning: Electricity (barriers, points of entry)
Warning: General warning sign
Warning: Laser beam
Warning: Non-Ionizing radiation
Table 2-2: Prohibited symbols
Prohibited: Do not obstruct
Prohibited: No access for unauthorized persons
2-4 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Prohibited: Do not touch - hazardous voltage
Prohibited: No metallic articles or watches
Prohibited: No access for people with metallic implants*
Prohibited: No access for people with active implanted cardiac devices*
Prohibited: Do not loop cable
*In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated for MR scans. Some implantable
devices have been labeled as MR Conditional under certain operating conditions. Only use quadrature transmit for MR
Conditional devices. MR Safe implants will have the MR Safe symbol in their implant documentation.
When evaluating whether to proceed with MR scanning on patients with such implants, consult the implantable
device’s labeling.
Table 2-3: Mandatory symbols
Mandatory: Instruction manual
Mandatory: Maintenance instructions
Mandatory: Refer to instruction manual/booklet
Mandatory: Wear ear protection
Table 2-4: Manufacturer information symbols
Manufacturer
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-5

Country of manufacture - Assembled in US
Date of manufacture
Model reference
Serial number
Prescription Use
Table 2-5: Patient comfort symbols
Patient comfort lighting
or Patient comfort ventilation (fan)
Table 2-6: Environmental symbols
Atmospheric pressure limitation
Temperature limitation
Humidity limitation
2-6 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Table 2-7: PAC1 symbols

Figure 2-1: Type BF applied part
Respiratory bellows port. Either of the labels may be on your system.
ECG leads port. Either of the labels may be on your system.
Peripheral gating port. Either of the labels may be on your system.
Patient alert port. Either of the labels may be on your system.
1Physiological Acquisition Control
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-7

Table 2-8: MR safety symbols for implantable devices
or MR Safe
MR Conditional
MR unsafe
or Receive only coil
Table 2-9: Product identification symbols

Alternating current (rating plate, terminals)
Direct current (rating plate, terminals)
Three-phase alternating current
Earth (ground terminals)
Protective earth (ground terminals)
Equipotentiality (terminals)
2-8 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Dangerous voltage (components, points of entry)
Main power on (main disconnect/power switch)
Main power off (main disconnect/power switch)
Power on (only for a part of equipment)
Power off (only for a part of equipment)
Emergency stop
or
or
Fast stop
or
Class II equipment (double insulated) (ratings)
Type B Applied Part (ratings, AP connections)
Type BF Applied Part
Non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation (ratings)
Attention – Consult accompanying documents
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-9

CAUTION – Static Sensitive (Electrostatic discharge (ESD) susceptible parts)
Laser Radiation (laser devices)
Table mass in Kg. without the patient
Table 2-10: Environmental packaging symbols
Symbol Description
This way up.
Keep away from rain.
Fragile, handle with care.
2-10 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Indications for use
INT R ODU CT ION
Indications for use

To view indications for use statement, click Indications for Use.
CAUTION
These devices are limited by federal law to investigational use for indications not in the “Indications for Use”
statement for a specific system type. Under federal law, these devices should only be used for the functions
set forth in the “Indications for Use” statements.
WARNING
Read the full prescribing information on the contrast media label before use of contrast media. Use contrast
media only in accordance with Indications and Usage as described in full prescribing information.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-11

INT R ODU CT ION
Restrictions on use
CAUTION
Federal law restricts the sale, distribution, and use of this device to or on the order of a physician.
CAUTION
Do not load non-system software onto the system computer.
WARNING
The MR system is not designed to provide information for clinical stereotactic use. The spatial accuracy
obtainable with your MR system may not be adequate for stereotactic procedures and can vary depending on
the patient, the pulse sequence used, and the system itself. It is therefore recommend that MR images not be
used for stereotactic applications.
WARNING
Electrically conductive stereotactic devices may lead to high localized SAR. Excessive transmit power may
result from interactions between the structure and the transmit coil. In addition, improper padding between
the patient and any conductor may lead to excessive localized heating.
Clinical stereotactic use refers to being used in localization for surgical procedures.
2-12 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Instructions for use
INT R ODU CT ION
Instructions for use

IEC 60601-2-33 assumes that because no chronic effects from exposure to MR fields are known, worker safety limits
are the same as for patients. However, it is prudent to minimize worker exposures.
Workers must prevent ferromagnetic materials from entering the magnet room. Ferrous projectile hazards are a
major safety concern. Note that some materials that are initially non-magnetic may become magnetic when
subjected to a static magnetic field over a period of time. Motion in static magnetic fields (especially near large spatial
field gradients) may induce metallic tastes, vertigo, nausea, and possibly flashes of light (magneto-phosphenes). These
motion effects are considered to be non-hazardous, provided they do not cause the worker to fall.
Time-varying gradient magnetic fields may induce peripheral nerve stimulation if the worker intercepts sufficient
time-varying flux. Peripheral nerve stimulation is non-hazardous unless it causes the worker to injure himself when
startled by the effect. MR workers shall be adequately trained to minimize health effects of high static magnetic field
as described above. Field plots of the maximum time-varying gradient |B| workers could experience outside the
magnet bore is shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-5: Maximum Magnitude Gradient Magnetic Field from three Simultaneous Axes at the Patient Bore Radius (worker exposure is limited to
these levels as a function of z).
# Description
1 Isocenter
2 Magnet from isocenter to front
Radio frequency fields at sufficiently high levels may cause heating. Outside the magnet bore the radio frequency
fields rapidly decay. Let B1 be the magnetic field strength of the radio frequency magnetic field. A plot of the square
B1 normalized to its value at isocenter is shown in figure below. At most B1 at isocenter may produce the whole-body
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limit. If as much of the body were exposed outside the bore then the graph below
shows the scale factor for each Z location. This is a very conservative estimate of SAR since the total flux into the body
is likely to be much smaller.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-13

Figure 2-6: Plot of the Square of B1 Normalized to Isocenter for the Body Birdcage Coil on Axis.
# Description
1 Square of B1 normalized to isocenter.
2 Square of B1 normalized to isocenter for body birdcage coil on axis.
3 The point (0.707) at which RF transmission is reduced by 3 dB from maximum at isocenter.
4 The point (0.316) at which RF transmission is reduced by 10 dB from maximum at isocenter.
2-14 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Contraindications for use
INT R ODU CT ION

Contraindications for use statement
In general, MR examinations are contraindicated for patients with electronic or electrically conductive implants or
metals, especially those containing ferromagnetic material.
However, certain implantable medical devices have been cleared, approved and/or licensed by the competent
governmental authorities and/or labelled by the manufacturer as “MR conditional” or “MR safe”. For such devices, the
general contraindications as stated above may not be applicable in their entirety.
It is the responsibility of the implant manufacturer to declare an implant as “MR conditional” or “MR safe”, if
appropriate, and to define the conditions (constraints) for safe MR scanning. The mr operator must be aware of any
such conditions for MR scanning. It is the obligation of the MR OPERATOR to assure that these conditions are strictly
adhered to.
To obtain these specific conditions, the operator is advised to refer to the labelling of the implant or to contact the
implant manufacturer. The MR manufacturer does not assume responsibility for the operation of the MR when
scanning patientswith any implantable medical device. Especially the MR manufacturer is not responsible for
controlling technical
parameters of the MR SYSTEM other than those defined by the normal operating mode or the first level controlled
operating mode, the FPO (if available) and the data provided in the compatibility technical datasheet, such as spatial
field gradient.
MR Safe: For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Safe, consult the implantable device’s labeling.
MR Conditional: For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Conditional, consult the implantable device’s
labeling.
MR Unsafe: Patients with implantable devices that are MR Unsafe are contraindicated.
If the level of MR compatibility is not known, then an implantable device should be considered MR Unsafe.
MR environment safety terminology

The MR Environment Safety Terminology is intended to help explain labeling matters for medical devices and other
items that may be used in the MR environment to ensure the safe use of MR technology.
Terminology for defining the safety of items in the MR environment is provided in ASTM F2503 Standard Practice for
Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic Resonance Environment. FDA recommended
using the terminology MR Safe, MR Conditional, and MR Unsafe, defined in ASTM F2503 (FDA guidance document,
“Establishing Safety and Compatibility of Passive Implants in the Magnetic Resonance (MR) Environment Document”).
Definitions
MR safe: An item that poses no known hazards in all MR imaging environments.
With this terminology, MR safe items are non-conducting, non-metallic, and non-magnetic items, such as a plastic
Petri dish. An item may be determined to be MR safe by providing a scientifically based rationale rather than test data.
MR Conditional: An item that has been demonstrated to pose no known hazards in specified MR environment with
specified conditions of use. Field conditions that define the MR environment include static magnetic field strength,
spatial gradient, time rate of change of the magnetic field (dB/dt), RF fields, and specific absorption rate (SAR).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-15

Additional conditions, including specific configurations of the item (e.g., the routing of leads used for a
neurostimulation system), may be required.
MR Unsafe: An item that is known to pose hazards in all MR environments.
MR unsafe items include magnetic items such as a pair of ferromagnetic scissors.
ASTM standard F2503 also describes how MR Safe, MR Conditional and MR Unsafe device Icons are to be used for MR
labeling of implants and devices. For details see MR safety labels.
CAUTION
Safe scanning of patients with MR Conditional devices or implants may be complex. Health care professionals
that scan patients with MR Conditional devices or implants should consult the implant or device manufacturer
for instructions with respect to safety guidelines.
WARNING
Scanners are not designed to regulate SAR and dB/dt for levels other than the IEC NORMAL MODE (WB SAR <=
2 W/kg, head SAR <= 3.2 W/kg and dB/dt <= 80% of the mean nerve stimulation limit) and IEC FIRST MODE
(WB SAR <= 3 W/kg, head SAR <= 3.2 W/kg and dB/dt <= 100% of the mean nerve stimulation limit). No other
limits are enforced.
WARNING
The magnetic field of the MR system can cause a ferrous implant (e.g., surgical clip, cochlear implant,
intracranial aneurysm clip etc.) or prosthesis to move or be displaced, resulting in serious injury. Patients and
MR workers should be screened for implants and those individuals with implants should, in general, not enter
the scan room. For patients and MR workers with implants that are labeled as “MR Safe” or “MR Conditional”,
consult the implantable device’s labeling and the technical information about the MR system.
Prostheses should be removed before scanning to help prevent injury.
WARNING
The tests commonly employed to determine MR Conditional implant heating safety (standard, ASTM F2182,
ASTM.org), require quadrature excitation. Heating results for non-quadrature excitation (such as parallel
transmit, MultiDrive, or elliptical drive) are unknown.
For patients with MR Conditional implants or devices, applying Preset or Optimized RF Drive Modes may
violate the MR Conditional specifications.
When scanning patients with MR Conditional implants, check with GEHC to ensure your system has quadrature
transmit.
This system supports only quadrature (CP) transmit in scan parameters.
2-16 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

MR safety standards
MR safety standards
In most countries the MR safety standard IEC 60601-2-33 provides safety limits for MR exams, for ventilation, and for
occupational exposure of MR workers. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) developed a widely-used
MR safety standard. The IEC MR safety standard is three-tiered. The NORMAL OPERATING MODE is for routine
scanning of patients. The operator must take a deliberate action (usually an ACCEPT button) to enter the FIRST
CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE. This mode provides higher scanner performance, but requires monitoring of the
patient. Finally, there is a SECOND CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE used only for research purposes under limits
controlled by an Investigational Review Board (IRB). The static magnetic field, gradient output and SAR levels for
patient are based on current scientific literature research.
The scanner employs a whole body gradient system whose IEC 60601-2-33 compliance volume is:
a cylinder with axis coinciding with the magnet axis and with a radius of 0.20 meters, for cylindrical magnets,
or
a volume bound by planes parallel to the magnet poles and separated by a distance of 0.40 meters, for
vertical-field magnets.
Table 2-13: IEC safety limits
Local Local
Operating Whole body Head SAR Partial body SAR Short term dB/dt (%
head/trunk extremity
mode SAR (W/Kg) (W/Kg) (W/Kg) SAR (W/Kg) mean PNS)
SAR (W/Kg) SAR (W/Kg)
IEC Normal 2 x long

2 3.2 10 20 80% PNS
Mode term
IEC 1st
Controlled 2 x long
4 3.2 10 20 100% PNS
Operating term
Mode
IEC 2nd
Controlled
IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit IRB Limit
Operating
Mode
Local SAR is averaged over the worst-case 10 g. Short term SAR is averaged over 10 s. SAR limits are reduced if
temperature can exceeds 24 degrees C or if humidity exceeds 60%. Hearing protection (only earplugs have been
validated) with NRR >/= 29 dB to reduce the A-weighted root-mean-squared sound pressure level below 99 dB(A) shall
be used. IEC 60601-1 limits surface contact temperatures to 41 degrees C.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-17

SA FE T Y ST A ND A R D S
IEC EMC compliance

Per IEC 60601-1-2：2014, Medical Electrical Equipment needs special precautions regarding Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in the
following tables. The tables below provide details about the level of compliance and provide information about
potential interactions between devices.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect Medical Electrical Equipment.
WARNING
The MR System may be interfered with by other equipment, even if that other equipment complies with CISPR
EMISSION requirements.
WARNING
The MR System should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment; if adjacent or stacked use is
necessary, the MR System should be observed in order to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
WARNING
The MR System should be used only in a shielded location named as the Magnet Room. Magnetic and RF
Shielded Room requirements are defined in the Preinstallation Manual.
WARNING
The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the exception of transducers
and cables sold by GE or replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or
decreased immunity of the MR system.
Adhering to the recommendations provided herein for the interaction of the MR System with other electrical devices
within the electromagnetic environment may not eliminate all the disturbances.
The MR system has no essential performance per IEC 60601 standards, however, the MR system will maintain its
critical functions by continuing to acquire, display, and store scanning images safely.
The MR system complies with emissions limits (Group 2, Class A) Medical devices as stated in IEC 60601-1-2:2014.
Table 2-14: Guidance And Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Emissions
The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Electromagnetic Environment -
Emissions Test Compliance Level
Guidance
The MR system must emit
RF emissions CISPR 11 Group 2 electromagnetic energy in order to
perform its intended function. Nearby
2-18 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

IEC EMC compliance
environment.
Electromagnetic Environment -
Emissions Test Compliance Level
Guidance
electronic equipment may be affected.
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A The MR system is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and
Harmonic emissions IEC 61000- those directly connected to the public
Not Applicable
3-2 low-voltage power supply network that
Voltage fluctuations/flicker supplies buildings used for domestic
Not Applicable
emissions IEC 61000-3-3 purposes.
NOTE: The emissions characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use in indus-
trial areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential environment (for
which CISPR 11 class B is normally required) this equipment might not offer adequate pro-
tection to radio-frequency communication services. The user might need to take mit-
igation measures, such as relocating or re-orienting the equipment.
Table 2-15: Guidance And Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity
environment.
IEC 60601-1-2 Test Electromagnetic Environment –
Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level Guidance
Floors should be wood, concrete or
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact ceramic tile. If floors are covered
discharge (ESD) IEC with synthetic material, the
61000-4-2 ±15 kV air ±15 kV air relative humidity should be at least
30%.
±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power
Electrical fast supply lines supply lines ±1 kV for Mains power quality should be that
transient/burst IEC of a typical commercial or hospital
61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output input/output lines environment.
lines
±0.5 kV, ±1 kV ±0.5 kV, ±1 kV
Line to line Line to line Mains power quality should be that
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 of a typical commercial or hospital
±0.5kV, ±1 kV, ±2 kV ±0.5kV, ±1 kV, ±2 kV environment.
Line to ground Line to ground
Mains power quality should be that
U t = 0%, 0.5 cycle (0,
of a typical commercial or hospital
45, 90, 135, 180, 225,
environment. If the user of the MR
Voltage dips IEC 270, and 315 degrees)
Not applicable System requires continued
61000-4-11 U t = 0%, 1 cycle
operation during power mains
U t = 70%, 25/30 interruptions, it is recommended
cycles (0 degrees) that the MR System be powered
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-19

environment.
Level Guidance
Short interruptions
and voltage vari- from an uninterruptible power
Ut = 0%, 250/300 Ut = 0%, 250/300
ations on power supply.
cycles cycles
supply input lines
IEC 61000-4-11
Power frequency magnetic fields
Power frequency 30 A/m 30 A/m should be at levels characteristic of
(50/60 Hz) magnetic a typical location in a typical
field IEC 61000-4-8 50 Hz or 60 Hz 50 Hz or 60 Hz commercial or hospital
environment.
Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment should
not be used closer to any part of
the equipment, including cables,
than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the
3 Vrms 3 Vrms equation applicable to the
150 kHz to 80 MHz 150 kHz to 80 MHz frequency of the transmitter.
Conducted RF IEC Recommended separation
6 Vrms 6 Vrms
61000-4-6 distance.
150 kHz to 80 MHz at 150 kHz to 80 MHz at
ISM bandsa ISM bands d = 1.2 √P 150 kHz to 80 MHz
d = 1.2 √P 80 MHz to 800 MHz.
d = 2.3 √P 800 MHz to 2.7 GHz
where P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer, and d is
the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF
transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site
surveyc should be less than the
Radiated RF 3 V/mb 3 V/m compliance level in each frequency
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7GHz 80 MHz to 2.7GHz ranged.
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked with
the following symbol:
2-20 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

IEC EMC compliance
environment.
Level Guidance
NOTE U t is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
a The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 0.15 MHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to
6.795MHz; 13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
b For more information, see section Proximity field immunity compliance.
c Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with
accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site
survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the MR equipment is
used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the equipment should be observed to verify
normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as
re-orienting or relocating the equipment.
d Over the frequency range 150 KHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Table 2-16: Recommended Separation Distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the MR system
The MR System is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF

disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the MR System can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the MR System as recommended below, according to
the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter stated in meters
power of transmitter W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.7GHz
d = 1.2 √P d = 1.2 √P d = 2.3 √P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.37 0.37 0.74
1 1.17 1.17 2.33
10 3.69 3.69 7.38
100 11.67 11.67 23.33
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-21

Table 2-17: Proximity field immunity compliance
The MR System is intended for use in a typical health care electromagnetic environment
specified below. The customer or the user of the MR System should assure that it is used in
such an environment.
Test Immunity Immunity
Band Maximum Distance
Frequency Service Modulation compliance test level
[MHz] [MHz] power [w] [m]
level [V/m] [V/m]
Pulse
385 380 ~ 390 TETRA 400 Modulation 1.8 0.3 27 27
18 Hz
FM ±5 kHz
GMRS 460,
450 430 ~ 470 deviation 2 0.3 28 28
FRS 460
1 kHz sine
710 LTE Band Pulse
745 704 ~ 787 13, Modulation 0.2 0.3 9 9
780 17 217 Hz
GSM
810
800/900,
TETRA 800, Pulse
870 800 ~ 960 Modulation 2 0.3 28 28
iDEN 820,
18 Hz
CDMA 850,
930
LTE Band 5
GSM 1800;
1720
CDMA 1900;
GSM 1900; Pulse
1700 ~ Modulation
1845 DECT; 2 0.3 28 28
1990
LTE Band 1, 217 Hz
3,
1970
4, 25; UMTS
Bluetooth,
WLAN,
Pulse
2400 ~ 802.11 Modulation
2450 2 0.3 28 28
2570 b/g/n,
217 Hz
RFID 2450,
LTE Band 7
5240 WLAN Pulse
5100 ~ 802.11 Modulation
5500 0.2 0.3 9 9
5800
5785 a/n 217 Hz
Note: The distance values represent the recommended separation distance between interfering equipment and
components of the MR system.
2-22 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Temperature and humidity specifications
SA FE T Y ST A ND A R D S
Temperature and humidity specifications

System Suite
Use the specifications listed in Table 2-18 for designing your HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) system.
Proper insulation and moisture barrier should be installed within the environmental controlled space (e.g. area above
drop ceiling) for humidity, condensation, and temperature control.
To help prevent a patient from feeling uncomfortably warm during a scan, make sure the magnet room
temperature does not exceed 69.8°F (21°C) maximum. If the scan room temperature exceeds 69.8°F (21°C), then the
SAR limit is automatically derated, which means that the current scan parameters may trip the SAR monitor.
Table 2-18: Temperature and humidity specifications
Temperature Humidity
Area Change °F/Hr
Range °F (°C) Range% Change%/Hr
(°C/Hr)
Equipment Room at Inlet to Equipment 59-89.6* (15-32)* 5 (3)* 30-75* 5
Magnet Room 59-69.8 (15-21) 5 (3) 30-60* 5
Operator's Control Room 59-89.6* (15-32)* 5 (3) 30-75* 5
Note
* Non-condensing humidity with 50% nominal at 65.F (18.3.C).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-23

M AG NE T IC FIE LDS
Magnetic field basics introduction

Though it is generally accepted that no published evidence exists supporting cumulative or long-term negative effects
of EMF 1 exposure, it is advisable for pregnant MR workers to exercise extra precaution in limiting their exposure as
much as possible. Health effects increase with increasing magnetic field strength. The existence of local regulations
establishing upper limits for MR workers may not apply to pregnant MR workers, although no epidemiological
evidence exists supporting negative effects of EMF exposure on the health of a pregnant worker or her fetus. The User
is responsible for determining whether local or country legislation may exist establishing occupational limits for
exposure to EMF. If such limits exist it is the User’s responsibility to ensure they are being observed.
To ensure safe operation of your system, for both you and your patient, you must understand several components of
your MR system. Your MR system includes the following magnetic fields:
Static Magnetic Field (the magnet)

Gradient Magnetic Fields (the gradients)
Electromagnetic Fields (the RF)
The following definitions are used throughout Magnetic Field Basics section. Not all modes of operation apply to all
GEHC MR scanners.
Normal Operating Mode (Clinical Mode): mode of operation of the MR equipment in which none of the outputs
have a value that may cause physiological stress to patients.
First Level Controlled Operating Mode: mode of operation of the MR equipment in which one or more outputs
reach a value that may cause physiological stress to patients, which needs to be controlled by medical
supervision.
Second Level Controlled Operating Mode: mode of operation of the MR equipment in which one or more
outputs reach a value that may produce significant risk for patients, for which explicit ethical approval is
required (i.e., a human studies protocol approved to local requirements).
SIGNA Voyager cannot enter second controlled operating mode.
1Electro Magnetic Field
2-24 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Static magnetic fields
Static magnetic fields

The main magnet is a stable and very intense magnetic field.
Note that the MR magnet is always on even when the system is not acquiring scan data. The only exception to
this is if service has ramped down the magnet or it has undergone quench.
The main safety issues regarding the static magnetic field include the potential for biological effects, the potential for
attraction of ferromagnetic objects, and the potential for a quench of the cryogens.
The MR system static magnetic field may be classified under several modes:
Normal: the normal operating mode, admissible for all individuals.

First Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for patients on whom a medical decision was made ensuring
they can handle the increased static magnetic field.
Second Level: controlled operating mode, approval of an IRB or Human Ethical Committee required, with the
static field limit explicitly stated.
Table 2-19: Static magnetic field
Mode System
</= 3T for Normal Mode 1.5T
A magnet produces invisible lines of force that extend beyond the magnet that are called the fringe field. The size of
the fringe field depends on the strength of the magnet and whether or not it is shielded. Active and inactive shielding
are used to reduce or tighten the fringe field.
Figure 2-7: Fringe field
CAUTION
For some patients or MR workers, rapid movement of the head while in the magnetic field may cause
dizziness, vertigo, or a metallic taste in their mouth. None of these motion effects are considered to be
hazardous, provided they do not cause the worker to fall.
It is recommended that the patient and the MR worker endeavor to remain still while in the region of high
static magnetic field. The MR worker should always vacate the area of the static magnetic field when duties do
not require otherwise.
The tesla to gauss conversion is 1 tesla = 10,000 Gauss.
The magnetic field exerts force on susceptible materials and biomedical implants and can create hazards. There are
two critical zones: the Security Zone and the Exclusion Zone. Each zone has specific restrictions regarding people and
materials.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-25

WARNING
It is your responsibility to ensure permanent creation of the Security Zone and the Exclusion Zone and to
establish rules for access. Ensure occupational exposure to static magnetic field complies with local
requirements.
2-26 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Security zone
Security zone
The Security Zone is the magnet room and the walls of the magnet room.
Figure 2-8: Security Zone
# Description
1 Magnet room
2 Room length = 19.1 feet (5.8 m)
3 Room width = 12.1 feet (3.7 m)
Static magnetic field plots for siting (rule of thumb - assumes no ferromagnetic materials) may be found at:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/company/docs/siteplanning.html#mr
NOTE: The figure above states the approximate minimum room size for your MR system. Consult your GE System
Pre-Installation Manual for specific dimensions of your system and additional magnetic field plot information.
IMPORTANT!: You need to understand the meanings of ferromagnetic and ferrous substances or items:
A substance that is ferromagnetic has a large positive magnetic susceptibility. (Example: Iron.)
An item that is ferrous can posses intrinsic magnetic fields and react strongly in an applied magnetic field.
(Examples: Iron, nickel, and cobalt.)
The attractive force of the magnetic field in the Security Zone can cause ferromagnetic items to become projectiles
and contraindicated biomedical implants to fail. In short, ferromagnetic items and contraindicated biomedical implants
are NOT allowed in the Security Zone.
The MR System operates with a highly sensitive RF receiving front end to be able to capture the signal of an object
scanned. The Magnet Room part of the MR System installation provides the RF isolation to reduce the interference
from electrical devices outside the shielded location.
It is possible that any device that functions with active electronic circuitry may potentially interfere the operation of
the MR System if such device is introduced inside the Magnet Room even though the device does not have an
intentional RF Transmitter. Extreme EMC measures must be taken into account in the design and manufacturing of an
electrical device if such device is intended to operate inside the Magnet Room.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-27

A device that may potentially interfere the MR System if introduced inside the Magnet Room are those containing
active electronics. Some examples include: Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS), microprocessor, Digital Signal
Processors, analog to digital converters, LCD displays, keypad controllers, motors, battery operated devices.
WARNING
The Security Zone warning sign must be posted on the entrance to the magnet room to alert personnel to the
high magnetic field and warn not to bring ferromagnetic objects into the magnet room.
WARNING
Ensure that the Security Zone complies with your local statutory requirements.
2-28 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Security zone
Security Zone Warning sign

The Security Zone Warning Sign alerts personnel and patients of the following:
Strong magnetic field

Hearing protection: During a scan, all persons in the scan room are required to wear hearing protection to
avoid possible hearing impairment.
No pacemakers*
No neurostimulators*
No conductive/metallic implants*
Persons with pacemakers, neurostimulators or metallic implants must not enter this area. Serious injury
may result.
No loose metal objects: Iron, steel and other ferrous material must not be taken into this area. Serious injury or
property damage may result.
Risk of non-ionizing radiation: If a scan is performed with the magnet room open.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-29

Figure 2-9: Security zone warning sign
Your system may have a slight variation of this sign.
2-30 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Exclusion zone
Exclusion zone
The Exclusion Zone begins at the 5-gauss line. Magnetic shielding may, however, restrict the 5-gauss line to the
magnet room, making the security and the exclusion zone the same.
Figure 2-10: Exclusion Zone, 1 = 5 gauss line
All personnel should be aware of the gauss line and actively screen the changing conditions of the environment.
There are gauss lines and equipment that must remain outside certain limits. Consult your GE Service Engineer to
know where these gauss lines are located in your facility.
WARNING
The Exclusion Zone warning sign must be posted at the 5 gauss boundary. Locate and read the Exclusion Zone
signs at your facility.
Exclusion Zone Warning sign

The Exclusion Zone Warning Sign alerts personnel and patients of the following:
Strong magnetic field

No pacemakers*
No neurostimulators*
No conductive/metallic implants*
Persons with pacemakers, neurostimulators or metallic implants must not enter this area. Serious injury
may result.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-31

Figure 2-11: Exclusion zone warning sign
Your system may have a slight variation of this sign.
WARNING
Ensure that the Exclusion Zone complies with your local statutory requirements.
2-32 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Biological effects
Biological effects
The static magnetic field strengths used by your MR system are within the guidelines provided by the United States
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for clinical imaging. However, there are several cautions that need to be
understood:
CAUTION
Minimize the time spent near the magnet. Spend only the time necessary to attend to the needs of the
patient.
CAUTION
MR scanning has not been established as safe for imaging fetuses or infants. Carefully compare the benefits
of MR versus alternative procedures before scanning to control risk to the patient. A physician should consider
whether to limit scanning of pregnant or infant patients to the Normal dB/dt and Normal SAR operating mode.
It is not advisable to scan pregnant patients in the first trimester or unknown pregnancy status as the fetus is
especially sensitive to potential thermal events during the first trimester.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-33

Ferromagnetic objects
Ferromagnetic objects brought within close proximity of the static magnetic field can become projectiles, which could
cause harm to someone standing between the object and the magnet. The force of attraction between a magnet and a
ferromagnetic object is determined by the magnetic field strength (fringe field), the magnetic susceptibility of the
object, its mass, its distance from the magnet, and its orientation to the field.
Use only non-ferrous oxygen tanks, wheelchairs, gurneys, intravenous (IV) poles, ventilators, etc. in the magnet room.
Be sure anyone who has access to the MR suite is aware that only non-ferrous items are allowed in the magnet room.
Make them aware that policies and procedures are in place for bringing medical devices and other equipment into the
magnet room.
In addition to the projectile hazard, the static magnetic field can cause ferromagnetic objects within the patient (e.g.,
surgical clips, prostheses) to move, thus possibly causing harm. Electrically, magnetically, or mechanically activated
implants can become dysfunctional due to the static magnetic field. If these devices are life-supporting, harm could
result. For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.
WARNING
The attractive force of the magnetic field of the MR system can cause ferrous objects to become projectiles
that can cause serious injury. Post the security zone warning sign on the entrance to the magnet room and
keep all hazardous objects out of the magnet room. If a ferromagnetic object has become attached to the
magnet, contact GE Service for assistance.
WARNING
To help prevent patient or operator injury, do not bring ferrous materials such as battery operated devices
into the magnet room.
WARNING
To help prevent patient or operator injury, do not bring ferrous oxygen bottles into the magnet room.
CAUTION
Common hospital equipment, which often have ferrous battery packs, such as patient monitoring, and life
supporting devices, may be adversely affected when in proximity to the magnetic field or image quality may
be affected by the presence of this equipment.
CAUTION
The only GE supplied tools recommended for use inside the Security zone are the phantoms supplied with
your system.
2-34 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Ferromagnetic objects
WARNING
Electrical discharges between conductive devices and the MR coils can startle or burn the patient and possibly
cause the patient to injure himself/herself. To help avoid such reactions, do not place metal objects (e.g., limb
braces, traction mechanisms, stereotactic devices, etc.) in the MR magnet.
WARNING
The fringe field can cause injury by interfering with the normal operation of biomedical devices.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-35

Spatial magnetic field data

MR environment safety terminology
The MR Environment Safety Terminology is intended to help explain labeling matters for medical devices and other
items that may be used in the MR environment to ensure the safe use of MR technology.
Terminology for defining the safety of items in the MR environment is provided in ASTM F2503 Standard Practice for
Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic Resonance Environment. FDA recommended
using the terminology MR Safe, MR Conditional, and MR Unsafe, defined in ASTM F2503 (FDA guidance document,
“Establishing Safety and Compatibility of Passive Implants in the Magnetic Resonance (MR) Environment Document”).
Definitions
MR safe: An item that poses no known hazards in all MR imaging environments.
With this terminology, MR safe items are non-conducting, non-metallic, and non-magnetic items, such as a plastic
Petri dish. An item may be determined to be MR safe by providing a scientifically based rationale rather than test data.
MR Conditional: An item that has been demonstrated to pose no known hazards in specified MR environment with
specified conditions of use. Field conditions that define the MR environment include static magnetic field strength,
spatial gradient, time rate of change of the magnetic field (dB/dt), RF fields, and specific absorption rate (SAR).
Additional conditions, including specific configurations of the item (e.g., the routing of leads used for a
neurostimulation system), may be required.
MR Unsafe: An item that is known to pose hazards in all MR environments.
MR unsafe items include magnetic items such as a pair of ferromagnetic scissors.
ASTM standard F2503 also describes how MR Safe, MR Conditional and MR Unsafe device Icons are to be used for MR
labeling of implants and devices. For details see MR safety labels.
CAUTION
WARNING
Scanners are not designed to regulate SAR and dB/dt for levels other than the IEC NORMAL MODE (WB SAR <=
2 W/kg, head SAR <= 3.2 W/kg and dB/dt <= 80% of the mean nerve stimulation limit) and IEC FIRST MODE
(WB SAR <= 3 W/kg, head SAR <= 3.2 W/kg and dB/dt <= 100% of the mean nerve stimulation limit). No other
limits are enforced.
WARNING
2-36 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Magnet information
The peak main magnetic field (B 0), peak gradient of the main magnetic field (grad(B 0)), and the peak force product
(main magnetic field times the peak gradient of the main magnet field [B 0 grad(B 0)]) and their spatial locations are
provided in cylindrical coordinates with centers at magnet isocenter.
Note that peak accessible values typically occur (see figure below) at or near the magnet covers (shroud) in a
patient accessible area. To find the magnet type used with your system, contact your GE field service engineer.
Definitions
Peak main magnetic field (B 0), maximum magnetic field magnitude at patient accessible locations.
For solenoid magnets these values typically lie on circles with radius R from the axis of the magnet on both the
front and the back of the magnet at ±Z from isocenter.
Peak gradient of the main magnetic field (grad(B 0)).
The peak gradient of the static magnetic field, B 0, is the maximum rate of change of the main magnetic field
magnitude along any direction at a patient accessible location. For solenoid magnets these values typically lie
on circles with (see table and figure below) radius R from the axis of the magnet on both the front and the back
covers of the magnet at ± Z from isocenter.
Note that the strength of time-varying gradients are small and not relevant to magnetic force considerations.
Peak force product (B 0 grad(B 0)).
The peak force product is the maximum product of B 0 and grad(B 0) at accessible locations. Note that maximum
forces and torques will occur at this location. Only values in a patient accessible area with magnet covers in
place are given in the table below. For solenoid magnets (see figure below) these values typically lie on circles
with radius R from the axis of the magnet on both the front and the back of the magnet at ± Z from isocenter.
Locations
Defined in cylindrical coordinates, (Z, R) with (Z=0, R=0) being magnet isocenter apply to both the front and back
of the magnet (see table and figure below). For solenoid magnets the same maximum values occur at R, ± Z for
all angles, i.e., the same peak values form a circle with radius R at ±Z.
Translational Force
Force acting to move the center of mass of an object. Ferromagnetic objects in non-uniform magnetic fields
experience translational forces.
Torque
A pair of opposite forces some distance apart acting to rotate an object without changing the position of the
center of mass. Asymmetrically-shaped ferromagnetic objects (such as needle-shaped objects) experience
torques in magnetic fields.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-37

Figure 2-12: Magnet location of fringe-field maximum. Spatial locations of peak fields accessible to patients. The origin of the cylindrical coordinates
is magnet isocenter. Cylindrical coordinates locate points a radius R from the magnet axis (centerline) and a distance z from isocenter on axis.
# Description
1 Side cut-away view of magnet.
2 Front view of magnet.
3 Cylindrical magnet and cover (shroud).
Peak B
Peak grad (B)
Peak B* grad (B)
4 Typically, peak B, peak grad (B), and peak B*grad(B) are close to the magnet covers in a patient
accessible area and are symmetric for rotations about the long axis of the magnet (equal fields for
(Z,R) along a circle centered on axis). The peak values are in the shaded regions. Specific locations
(R.Z) are identified in table below.
5 Patient bore.
Spatial Magnetic Field

Maximum forces and torques on ferromagnetic objects depend on the force product.
Forces and Torques

Spheres of uniform ferromagnetic material experience translational forces near magnets, but no torque.
Asymmetric ferromagnetic objects (for example long cylinders) may experience both translational forces and
torques. For such objects the translational force can be orders of magnitude lower than those related to
torque.
Magnetic translational force depends on the force product (B0 grad(B0)) with the maximum force occurring for
the maximum force product.
Torques increase rapidly with (B )2 and depend on angle from B and shape of object.
0 0
MR compatibility investigators have reported the maximum static magnetic fringe field gradient in the past as a
safety criterion. For each maximum the maximum values, the spatial locations (cylindrical coordinates (Z,R)),
and the values of the other (typically non-maximum) parameters are given below for GE magnets.
The table below contains coordinates for and values of maximum B 0, maximum grad(B 0), and maximum B 0(grad(B 0)).
MR compatibility investigators have reported the maximum static magnetic fringe field gradient in the past as a
2-38 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

criterion for MR compatibility though the force product actually determines translational force on ferromagnetic
objects. The maximum field values (shown with red borders), the spatial locations (in cylindrical coordinates (z,R)), and
the values of the other (typically non-maximum) parameters are given below for GE magnets
Useful unit conversions
1 T/m = 100 G/cm

1 G/cm = 0.01 T/m
1 T2/m = 106 G 2/cm
1 G 2/cm = 10-6 T2/m
Peak static spatial gradients on patient accessible areas table

See figure above for explanation of R and Z. If you are not sure of your system configuration, consult your service
engineer.
SIGNA Voyager Enclosure
Go to About MR Scanner in your system software to understand the magnet configuration.
Figure 2-13: Classic enclosure for IPM magnet

Figure 2-14: Modern enclosure for IPM magnet
Figure 2-15: Enclosure for LCCW magnet
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-39

Table 2-22: SIGNA Voyager enclosure peak static spatial gradients on patient accessible areas for LCCW magnet
max(B)*
Patient bore Radial Location Location along Grad(B)
Field Name Parameter B(T) grad(B)
type R(m) Z(m) (T/m)
(T2/m)
Peak B 0.35 0.62 2.0 4.8 9.7
1.5T 70
Peak Gradient 0.35 0.74 1.7 6.4 10.5
LCCW VRMW
Peak Product 0.35 0.68 2.0 5.6 11.0
Table 2-23: SIGNA Voyager enclosure peak static spatial gradients on patient accessible areas for IPM magnet
max(B)
Grad *
Field Patient bore Radial Location R Location along Z B (B)
Parameter
Name type (m) (m) (T) grad(B)
(T/m)
(T2/m)
Peak B 0.35 0.62 2.0 3.7 7.2
70 Peak Gradi-
1.5T IPM 0.35 0.78 1.5 5.7 8.8
VRMW ent
Peak Product 0.35 0.74 1.7 5.3 9.2
Magnetic Field Plots

Coordinate system for field and gradient where Z is in the B0 direction, R is the radius, and the origin is isocenter.
The following figures represent the contour map for the static magnetic field (B0) from the MR system at positions
accessible to the MR worker.
Figure 2-16: Contour map of the static magnetic field (B0) for an 1.5T LCC magnet. View from above magnet with a 25 cm grid overlaid
2-40 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 2-17: Contour map of the static magnetic field (B0) for an 1.5T IPM magnet. View from above magnet with a 25 cm grid overlaid
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-41

Understanding spatial gradients

This information is provided to assist in understanding spatial gradients. This information should be used together with
the information in the safety manuals for your system.
l What does a magnet's B0 field look like?

l What is the spatial gradient?
l How do I know where a given spatial gradient value occurs?
l What are the spatial gradients differences between 1.5T and 3.0T systems?
l What are the spatial gradients differences between 60 cm and 70 cm bores?
l Spatial gradient control distances for SIGNA Voyager systems for LCCW magnet
l Spatial gradient control distances for SIGNA Voyager systems for IPM magnet
2-42 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

The B0 field
The B0 field
When we speak of an MRI magnet “field” we usually mean the main magnetic field, or B0 field. The center of a 1.5T
magnet has a B0 field of 1.5 Tesla, or 15,000 Gauss. The B0 field decreases rapidly as you move away from the bore;
at 2 meters from isocenter, this field is down to several percent of the field at isocenter.
The shape of the B0 field approximately matches that of the magnet and (typically) the enclosures encapsulating it.
The cylindrical magnets used in MRI create a roughly barrel shaped field outside the magnet. Figure 2-18 shows two
isocontours (surfaces of constant magnetic field strength) for a typical 1.5T magnet’s B0 field. The green surface
shows where the field strength is 300 G, which is 2% of the field at center. The blue surface is 1200 G, or 8%. (One
quadrant is removed for clarity.)
A contour map, or contour plot, is a two dimensional diagram of a slice through this 3D field. Figure 2-19 shows the
same field as Figure 2-18 – translated into a contour map. The map shows the field contours on a horizontal plane
through the center of the magnet. The 300 and 1200 G contours are shown along with several others (100, 600, 3000,
and 10000 G). You can see how the contour shapes match between the two figures.
It is important to understand and remember that the magnet’s field is in three dimensions, shaped roughly like the
magnet, and that the contour maps commonly used are two dimensional representations of the actual field.
Figure 2-18: Two isocontours for the B0 field for a 1.5T magnet.
# Description
1 300 G surface
2 1200 G surface
3 Magnet
4 B0 field
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-43

Figure 2-19: A contour map, showing the field contours on a plane through the center of the magnet (1)
2-44 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Spatial gradient
Spatial gradient
The spatial gradient, or SG, of the B0 field gets a lot of attention because it is part of what affects objects susceptible to
magnetic fields. Spatial gradients are typically given as G/cm or T/m. (100G/cm = 1 T/m.)
The spatial gradient is defined as how the B0 field changes with location: if the strength of the B0 field changes by 500
G between two locations 1 cm apart, the spatial gradient is 500 G/cm between those two points.
The shape of the SG field is quite different from the shape of B0. Like the B0 field, the spatial gradient’s shape is a
symmetrical, three dimensional field that follows the cylindrical shape of the magnet. Figure 2-20 shows two spatial
gradient isocontours for a 1.5T magnet. The green surface is at 400 G/cm. The blue is a higher spatial gradient at 700
G/cm. (The spatial gradient is the same at the front and back of the magnet – the back isocontours are removed for
clarity in this figure.)
Figure 2-21 is a spatial gradient contour map (again, a two dimensional slice through the three dimensional field)
shows the 700 and 400 G/cm contours. The contours are symmetrical around the centerline of the magnet, both side-
to-side and end-to-end. Contours at 20, 100, and 250 are added, and they show three important behaviors of the
spatial gradient field:
1. The SG is greatest near the ends of the magnet, and decreases both further from the magnet and near the
center of the magnet.
2. The isocontour shape leaves a circular opening at the mouth of the magnet. The opening size increases with
the value of the SG. The opening in the blue 700 G/cm isocontour is larger than the green 400 G/cm isocontour.
3. Although the center of the magnet has very low spatial gradients, there is no way to get there without passing
through higher spatial gradient regions. In this example, the spatial gradient reaches at least 250 G/cm on the
way into the magnet.
Figure 2-20: Two isocontours of the spatial gradient for a 1.5T magnet
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-45

# Description
1 400 G/cm surface
2 700 G/cm surface
3 Magnet
4 B0 field
Figure 2-21: A contour map of the spatial gradient for an 1.5T magnet (1)
2-46 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Locations of spatial gradient occurrences

A clear understanding of the spatial gradient inside the bore is useful. In general, spatial gradients “reach into the
bore” near the mouth of the magnet. A higher SG reaches less into the bore than a lower one. Figure 2-22 (again a
typical 1.5T magnet) gives some insight. In this example, two spatial gradient contours are compared: 320 and 400
G/cm. The 320 contours reach into the bore far enough to leave a 28 cm gap. The 400 G/cm contours leave a 48 cm
gap.
Given the three dimensional shape of the field, these gaps translates into a circular opening, centered on the magnet’s
z axis; when extended along the z-axis, this circle becomes a cylinder, centered in the bore. Staying within this
cylinder assures that you stay away from a high spatial gradient. In this example, staying within a 28 cm diameter
cylinder keeps the spatial gradient below 320 G/cm.
Rather than trying to visualize a cylinder, it may be easier to think of staying a certain distance away from the bore
wall. Example: for a 70 cm system and a 48 cm gap, this distance is 11 cm, as shown below.
Figure 2-22: The spatial gradient near the mouth of a 1.5T magnet
# Description
1 Spatial gradient (G/cm) (blue lines)
2 Bore wall (green lines)
3 11 cm from 70 cm bore wall
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-47

# Description
4 70 cm bore diameter
5 48 cm gap at 400 G/cm
6 Area inside enclosures
7 28 cm gap at 320 G/cm
Thresholds
There is a lower SG threshold, below which there is no path into the center of the magnet. In this example, there is no
path into the magnet that does not pass thru the 250 G/cm contours. We can call this threshold the “entry SG.”
There is also an upper threshold where the allowable cylinder is the same size as the bore. In this example, the 800
G/cm contour has at least a 70 cm gap. The tapers near the ends of the bore still require care.
Summary
l There is a lower SG threshold, below which there is no path to get to the center of the magnet.
l There is an upper SG threshold, above which the bore diameter limits the SG exposure.
l Between these thresholds, SG values can be limited by staying within a cylinder, whose diameter increases as
the SG values increases.
Outside the bore

Outside of the bore, the spatial gradient exposure can be limited by staying at least a certain distance away from the
magnet this is distance A in Figure 2-23. This can be visualized as a box around the magnet and it’s enclosures, with
the box sides offset from the enclosure’s front, back, and sides.
Since the SG drops off quickly with increasing distance from the magnet and enclosures, the distance A is generally
small compared to the space around the enclosures.
Distance A is set based on two factors:
1. All areas outside the box should have lower SG exposure than the lower SG threshold or “entry SG” described
on the previous slide.
2. The distance should be something easy to visualize and remember.
2-48 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 2-23: A box enclosing all spatial gradients above the entry threshold on an example magnet. View from above magnet with a 20 cm grid
overlaid
# Description
2 Patient table and magnet (green lines)
In this example, the box is sized so that it encloses all the spatial gradient regions above 200 G/cm. This uses a
distance of 25 cm (almost exactly 10 inches) from the enclosures.
Everywhere outside of the box, the SG is less than 200 G/cm, which in turn is less than the entry SG threshold at the
mouth of the magnet. Therefore, the limiting case for SG exposure will always be at the mouth of the magnet, as
opposed to the box around the magnet and enclosures.
Controlling spatial gradient exposure

The ideas covered in the previous examples can be combined to give a more complete picture of how to control spatial
gradient exposure.
Figure 2-24 shows the concept of the box around the magnet, combined with the cylinder inside the bore. The right
sketch is a two dimensional diagram, looking down from above, on the plane at the center of the magnet.
The size of the box, given by distance A in Figure 2-25, does not change with the SG level. All areas outside the box
have low spatial gradient compared to the entry SG. The size of the cylinder does change with SG level. The cylinder
diameter increases as SG level increases – or put another way, the distance between the cylinder and the bore wall,
which is distance D in Figure 2-25, decreases with increasing SG level.
For a specific magnet or system, setting distances A and D define the areas that need to be avoided to keep spatial
gradient exposure below any specific level.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-49

Figure 2-24: A box around the magnet concept
Figure 2-25: Combining the box surrounding the enclosures with the cylinder through the bore
# Description
1 Spatial gradient, G/cm (blue lines
2-50 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

# Description
2 Bore wall
3 Patient table and magnet (green lines)
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-51

Field strength and bore comparisons

1.5 vs 3.0T
The spatial gradient for an example 1.5T is in Figure 2-26. Figure 2-27 is an example 3T. Since the main magnetic field
doubles between 1.5T and 3T, the spatial gradient of the field will approximately double, given similar magnet designs.
Therefore, the SG exposure approximately doubles for 3T compared to 1.5T, for similar locations within the bore.
60 vs 70 cm
Since the magnet designs are similar for 60 cm and 70 cm scanners, the spatial gradient is similar at most locations,
relative to the center of the magnet. However, a 70 cm system has a larger bore, and can reach higher SG contours.
Therefore, the SG near the bore walls of a 70 cm system are higher than those for a 60 cm system.
This difference is approximately 20%.
Figure 2-26: Spatial gradients for a 1.5T magnet
# Description
2 Bore wall (bold green lines)
2-52 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Field strength and bore comparisons
Figure 2-27: Spatial gradients for a 3T magnet
# Description
2 Bore wall (bold green lines)
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-53

SIGNA Voyager MR system for LCCW magnet

For a view of the cylinder through the bore, see Figure 2-25.
Distance A is the front, sides, and back of magnet = 30 cm
Distance D is within the bore as defined in Table 2-31.
Minimum spatial gradient at entry = 270 G/cm
Figure 2-28: Distance D for LCCW magnet
x = Spatial gradient, G/cm
y = Distance, cm
Spatial gradient (G/cm) Distance D (cm)

270 35*
280 25
300 20
330 15
370 10
410 7.5
460 5
640 0
*Since this is the radius of the bore, there is no path into the bore
that does not pass through at least this spatial gradient.
2-54 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

1.5T MR systems for IPM magnet
1.5T MR systems for IPM magnet

Distance A is the front, sides, and back of magnet = 25 cm
Distance D is within the bore as defined in Table 2-32
Minimum spatial gradient at entry = 263 G/cm
Figure 2-29: Distance D for IPM magnet
x = Spatial gradient, G/cm
y = Distance, cm
Spatial gradient (G/cm) Distance D (cm)

263 35*
300 18.7
350 11.8
400 7.9
447 5
570 0
*Since this is the radius of the bore, there is no path into the bore
that does not pass through at least this spatial gradient.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-55

Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders for

LCCW magnet
The static magnetic field might cause forces or torques on some devices near the magnet. The following table shows
the maximum magnetic field (B0), the spatial rate of change of the magnetic field (grad(B0)), and the product of the
magnetic fields and its rate of change (B0*grad(B0)) for infinitely long cylinders concentric with the patient bore. This
information may be of use in evaluating risk assuming patients are confined to the cylinder bounds. Note that higher
values of these parameters exist on the magnet bore covers (see above).
For example, for the SIGNA Voyager system, use below table to find the peak static gradient field in the 70 cm bore is
6.4 Tesla/m. The peak spatial gradient in the patient bore is located on the 70 cm cylinder surface at z = 0.735 m from
isocenter. The user then evaluates the risk from the device manufacturer’s MR Conditional Labeling, from the
characteristics of the scanner, and from other information such as patient history.
First find that the maximum peak gradient on the magnet covers (from the above table) is 6.4 Tesla/m (640
gauss/cm). This peak occurs at a radius of 0.35 m of axis and a z location 0.74 m from isocenter (typically on
the magnet covers). Some risk managers consider this information adequate for determining risk from static
spatial gradients.
Some risk managers may limit the patient to regions contained by cylinders concentric with the patient bore.
They may use the table below to find that the maximum spatial gradient in the bore is 6.4 Tesla/m (640
Gauss/cm). The peak spatial gradient in the patient bore is located on the 70 cm cylinder surface at z = 0.74 m
from isocenter. The user then evaluates the risk from the device manufacturer’s MR Conditional Labeling, from
the characteristics of the scanner, and from other information such as patient history. In this case the peak
static gradient is same as the maximum value on the magnet cover.
Figure 2-30: Static spatial gradients at various radii
# Description
1 Concentric cylinders
2 Magnet
2-56 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders for LCCW magnet
Table 2-34: Concentric cylinder data table for LCCW magnet
On 20cm Diameter On 30cm Diameter On 40cm Diameter

On Patient Z Axis
Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface
Peak R, Z (m,m) Peak R, Z (m,m) Peak R, Z (m,m) Peak R, Z (m,m)
Bo (T) 1.5 (0,0.23) 1.5 (0.1,0.374) 1.5 (0.15,0.465) 1.5 (0.2,0.525)
Gradient
2.7 (0,0.84) 2.8 (0.1,0.836) 3 (0.15,0.81) 3.3 (0.2,0.805)
(T/m)
BxG
2.8 (0,0.77) 3 (0.1,0.763) 3.3 (0.15,0.775) 3.8 (0.2,0.745)
(T2/m)
On 50cm Diameter On 55cm Diameter On 60cm Diameter On 70cm Diameter
Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface
Bo (T) 1.6 (0.25,0.57) 1.6 (0.275,0.59) 1.7 (0.3,0.6) 2.0 (0.35,0.62)
Gradient
3.7 (0.25,0.83) 4.1 (0.275,0.79) 4.6 (0.3,0.75) 6.4 (0.35,0.735)
(T/m)
BxG
4.7 (0.25,0.75) 5.5 (0.275,0.74) 6.5 (0.3,0.72) 11.0 (0.35,0.69)
(T2/m)
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-57

Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders for IPM

magnet
The static magnetic field might cause forces or torques on some devices near the magnet. The following table shows
the maximum magnetic field (B0), the spatial rate of change of the magnetic field (grad(B0)), and the product of the
magnetic fields and its rate of change (B0*grad(B0)) for infinitely long cylinders concentric with the patient bore. This
information may be of use in evaluating risk assuming patients are confined to the cylinder bounds. Note that higher
values of these parameters exist on the magnet bore covers (see above).
For example, for the SIGNA Voyager system, use below table to find the peak static gradient field in the 70 cm bore is
5.7 Tesla/m. The peak spatial gradient in the patient bore is located on the 70 cm cylinder surface at z = 0.784 m from
isocenter. The user then evaluates the risk from the device manufacturer’s MR Conditional Labeling, from the
characteristics of the scanner, and from other information such as patient history.
First find that the maximum peak gradient on the magnet covers (from the above table) is 5.7 Tesla/m (570
gauss/cm). This peak occurs at a radius of 0.350 m of axis and a z location 0.78 m from isocenter (typically on
the magnet covers). Some risk managers consider this information adequate for determining risk from static
spatial gradients.
Some risk managers may limit the patient to regions contained by cylinders concentric with the patient bore.
They may use the table below to find that the maximum spatial gradient in the bore is 5.7 Tesla/m (570
Gauss/cm). The peak spatial gradient in the patient bore is located on the 70 cm cylinder surface at z = 0.78 m
from isocenter. The user then evaluates the risk from the device manufacturer’s MR Conditional Labeling, from
the characteristics of the scanner, and from other information such as patient history. In this case the peak
static gradient is same as the maximum value on the magnet cover.
Figure 2-31: Static spatial gradients at various radii
# Description
1 Concentric cylinders
2 Magnet
2-58 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Static spatial gradients on concentric cylinders for IPM magnet
Table 2-36: Concentric cylinder data table for IPM magnet
On 20cm Diameter On 30cm Diameter On 40cm Diameter

On Patient Z Axis
Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface
(0.000, (0.100, (0.150, (0.200,
B0 (T) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
0.000) 0.000) 0.000) 0.000)
Gradient (0.000, (0.100, (0.150, (0.200,
2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2
(T/m) 0.862) 0.868) 0.829) 0.823)
BxG (0.000, (0.100, (0.150, (0.200,
2.7 2.9 3.3 3.7
(T2/m) 0.777) 0.780) 0.737) 0.774)
On 50cm Diameter On 55cm Diameter On 60cm Diameter On 70cm Diameter
Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface Cylinder surface
(0.250, (0.275, (0.300, (0.350,
B0 (T) 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8
0.573) 0.584) 0.604) 0.624)
Gradient (0.250, (0.275, (0.300, (0.350,
3.7 4.1 4.5 5.7
(T/m) 0.835) 0.781) 0.813) 0.784)
BxG (0.250, (0.275, (0.300, (0.350,
4.5 5.5 5.9 8.5
(T2/m) 0.740) 0.738) 0.765) 0.736)
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-59

Cryogen and quench concerns

With superconductive MR systems, another concern related to the static magnetic field is a quench of the cryogens. A
superconductive magnet uses cryogens to super-cool the electrical conductor that creates the magnetic field.
Temperatures as low as -269°C (-452°F) are achieved to create the proper environment within the magnet. A quench,
which is a sudden boil-off of the entire volume of cryogenic liquid, causes a rapid loss of the static magnetic field.
Liquid Cryogen Hazards

Cryogens come in large vacuum containers called dewars. Liquid helium is generally used for cooling purposes,
although some service procedures also require liquid nitrogen. Nitrogen dewars weigh from 400 to 500 pounds when
full. Helium dewars weigh from 700 to 800 pounds. In addition to large dewars, there may be smaller helium gas
cylinders present. This helium gas is used to fill the magnet to proper cryogen levels. Special considerations should be
observed when dealing with cryogens.
CAUTION
Leaking helium or nitrogen gas will displace oxygen. The ambient air oxygen concentration may then be
insufficient for human respiration. The limit of the air oxygen concentration should meet national laws or
regulations.
CAUTION
The following information defines the proper handling of cryogens.
l Dewars and cylinders should not be tipped or heated, nor should the valves be tampered with.
l The cryogens boil off as they cool the magnet wires and must be replenished periodically by qualified
personnel. The rate of boil-off should be monitored by checking the cryogen level meter found on the
system cabinet.
l Contact with the cryogenic liquids or gas could result in severe frostbite; care should be taken when in
proximity to these substances. The wearing of protective clothing is essential during all work in
conjunction with liquefied cryogens. Such clothing consists of
o Safety gloves
o Work gloves
o Face shield
o Laboratory coat or overalls (cotton or linen)
o Non-magnetic safety shoes
l Dewars should be stored in a well-ventilated area. Cryogens could be accidentally released in gaseous
form, resulting in an asphyxiation hazard.
l All dewars and gas cylinders must be non-magnetic.
l Gas cylinders should be stored upright and secured to the wall with a chain with the metal protective top
in place. (If a cylinder falls over or the valve is knocked off, the container may act like a rocket; a full
cylinder has enough power to penetrate walls.)
l Because the cylinder’s metal cap may be magnetic, the cap should always be removed before bringing
the cylinder into the magnet room.
2-60 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Cryogen and quench concerns
l If possible, all personnel should stay out of the magnet room when a qualified service engineer is filling
cryogens in the magnet. If personnel must be present, they must wear proper gloves, a face shield, and
ear protectors.
l A qualified service engineer should be present any time cryogens are transported within the hospital or
added to the magnet.
l It is crucial that ventilation and cryogenic systems be kept in good repair and checked regularly to ensure
proper functionality.
l Flammable materials must not be brought near the cryogen containers.
l You are responsible for establishing and following a procedure, in accordance with your local and federal
requirements (in the US: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.36), that includes possible evacuation of the MRI area, if
flammable materials are identified near cryogenic gases. If grease, oil, or other combustible material is
present in the vicinity of the containers, the escape of cryogenic gases can lead to the formation of a
potentially combustible liquid due to liquefaction of air and concentration of oxygen.
Quench vent failure hazards

Quenches are indicated by a loud noise, warning message, or the tilting of an image on the display screen. A quench
is a hazard only if the vent fails, which would result in the release of white clouds of cryogen vapor into the magnet
room. This would present a potential asphyxiation hazard to both the patient and personnel. It is critical to have a well-
planned method to quickly evacuate the patient and personnel from the magnet room should a quench occur.
WARNING
In the unlikely event of a quench and vent failure, a procedure needs to be in place to evacuate the patient and
all personnel from the magnet room. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury (e.g.,
asphyxiation, frostbite, or injuries due to panic).
The table below lists the decay time for the 1.5T system to reach 20 mT in the case of a quench or the Emergency
Magnet Rundown switch is activated.
Table 2-37: System decay time to reach 20 mT for LCCW magnet
System Decay time (seconds)

LCCW 120
The table below lists the decay time for the 1.5T system to reach 10 mT in the case of a quench or the Emergency
Magnet Rundown switch is activated.
Table 2-38: System decay time to reach 10 mT for IPM magnet
System Decay time (seconds)

1.5T Platform 60
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-61

G R ADIE NT M AG NE T IC FIE LDS
Gradient magnetic fields introduction

Gradient magnetic fields produce rapidly changing magnetic fields during scanning. Gradients turn on and off very
rapidly to spatially encode the MR signal during a scan. High frequency gradient amplitudes switched very quickly
(high dB/dt) may cause nerve stimulation at periphery of body due to induced currents in nerves. Because a current
can be induced in any conductive material lying on or near the patient’s body, a potential biological hazard exists. The
greater the rate of change of the magnetic field (dB/dt, slew rate), the larger the induced current. The muscles, nerves,
and blood vessels of the human body are all conductive materials.
WARNING
Ensure occupational exposure to time varying magnetic field caused by the gradients complies with local
requirements.
2-62 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Calculate maximum gradient output
Calculate maximum gradient output

Let d be the total duration of the gradient ramp (minimum to maximum) or the period of a sinusoidal waveform divided
by π. Let f be a fraction (0.8 for Normal Mode or 1 for First Mode). Let c be the chronaxie time in microseconds. Let
d|B|/dt_0 be the rheobase (rb, infinite ramp duration) value of the time varying gradient magnetic field. Gradient
output may be expressed by the following equation;
Maximum gradient output on a cylinder of 0.2 m radius may be found from equation and table below. f is the fraction
of the mean stimulation threshold, rb is the infinite ramp duration mean PNS threshold, c is the rheobase value (ramp
duration where the mean threshold is 2*rb), and d is the gradient ramp duration.
Table 2-39: Rheobase and chronaxie constants for various gradient coils
Type rb (T/s) C (μs)

VRMw 20 360
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-63

Gradient output limits

Gradient Output levels are measured as a percentage of the mean peripheral nerve stimulation threshold (PNS).
CAUTION
Continuous patient observation and contact are required in all modes of operation. Medical Supervision is
required in the First or Second Level controlled operating modes.
The MR system gradients are capable of operating under several modes:
Normal: the normal operating mode, admissible for all individuals.
First Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for patients on whom a medical decision was made ensuring
that they can handle the increased gradient output effects or increased SAR. Limits for increased gradient
output and SAR are based on current scientific literature related to safety.
The table below lists system operating modes and associated threshold limits.
Product maximum gradient output

The table below gives d|B|/dt for the maximum magnitude values of the vector sum of the field components generated
by each of the three GRADIENT UNITS simultaneously at the published peak gradient strength and peak slew rate. The
values are in terms of d|B|/dt at various diameters (in meters) from the gradient coil axis. The diameters include 0.2 m,
0.4 m, and the bore diameter minus 0.1 m. The values include no peripheral nerve stimulation limits.
Table 2-40: Maximum d|B|/dt on cylinders of various diameters at the product slew rate
max d|B|/dt [T/s] D= 0.2 (m) D = 0.4 (m) D = 0.45 (m) D = 0.5 (m) D = 0.6 (m)
VRMw
(SIGNA Voyager, 70 cm 43.3 57.5 N/A N/A 86.8
bore)
Table 2-41: IEC gradient output limits
Operating mode PNS Limit

Normal 80% mean nerve stimulation threshold
100% of the mean nerve stimulation threshold. Requires you to click the
First Level (controlled mode) [Accept] button to proceed when the Normal mode dB/dt or SAR limits are
exceeded, but Second Level mode has not yet been reached.
2-64 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Peripheral nerve stimulation

The concern from time-varying gradient fields is to prevent cardiac stimulation and ventricular fibrillation. Cardiac
stimulation in the most sensitive population percentile requires at least 39 times as much energy as is produced with
peak gradient amplitude of 0.05 Tesla/meter and Slew Rate of 200 Tesla/meter/sec.
Regulatory bodies use avoidance of painful nerve stimulation to limit gradient output with an adequate safety margin.
Painful nerve stimulation typically occurs at approximately double the mean stimulation perception threshold. Some
discomfort is experienced about 1.5 times the mean PNS threshold, see figure below.
Peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS) problems are not of concern on systems compliant with IEC 60601-2-33 Normal or
First Controlled Operating Modes. The IEC limits PNS to 80% of the mean threshold in Normal Mode (where stimulation
should be rare) and 100% for the First Mode (where non-painful stimulation is expected in about half the patients).
If the patient can not tolerate PNS, change to Normal Mode to eliminate the problem. Otherwise change to a lower
slew rate pulse sequence to continue scanning the patient. MR workers may experience similar sensations if they are
in or very near gradient coils during active scanning, and so keep sufficient distance away from the gradient coils
during scanning.
The Anterior/Posterior (A/P) (=Y) gradient axis typically has the lowest stimulation threshold. So it is prudent to keep
the gradient waveform most likely to stimulate (the gradient waveform with the highest slew rate for the longest total
ramp time) on a physical axis other than Y.
You should remain in constant contact with the patient, especially in the FIRST CONTROLLED MODE, to ensure that the
patient does not feel painful stimulation (or high localized heating).
The figure below displays a graph of the relative mean threshold (vertical axis) and discomfort stimulation levels
(horizontal axis) where relative means are for perception (100), discomfort (1000), and pain (10,000).
1 = threshold
2 = uncomfortable
3 = intolerable
4 = 1% cardiac
Figure 2-32: Relative mean threshold and discomfort stimulation levels
The distribution of those experiencing PNS is illustrated in the figure below; three curves where the horizontal axis is
the normalized level and the vertical axis is the% probability of PNS. The curves represent the following:
1 = threshold
2 = uncomfortable
3 = intolerable
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-65

Figure 2-33: PNS probability. X axis = Fraction of the Mean Threshold (100% PNS). Y axis = Population percentile.
CAUTION
To reduce the possibility of PNS, make sure the patient’s hands are not clasped or touching and that their feet
are not crossed. Either or both of which could form a conductive loop.
CAUTION
Due to the rapid rate of change of the magnetic fields (dB/dt) used during some scans, a percentage of
patients may experience a non-hazardous tingling or touch sensation. The PNS probability graph indicates
the type of sensations caused at different percentages of the mean nerve stimulation threshold. Note that
stimulation is relatively rare in NORMAL MODE (x-axis=0.8), but occurs about 50% of the time in the FIRST
MODE (x axis=1). If this sensation is bothersome or uncomfortable to the patient, stop the scan. Change to
NORMAL MODE to continue scanning the patient. The MR worker may experience similar sensations if
remaining within the gradient field during active scanning.
CAUTION
There is a possibility that mild peripheral nerve stimulation (PNS) may be induced in the MR worker when that
person is exposed to the gradients when the system is operating in the First Level Controlled Operation Mode.
The MR worker should remain outside the magnet room during scanning in this Mode except when
circumstances dictate otherwise.
CAUTION
Peripheral nerve stimulation is not harmful. The potential for inducing peripheral nerve stimulation is kept
within limitations. The MR system is limited from operating above 80% of the PNS threshold in the NORMAL
Mode (100% of the mean PNS threshold in the First Mode) by the software (unless the system is in Second
Controlled Mode). The point at which 50% of a population experiences PNS is the PNS threshold. PNS has been
2-66 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

described as a light “touching” sensation felt on various areas of the skin surface. These areas vary depending
upon which gradient axis is in use. Some common areas for the sensations are the bridge of the nose, arms,
chest, and upper buttock/abdomen. Hands clasped together increase the potential for stimulation by
approximately 65%. The potential for PNS is low, but it exists for all sequences in all gradient configurations.
Please report all complaints of patient discomfort that may be associated with PNS during MR examinations (e.g.,
muscle twitches, tingling sensations, or headaches) to GE. See Safety information for contact information.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-67

Acoustic noise
Another potential safety issue associated with gradient switching is the loud noise. The rapid alternations of currents
within the gradient coils cause the coil assemblies to vibrate against their mountings, thus generating a loud resonant
noise. The acoustic noise produced during scanning can exceed 99 dBA in the bore.
WARNING
The sound level at the operator’s console should be limited to comply with local rules.
WARNING
Hearing protection is required for all people, including the MR worker, in the magnet room during a scan to
prevent hearing impairment. Acoustic levels may exceed 99 dBA. Patient hearing protection with a noise
reduction rating (NRR) of 29 dB or better is required to reduce acoustic level below 99dBA. The A-weighted
RMS sound pressure level is measured according to NEMA MS 4: 2010.
CAUTION
All personnel should be trained on the proper use of hearing protection.
l Special attention should be utilized to protect the hearing of neonates, premature infants, and any other
condition that does not allow for hearing protection to be applied.
l Patients with increased anxiety may have a lower acceptance to sound pressure (e.g., newborns, infants,
young children, elderly, and pregnant women and the fetus).
l Anesthetized patients have less then normal protection against high sound pressure. Hearing protection
should not be omitted.
l Typical operator console noise levels are below 60 dBA, so hearing protection is generally not required at
the operator console. However, it is important to ensure the sound level complies with all local
regulations.
l In some countries, legislation exists that limits employee exposure to noise levels. Ensure compliance
with your local regulations by providing additional hearing protection to MR workers for use in the magnet
room where required.
l If a music sound system is in use by the patient during scanning, the music sound system must provide >
29dB NRR of attenuation. All hearing protection devices must provide > 29dB NRR of attenuation.
Encourage the routine use of earplugs to prevent problems associated with acoustic noise during MR procedures. GE
offers disposable ear protection of various noise reduction ratings. These can be ordered through the GE accessories
catalog. The table below, describes the available types of disposable ear protection.
Table 2-42: Disposable ear protection
Description dB
E8801BA EAR Disposable Foam Earplugs 29
E8801BB EAR Taperfit2 Foam Earplugs 32
E8801BC Max-Lite Foam Earplugs 30
2-68 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Electromagnetic fields
E LE C T R OM AG NE T IC FIE LDS
Electromagnetic fields introduction

The Radio Frequency (RF) field is an oscillating electromagnetic field. Pulses of RF energy are used to generate the
signal, which cause tissues to absorb RF power. Under certain conditions, this may cause tissue heating. The amount
of heating depends on several factors, such as patient size and pulse sequence timing. RF heating of tissues is
greatest at the periphery of the skin. The Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the estimated amount of heat dose received
by the patient. This value is expressed as watts of power per kilogram of the patient’s body weight.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-69

Tissue heating
Before the patient is scanned, the computer estimates the level of heating and compares it to the predetermined
exposure limits. If the scan is expected to exceed these limits, the system then adjusts the scan parameters before
starting the scan. The complete estimate is based in part on patient weight. Therefore, take care to enter the patient’s
weight correctly to prevent excessive RF exposure or scan abortion.
When patient temperature is not changing, typical skin temperatures are about 33 °C while core temperatures are
about 37 °C. Patients dissipate metabolic heat at the same rate it is generated so there are no skin or core
temperature changes. Humans subjected to significant radio frequency power deposition (i.e., significant SAR) will
normally attempt to dissipate the additional heat load through vasodilatation of skin blood vessels permitting skin to
approach core temperature. This action typically causes the skin to flush (turn red) and enables the body to dissipate
heat more rapidly. This skin flushing is a normal response to significant radio frequency power deposition. Skin
reddening or to a lesser degree the report of a warming sensation without reddening regardless of the method it was
created (SAR, Contact, Metal, etc) is not hazardous if it clears in a few hours.
Patient comfort module

A sensor located in the bore of the magnet monitors bore temperature. The sensor posts appropriate messages in the
system log that notify you when the magnet bore wall is becoming warm. The temperature inside the magnet room
should be set at less than 70°F and the bore fan should be turned on at all times to keep air flowing inside the bore of
the magnet.
Thermal hazards
The increase in tissue temperature caused by RF exposure depends on a variety of factors associated with the
thermoregulatory system of the individual and the surrounding environment. Thermoregulatory is the ability of the
body to maintain regulated heat capacity levels. Observe the following warnings concerning tissue heating:
WARNING
RF power deposition can heat the patient’s tissue if delivered faster than the patient’s tissues can dissipate the
generated heat. The amount of tissue heating depends on the patient’s weight, type of pulse sequence, timing
factors, number of slices, SAR, and the use of imaging options such as saturation. Power deposition will
typically be lower when the NORMAL MODE is selected for SAR. FIRST MODE for SAR offers higher
performance but also higher power deposition.
WARNING
A rise in body temperature can be a hazard to a patient with reduced thermoregulatory capacity and
increased sensitivity to raised body temperature. These can be caused by pre-existing conditions, such as
cardiac impairment that has reduced circulatory function, hypertension, diabetes, old age, obesity, fever,
pregnancy, or an impaired ability to perspire. A patient with these complications must be carefully monitored
at all times. Consider scanning with NORMAL MODE for SAR for patients that may not tolerate the higher
levels.
2-70 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Tissue heating
CAUTION
The MR worker who remains in the scan room during a study could be subject to tissue heating caused by RF
energy exposure. Care should be taken to limit the time the MR worker remains in the scan room during a
study.
WARNING
RF can also raise the magnet bore temperature and cause thermal stress; medical conditions can reduce a
patient’s ability to cope with external temperature increases. If the temperature continues to rise, the scan
stops until temperature within the bore is lowered. When the sensor detects temperatures that may cause
patient discomfort, the system posts the following messages on the screen or in the error log:
l "The patient comfort level is warmer than normal."

l "The patient may be uncomfortable during the scan."
l "The bore cooling system or magnet room temperature may not be normal."
l "Further increases in temperature will inhibit scanning."
When the temperature drops to a comfortable level, the message is cleared from the screen. If the
temperature continues to rise, a second message appears on the screen:
l "Scan inhibited. Patient comfort sensor trip."
To facilitate a return to scanning, make sure the patient fan is ON, room temperature is normal, 21°C (70°F),
and air flow through the bore is unobstructed.
When the magnet opening temperature decreases, the system posts this message:
l "New scans can be initiated, but the patient comfort level is still warmer than normal."
CAUTION
All patients should be monitored for increased temperature during the scan acquisition. If the patient reports
discomfort due to warming, stop the scan. Patients should be provided with the hand-held Patient Alert bulb
prior to scanning. The patient should be instructed to communicate any concerns through the intercom or by
activating the Patient Alert bulb.
CAUTION
RF heating can be caused by:
l Damp clothing.
l Contact of body or extremities against the RF transmit coil surface, contact with metal, tattoos or metallic
eyeliner, contact with other body parts.
l Scanning with an unconnected receive coil or other cables in the RF transmit coil during the examination.
l Formation of loops with RF receive coil cables and ECG leads.
l The use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions for use) ECG electrodes. Never use
ECG electrodes past their expiration date.
l The use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions for use) ECG leads. MR ECG leads
have a very high impedance that limits current to below the level of concern.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-71

CAUTION
Extra attention should be utilized when scanning patients who are unconscious, sedated, or may have loss of
feeling in any body part (temporary or permanent paralysis). They may not be able to alert you to RF heating.
CAUTION
The coil selected should match the coil that is connected. When scanning with a transmit/receive only coil, DO
NOT scan using the body coil (or use the Body coil configuration) at any time. Using the body coil can cause RF
heating and could result in patient burns. In addition, scanning with the body coil can damage the
transmit/receive only coil, requiring the coil to be unusable and returned to the factory for service.
2-72 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Contact point heating
Contact point heating

Patient positioning can affect the safety of the scan procedure. To help prevent a patient burn from closed loops
formed by the following examples: clasped hands, by hands touching the body, from thighs contacting, the patient's
breasts contacting the chest wall over a small area, etc., insert non-conducting pads at least 0.25 inches thick between
touching parts and between the patient and the bore wall and the patient and any coils or conductors.
Figure 2-34: Patient positioned with non-conducting pads (1)
Observe the following warnings concerning contact point heating to protect patients from excessive heating or burns
related to induced currents during MR procedures:
WARNING
RF can cause localized heating at contact points between the patient/bore and patient/RF coil resulting in
discomfort or burns.
WARNING
RF can cause localized heating at contact points between adjacent body parts when a loop is formed. Such
localized heating can result in discomfort, or burns. This could occur when a patient’s hands are touching or
when a female patient’s breasts are compressed to her chest. Use pads between body parts to avoid creating
a loop with adjacent body parts.
WARNING
Place appropriate non-conductive padding between the patient and the bore wherever a portion of the body
may come into contact with the magnet opening.
WARNING
Always place appropriate non-conductive padding between the surface coil and the patient’s skin to prevent
burn injuries.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-73

WARNING
For shoulder imaging, always place appropriate non-conductive padding between the patient’s opposite
shoulder or a portion of the patient’s body and the bore wherever a portion of the body or opposite shoulder
comes into contact with the bore.
CAUTION
RF can cause localized heating at patient contact points. Wet diapers or incontinence products have the same
electrical properties as human tissue. All patients with diapers, including adults, should have dry diapers on
prior to the start of the scan. If the patient reports discomfort due to warming, stop the scan.
2-74 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Conductive material heating
Conductive material heating

Another potential hazard related to the RF field is the heating of implants, devices, and objects of conductive (e.g.
metallic) compositions that may cause temperature changes during an MR examination. The induced currents in the
conductive (e.g. metallic) objects may cause them to get so hot that they can actually cause burns in adjacent tissues.
Therefore, it is very important to determine each patient’s work history and thoroughly screen for any accessories
containing conductive material.
Observe the following warnings concerning conductive material heating to protect patients from excessive heating or
burns related to induced currents during MR procedures:
WARNING
Eye makeup that contains metal flakes can cause eye and skin irritation during MR scanning. Instruct patients
to wash off removable makeup before the exam to avoid the risk of eye injury. Before scanning, warn patients
with permanent eyeliner or other metallic ink tattoos about the risk of skin irritation and instruct them to get
prompt medical attention if they experience severe discomfort following an MR exam.
WARNING
Metal fragments/slivers can deflect and/or heat in a magnetic field, damaging surrounding tissues. Patients
thought to have metallic fragments in the eye should receive an eye exam to detect and remove any metal
fragments that could deflect and damage the eye.
WARNING
Jewelry, even 14-karat gold, can heat and cause burns. RF can heat (even non-ferrous) metal and cause
burns.
WARNING
Medicinal products in transdermal patches may cause burns to underlying skin.
WARNING
The use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions for use) stereotactic frames and RF
blankets is not recommended.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-75

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits

It is necessary to measure the RF absorption in tissues since RF exposure cannot be measured by the system. Energy
dissipation through absorption by the body can be described in terms of Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). SAR is a rate,
meaning it is a measure of the amount of RF power absorbed per unit of mass of an object in watts per kilogram
(W/kg). There are several types of SAR, listed in the table below, that must be understood.
Table 2-43: SAR definitions
SAR type Definition

SAR averaged over total patient body mass over any six-minute period for Body and
Whole body
Receive Only surface coils, which use body transmit.
Partial body SAR averaged over the exposed mass in the coil averaged over any six-minute period.
Head SAR averaged over the mass of the patient’s head over any six-minute period.
SAR averaged over the estimated mass of the patient’s extremity over any six-minute
Extremity
period for small volume and Transmit/Receive coils.
Short term The SAR averaged over any 10-second period.
The MR system SAR operating modes:
Normal: the normal operating mode, admissible for all individuals assuming MR Conditional requirements are
met.
First Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for patients on whom a medical decision was made
ensuring they can handle the increased SAR effects. Increased SAR levels are based on current scientific
literature related to safety. There is a potential risk for increased tissue heating and nerve stimulation when
operating above Normal mode.
Second Level: controlled operating mode, admissible for customers with a propriety license agreement with
GE and with Investigational Review Board clearance for the investigational protocol. IRB review must include
explicit approval of the SAR limits. There is a potential risk for increased tissue heating and nerve stimulation
when operating above Normal mode.
CAUTION
Continuous patient observation and contact is required in all modes of operation. Medical Supervision is
required in the First or Second Level controlled operating modes.
CAUTION
SAR may be controlled by Local Approval.
CAUTION
For sites which need to comply with IEC60601 2nd or local safety standard YY 0319-2008, this MR equipment
shall not be used in the normal operating mode when the scan room temperature is greater than 24 °C or
relative humidity about 60%.
2-76 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits
WARNING
The magnet room temperature shall not be more than 21°C per the manufacturer’s requirements and the
relative humidity shall not be more than 60%. Temperatures above 21°C and humidity above 60% could result
in lowering the system SAR limit.
The derating temperature is 25°C for relative humidity less than 60%. For each 10% increase of the relative
humidity in excess of 60%, the temperature is reduced by 0.25°C, e.g., 24°C at 100% relative humidity.
For each degree of environmental temperature that exceeds the SAR-derating temperature, the whole-body
SAR limit is reduced by 0.25 W/kg until the SAR is 2 W/kg or 0 W/kg for the First Level controlled operating
mode or for the Normal mode, respectively.
WARNING
The RF power monitor and SAR limitations help prevent excessive RF exposure to the patient; SAR values are
calculated based on the patient’s weight. To help avoid injury, enter the patient’s correct weight to set
operating limits and prevent excessive RF exposure.
WARNING
The SAR algorithms for the MR systems calculate SAR values and set a limit on the number of slices/echoes
per second in order to limit RF power deposition. The power monitor and SAR algorithm limit SAR, regardless
of the patient weight or pulse sequence used. SAR limits are conservatively estimated from worse-case
patient positioning as a function of weight.
The legacy power monitor module limits the RF amplifier output power thus limiting the patient SAR in case of
a catastrophic failure. This module monitors peak power based on the patient’s weight, duty cycle, and pulse
sequence parameters. The peak power limits prevent you from using incorrect patient weights.
WARNING
The average power monitor and SAR algorithm limit SAR based on patient weight and RF transmit coil used.
SAR limits are conservatively estimated from worse case patient positioning as a function of weight. The
power monitor limits the RF power, which in turn limits the patient SAR to within controlled limits over time.
Pulse sequence SAR predictions (estimated SAR) are based on patient weight at the worst-case landmark. To minimize
nuisance power monitor trips caused by patient-to-patient variability, pulse sequence predicted SAR is the mean plus
1.96 standard deviations (typically the normalized standard deviation is about 18% at the worst-case landmark). The
expected worst-case nuisance trip rate is approximately 2.5%. If you experience a significant number of power trips
above the 2.5% frequency, please consult your local field service representative. The power monitor measures actual
power and limits SAR appropriately. The power measuring accuracy of the power monitor is about +/-12%.
Errors in patient weight do not result in excessive SAR. Low patient weight entries result in power monitor trips below
the SAR limit. High patient weight entries result in fewer slices/images per unit time than would have been
permissible.
SAR limits
The MR system’s RF power monitor helps prevent excessive RF exposure due to equipment failure. Since the monitor
protects the patient, it must be operational at all times, even when a scan is not in progress. If it detects an equipment
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-77

failure, it immediately disables the RF system. This system must be repaired or adjusted by qualified service
personnel.
Table 2-44: SAR operating limits
System Normal mode (W/kg) First level (W/kg) Second level (W/kg)
Head = 3.2 Head = 3.2 Head > 3.2
1.5T
Body = 2.0 Body = 4.0 Body > 4.0
Patient acceptance of High SAR scanning can be increased by giving the patient breaks to cool down, providing
light clothing, and limiting room temperature to 18 ± 3 °C, and by maximizing air flow.
The following table provides a bound for maximum B1rms (in micro-tesla) for body transmit coils and head transmit
coils at 1.5 T. Values are shown for the limits at 1.5 T for the head transmit coil and for the body transmit coil with the
patient’s umbilicus at isocenter.
Table 2-45: B1rms limit (µT)
Coil 1.5T
Body Coil
3.6
Umbilicus Landmark
Body Coil
N/A
Chin Landmark
Head Coil 7.2
2-78 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Clinical hazards
CLINICAL HAZAR DS
Clinical hazards introduction

Maintaining good patient contact and education can help reduce patient anxiety reactions and clinical scanning
hazards in the MR environment and during procedures.
CAUTION
Continuous patient observation and contact are required in all modes of operation.
You need to be aware of the conditions and risks associated with the following:
High-Risk Patients
Scanning Hazards
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-79

CLINICAL HAZAR DS
High risk patients

Several conditions are associated with high-risk patients, who may be at a greater risk of developing complications
during an MR examination. Observe these warnings and be prepared to manage the needs of such patients during the
examination.
WARNING
Patients with the following conditions are at the greatest risk of complications during MR scanning:
l Patients likely to develop seizure or have claustrophobic reactions.

l Greater than normal potential for cardiac arrest.
l Patients who are unconscious, heavily sedated, or confused and patients with whom no reliable
communication can be maintained.
WARNING
Patient screening is required for patients who are going to be imaged on an MR scanner.
Some patients may experience feelings of fear or claustrophobia when undergoing an MR procedure. This could be
related to the confining conditions of the magnet, the length of the examination, the acoustic noise, or the
temperatures within the bore of the magnet. Discuss the procedure with the patient and be prepared to manage the
needs of the patient during the examination.
CAUTION
The confining conditions of the MR system can precipitate claustrophobia in some patients. To prevent injuries
due to panic, provide instructions and comfort the patient as needed to alleviate anxiety.
WARNING
Since direct observation from the operator’s console can be partially obscured by the magnet enclosure, be
sure to more closely monitor these types patients at all times to quickly identify and respond to medical
emergencies. In some cases, emergency personnel should remain with the patient or be on standby alert to
help prevent serious complications or death.
Related topics
Clinical screening
Screen patients and personnel
Patient emergencies
2-80 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scanning hazards
CLINICAL HAZAR DS
Scanning hazards
During scan set-up, acquisition, and conclusion, be aware of the following scanning hazards:
WARNING
Do not use Projection Images for localization.
WARNING
Do not use 3D views only to perform voxel value, distance, angle, or area measurements. Always refer to 2D
baseline views.
CAUTION
Measurements are more reliable when done on 2D views. Always check on the 2D reformatted views where
exactly the points have been deposited.
CAUTION
Most multiple-channel receive only coils are designed to function best with adult patients. For smaller patients
using the multiple-channel receive only coil the patient positioning is critical for optimal image quality. For
small patients use appropriate non-conductive padding to place patient anatomy of interest in the center of
the coil.
For example, the Head Neck Array coil is a multiple-channel receive only coil. Use appropriate non-conductive
padding to place the patient’s head in the center of the coil.
CAUTION
Make sure the patient connected IV lines, oxygen tubing, urinary catheters, and any other tubing and cables
are long enough to allow full travel of the system and will not become entangled, pinched, or pulled.
CAUTION
Following the exam, your patient may need assistance when getting off the table. After lying in a prone
position for a length of time, your patient may experience light-headedness upon sitting up.
CAUTION
If the magnet room door is open, the scan cannot be started. If the scan is already in process and the door is
opened, the scan will pause. Close the door and press resume.
If the magnet room door is opened when attempting to start a scan, close the door and try again.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-81

International regulations require the system to function in this manner.
CAUTION
Always base evaluations on all images in the data set and on the clinical history. Information from only a
single image should not be used to evaluate a patient.
2-82 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Equipment hazards
EQU IPM ENT HAZAR DS
Equipment hazards introduction

There are also general equipment concerns in the MR environment. Make sure you are familiar with your MR
equipment and the accessory equipment manufacturer’s guidelines and precautions. Specifically, you need to be
aware of the hazards associated with the following MR equipment:
Laser Alignment Lights

Cables and Equipment Connections
Also observe the following general equipment hazards:
WARNING
The MR staff must consult the GE Pre-installation Manual before installing any furniture or making any
changes in the scan room. Failing to do so may hinder the servicing of the scanner and present a dangerous
safety hazard to the service engineer.
CAUTION
Using equipment that is damaged or has been compromised, can put the patient and/or operator at risk of
injury.
CAUTION
The MR system applications run on equipment that includes one or more hard disk drives, which may hold
medical data related to patients. In some countries, such equipment may be subject to regulations concerning
the processing of personal data and the free circulation of such data. It is strongly recommended that access
to patient files be protected from all persons not in medical attendance.
CAUTION
Any application of physiological monitoring and sensing devices to the patient shall be made under the clinical
staffs direction and is the clinical staff’s responsibility. Use only MR Safe and MR Conditional (used within its
conditions for use) devices. Devices with conductors or ferromagnetic parts may introduce safety concerns.
For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-83

Laser alignment lights

The MR systems use semiconductor laser alignment lights for patient land marking. This type of alignment light casts a
thin red light on the patient for the purpose of positioning and land marking. The laser lights can cause eye injury. The
figures below display the safety labels for laser products and are located near the laser alignment light. Labels such
as these provide safety information about laser radiation.
Figure 2-35: Laser safety label
Figure 2-36: Laser safety label
Figure 2-37: Chinese laser safety label for other MR systems
Your system may have a slight variation of these labels.

The eyes must be protected from laser radiation. The patient needs to be instructed to close their eyes when
landmarking and the laser light is turned on. Exposing eyes to the laser alignment lights may result in eye injury.
CAUTION
Exposing eyes to laser alignment lights may result in eye injury.
l Do not stare directly into the laser beam.

l Instruct patients to close their eyes to avoid eye exposure to the alignment light.
l Closely monitor all patients and prevent them from accidentally staring into the beam. Do not leave the
laser beam on after you position the patient.
2-84 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Cables and equipment connections

Various equipment and accessories are used in the MR environment for specific types of examinations that include
cables and require connections to the MR system or the patient.
Application of MR conditional physiological monitoring and sensing devices to the patient should be made under your
organization's direction and is the sole responsibility of your organization.
To avoid trip hazards, you should install yellow and black trip hazard indicator covers over any cables routed on the
ground of the equipment room.
WARNING
The following general warnings should be followed when using cables and accessory connection equipment:
l For medical devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's
documentation.
l Use only GE or GE-authorized accessory coils, cables, monitoring and gating equipment that is labeled as
MR Safe or MR Conditional (used within its conditions for use). Failure to restrict the use of such equipment
not labeled for MR applications may result in patient burns or other injuries.
l Use only accessories, coils, and cables that are in good condition. If you suspect that an accessory is not
in good condition, discontinue its use and contact your GE Service Engineer.
l Auxiliary devices indicated as MR Conditional may still cause patient injuries if the conditions for use are
not explicitly followed. Never use equipment unless it is accompanied by the use instructions.
l Remove unplugged surface coils or unused accessory devices from the magnet bore; a patient burn can
result.
l RF can heat non-compatible surface coils and MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its conditions
for use) gating cables, damaged surface coils/gating cables, surface coils that are not properly plugged in,
and improperly routed cables can cause burns.
l The use of cable-connected surface coils, photopulse sensor for peripheral gating (PG), or
electrocardiogram (ECG) gating accessories for patient scanning can result in localized heating, leading to
a burn or fire if proper scan preparation is not followed. The cables often extend into the high intensity
region of the RF field and it is possible that induced electrical currents in the cables may cause arcing.
l Always bring the cable directly out of the magnet bore with no slack. Place cables under the cushion
whenever possible to separate the cable from the patient.
l Keep the length of cable in the bore to a minimum. Avoid bending the cable 180° and route the cables out
of the bore in the most direct way.
l Route cables through the center of the magnet bore. Place cables under the cushion whenever possible to
separate the cable from the patient. Routing near the sides of the bore increases the likelihood of cable
heating (from induced currents).
l Do not cross or loop cables. Arcing and patient burns could result.
In addition to the warnings above, there are specific warnings related to Cardiac Gating Equipment and Accessory
Coils you need to understand to maintain a safe MR environment.
Cardiac gating equipment

Electrocardiogram (ECG) gating (triggering) may be performed in an MR environment to synchronize the MR scan
acquisition with the patient’s heart beat. Only MR Safe and MR Conditional (used within its conditions for use)
electrodes and high-impedance leads should be used in the MR environment to ensure patient safety. For medical
devices that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the device manufacturer's documentation.The ECG
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-85

triggering feature on the system should only to be used for cardiac gating and must not be used for patient
monitoring. It is important to use only GE recommended disposable electrodes and GE High Impedance ECG Cables.
WARNING
Observe the following warnings when using ECG or peripheral gating:
l The MR cardiac gating feature is intended for use solely in acquiring MR images using cardiac
gating/triggering, not for physiological monitoring. The patient’s condition may not be reflected, resulting
in improper emergency treatment.
l Do not use monitoring equipment when conductors are in the bore and touching the patient; burns can
result.
l Do not use leads with broken shields or exposed conductors. Only use accessories in good condition. If
you suspect that an accessory is not in good condition, discontinue its use and contact your GE Service
Engineer.
l Check to see that the cardiac or peripheral gating cable does not pass under or near the surface coil or
surface coil cable.
l Check to see that only the peripheral gating sensor touches the patient. Keep cables from coming in
contact with the patient.
l Do not use equipment that has not been specifically tested and approved for use in the environment of a
MR system.
l Physiological monitoring and sensing devices should be used solely under the operators direction and it is
their responsibility to ensure patient safety.
WARNING
Do not use waveforms for physiological monitoring. Patient condition may not be reflected, resulting in
improper treatment.
WARNING
Do not use expired or dried electrodes. They do not properly conduct the signal, which can lead to image
degradation, create intermittent triggering, and can cause burns to the patient.
WARNING
GE High Impedance ECG Cables shall only be used under the conditions described below.
Non-clinical testing has demonstrated this device is MR Conditional and can be scanned safely only under the
following conditions:
l Static magnetic field: 1.5T or 3T only

l Maximum spatial gradient: 1650 Gauss/cm
l Maximum whole body average SAR: 4 W/kg
l The ECG lead signal may be visible in the images
Under the scan conditions defined above, GE High Impedance ECG Cables is expected to produce a maximum
temperature rise of less than 4°C after 15 minutes of continuous scanning.
2-86 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Accessory coils
It is important you familiarize yourself with the operating instructions for each accessory coil used in your MR
environment. Follow the recommended guidelines and precautions by the manufacturer.
WARNING
Observe the following warnings when using surface coils:
l Do not use surface coils with exposed coils or damaged insulation. Skin contact with metal conductors can
cause burns.
l Do not allow the surface coil cable to touch the patient; patient burns can result. Use a thermal resistant
material or pad to keep the cable from touching the patient.
l When using the 1.5T Breast Coil, make sure the patient’s back and arms do not touch the magnet bore.
Use thermal resistant material or padding between the patient and the magnet to prevent burns that
could be caused by patient contact with the interior of the magnet bore.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-87

C LINIC A L SC R E E NING
Clinical screening introduction

To avoid potential health hazards in the MR environment, personnel and patient screening procedures should be
established in your imaging facility. Every person working or entering the magnet room or adjacent rooms with a
magnetic field needs to be instructed about the dangers. This should include all MR workers, maintenance, service,
and cleaning personnel, as well as the local fire station team.
All MR workers need careful assessment prior to engaging in operation of the MR system. Additionally, all patients
undergoing the MR examination need careful assessment prior to the procedure. Screening helps identify anything
that might create a health risk or interfere with MR imaging. It also assists you in determining if the patient has any
specific needs or limitations. Additionally, if another person accompanies the patient undergoing the MR examination,
they should be screened and managed in the same manner as the patient. The aim of screening is to safely obtain
high-quality images so an accurate diagnosis can be made. Maintaining a controlled and safe environment can be
achieved by careful questioning patients, visitors/family members and all personnel.
Screen each patient thoroughly for pertinent medical history and conditions that contraindicate scanning before
initializing an examination. If proper scanning can not be performed, postpone MR examinations until the screening
can be completed.
A documented screening procedure should be followed by a review of the completed form and a verbal conversation
to verify the form information and provide the patient time to express his or her questions or concerns. The review
and discussion should be conducted by MR safety-trained personnel to ensure there is no miscommunication about
the MR safety issues.
A written screening form must be completed each time a patient is to have an MR examination. Even if the patient
undergoing previous MR examinations and/or has completed the screening form previously, does not assure the
patient another safe examination.
Related topics
High risk patient
Patient emergencies
2-88 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Screening form
Screening form
A comprehensive, printed screening form should be used to assess the patient and document the information. The
form can be customized for your MR suite and might consists of three sections:
Section 1: General Information

Section 2: Hazardous Items Checklist
Section 3: Magnet Room Pre-Entry Checklist
WARNING
General information
Section 1 of a patient screening form contains general information concerning patient demographics and the patient’s
medical and work history. Relevant patient-related information is valuable for obtaining current medical conditions
and information on prior diagnostic studies that may be helpful in evaluating the patient’s state.
Determining the patient’s work history is important for those who work in machine shops or similar environments.
These individuals may have small metal slivers or fragments of steel embedded in their eyes. If metal fragments are
suspected, the patient should receive an eye examination to detect and remove hazardous materials before scanning.
Section 1 of a screening form also contains questions needed to help identify high-risk patients, i.e., those with
conditions posing higher risk of complications during the MR exam. Questions explore risks due only to the condition of
the patient (e.g. elevated risk of seizure or cardiac arrest) and also those due to the elevated SAR possible when
operating in First Level Controlled Mode (e.g. for patients with compromised thermoregulatory capacity.)
MR workers may be at risk if previous occupational, recreational or other life experiences have resulted in the
accidental implantation of metallic substances, such as slivers or fragments. Page 2 of the patient screening form
should be completed by each MR worker to ensure the magnetic field does not pose a hazard to their well-being.
This section also contains questions for female patients concerning matters that may affect the MR examination.
Pregnant patients must be identified before they are permitted to undergo an MR procedure. A physician should
carefully compare and discuss the risks and benefits of the MR examination versus alternative procedures before
scanning to control risk to the patient.
Hazardous items checklist

The Hazardous Items Checklist, in section 2 of a patient screening form, is valuable in identifying various implants and
devices that may be hazardous to the patient undergoing the MR examination. Items that may produce image
artifacts, can also be detected through this section of the screening process.
Some patients, including those suffering from forms of dementia, may not be aware of having a pacemaker. On such
patients, palpate the upper torso and abdomen to make sure no pacemaker is present. Pacemakers may be implanted
in any of several locations in the chest and abdomen. Pacemaker lead wires are sometimes left in place after removal
of the pacing mechanism. The wires can induce current, producing heat during the MR procedure. Therefore, checking
for lead wires is also important.
The best way to ensure a metal-free environment is to have patients change into patient examination attire. The
checklist also includes items the patient may externally possess. Do not limit your inspection to only ferrous objects
alone. Even non-ferrous items, such as gold jewelry, can heat during a scan and burn a patient. Make sure the patient
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-89

removes all of these objects. In addition, be sure to check small children for safety pins and snaps on diapers or
undershirts.
Section 2 of a form also contains an anatomical figure of the human body for patients to mark the location of objects
they have inside or on their body. This information can be useful in determining the approximate area of objects that
may be hazardous or produce artifacts.
Magnet room pre-entry checklist

The last section of a screening form lists metal or magnetic-sensitive items with which the patient can not enter the
magnet room. Ensure the patient removes the checked items prior to magnet room entry. Also obtain signatures to
document the person who completed and reviewed the screening form.
2-90 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

MR compatibility
MR compatibility
Review the following information related to spatial magnetic field data:

A device is labeled as MR Conditional if it has been demonstrated to pose no known hazards in a specified MR
environment with specified conditions of use. Field conditions that define the MR environment include static magnetic
field strength, static spatial gradient, time rate of change of the magnetic field (dB/dt), RF fields, specific absorption
rate (SAR), and coil to be used. Additional conditions, including specific configurations of the item (e.g., the routing of
leads used for a neurostimulation system), may be required.
WARNING
The attractive force of the magnetic field of the MR system can cause ferrous objects to become projectiles,
which can cause serious injury. Post the Security Zone warning sign on the entrance to the magnet room and
keep all hazardous objects out of the magnet room.
WARNING
GE shall not be responsible for assessing the proper function of any device. The user of the device must
consult the device manufacturer to ensure the device is MR Safe or MR Conditional. Then the user must ensure
the MR Conditions are met. Finally, the user must determine what is appropriate.
DANGER
Devices compatible at one field strength, such as 1.5T, may not be compatible at another field strength, such
as 3.0T. Prior to patient scanning, confirm with the device manufacturer that the device is compatible at your
field strength.
Patient emergencies
You must become very familiar with the location and proper use of certain emergency buttons and releases should an
emergency occur in the MR environment. Advanced planning and being accustomed to your site’s procedures and
surroundings are necessary to ensure a safe environment.
Before you begin any scanning procedure, explain the use of the Patient Alert System to your patient. Make sure he or
she understands its purpose and use. Remember that implants, pacemakers, and ferromagnetic life-support systems
cannot be brought into the magnet room.*
Be sure to closely monitor patients with a increased potential for cardiac arrest or claustrophobia, or patients who are
unconscious or extremely ill. Always maintain visual contact with the patient. Be familiar with your site’s
predetermined location outside the magnet room where you can transfer patients if it becomes necessary for
emergency personnel to intervene.
The figure below displays a general layout of an MR magnet room. You should always be able to maintain visual
contact with your patient from the operator’s console.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-91

Figure 2-38: Magnet room layout
Table 2-46: Magnet room layout image legend
# Description
1 Magnet and magnet enclosure
2 Oxygen monitor remote sensor (optional)
3 Emergency magnet rundown
4 Operator's console
Emergency medical procedures

Your site should define and implement specific procedures to follow in case of a medical emergency. These
procedures should take account of the existence of the magnetic field. For example, they should instruct how to use
the Table Transport Emergency Release to remove a patient rapidly from the magnet's influence. Other product
features useful in an emergency are described on the pages following.
2-92 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Patient alert system
PATIENT EMERGENCIES
Patient alert system

Your MR system has a Patient Alert system that enables the patient to alert you at the console by squeezing a bulb.
Figure 2-39: Patient alert system
Table 2-47: Patient alert system image legend
# Description
1 Patient alert bulb
2 Control box
Squeezing the Patient Alert bulb causes the control box to light up and emit an audible signal. A switch on the control
box allows you to set the signal for intermittent or constant light and sound.
Your MR system also has an intercom system that enables you to maintain verbal contact with the patient throughout
the examination.
CAUTION
Provide all patients with the Patient Alert bulb. This can be especially important for procedures that require
the concerted attention of the technologist/operator at the MR or Advantage Workstation (AW) operator
console, e.g., fMRI sequences.
CAUTION
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS NATURAL RUBBER LATEX WHICH MAY CAUSE ALLERGIC REACTIONS.
The black Patient Alert bulb and the Respiratory bellows contain latex. If the patient is aware of a
sensitivity/allergy to latex or if the patient is unsure and concerned about the possibility of an allergic
reaction, cover the bulb or the bellows with a towel, cloth, or plastic bag to shield the patient from the latex.
The gray Patient Alert bulb is made of PVC and does not contain natural rubber latex.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-93

PATIENT EMERGENCIES
Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop button is located on the keyboard and on both the right and left sides of the magnet enclosure.
This function cuts off electrical power from equipment located in the magnet room that may present a hazard to the
patient in an emergency situation.
You can press the Emergency Stop button to stop a scan in a patient emergency situation. To quickly recover from an
Emergency Stop situation, you can press the Reset button. You should not be afraid to press the Emergency Stop
button because it may shut the system down for an extended length of time. This is not required to shut down the
magnet coldhead.
Figure 2-40: Emergency Stop buttons.
The Emergency Stop button disables the following systems:
RF
Gradient power supply
Magnet room unit
Table and patient support subsystem
WARNING
The Emergency Stop button does not remove the magnetic field, turn off the computer cabinets, operator’s
console, or camera.
2-94 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Emergency off
PATIENT EMERGENCIES
Emergency off
The Emergency Off button is located on the wall next to all computer equipment and next to the MR magnet room
doors. It removes ALL electrical power from ALL components of the system, including any power sources from
uninterrupted power supply (UPS) devices.
The Emergency Off button not only stops a scan in a patient emergency, but also in the event of a serious equipment
fault or hazards such as fire/water in the vicinity of the MR equipment. The entire MR system is to be turned OFF
except for the static magnetic field and the magnet rundown unit used to shut down the magnetic field.
Figure 2-41: Emergency Off button
Use this button only in a major emergency in the computer or MR magnet room. For example, use this button when
you notice fire, sparks, or loud noises not associated with normal operation of the system.
To restore power after emergency stop, the main circuit breaker must be reset before rebooting the system.
Always contact a service engineer before restoring power.
WARNING
The Emergency Off button does not turn off the magnetic field. To avoid personal injury or equipment damage,
do not bring any ferromagnetic equipment into the magnet room. Assume that equipment is magnetic unless
it is clearly labeled otherwise.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-95

PATIENT EMERGENCIES
PDU main breaker

The PDU Main Breaker turns off power to system components other than the Magnet Rundown Unit, cryogen
compressor, scan room lights, chillers and magnet cryogen monitor. Typically, service uses this power off switch and
the MR customer does not.
Figure 2-42: PDU power off button
# Description
1 ISC cabinet
2 Main Breaker in On position, fully horizontal.
2-96 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Magnet rundown concept
PATIENT EMERGENCIES

The Magnet Rundown operates as follows and is located inside the magnet room:
Rapid reduction of the magnetic field in about two minutes

Boil-off of cryogens, accompanied by loud hissing sound
Several days of down time to replace the cryogens
Figure 2-43: Magnet rundown unit
WARNING
The Magnet Rundown should only be used to free someone pinned to the magnet or to remove a large
ferromagnetic object captured by the magnetic field when injury to persons is imminent. A controlled magnet
rundown should be performed by a GE Service Engineer in non-emergency situations.
Related topics
Magnet Rundown Unit test procedure
Primary magnet rundown procedure
Secondary rundown procedure
Quench with vent failure procedure
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-97

PATIENT EMERGENCIES
Table emergency release

In an emergency, the patient cradle can be manually pulled out of the magnet. Grasp the handle and squeeze the
lever to pull the cradle to the end of the table. The figure below displays the cradle release handle on the patient table.
Figure 2-44: Cradle release handle
The table can be lowered and raised with foot pedals in normal conditions. However, when the manual cradle release
lever is used, the foot pedals no longer work to raise and lower the table because the cradle driving mechanism is
retained in the magnet.
Figure 2-45: Table pedals
Image legend
# Description
1 Up pedal
2 Down pedal
IMPORTANT! The patient table of the SIGNA Voyager system is permanently fixed to the magnet system. Always
have a non-ferrous gurney placed outside the magnet room for emergency patient transportation.
IMPORTANT! Do not use the Magnet control buttons after the table emergency release procedure is completed.
Wait until the table is re-engaged to the system before you use the Magnet control buttons.
Re-engage cradle after table emergency release

Use these steps to re-engage the cradle. It is required for the normal operation after the cradle is released.
2-98 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Table emergency release
1. Grasp the handle and squeeze the lever to unlock the cradle from the home position.
2. Slowly push the cradle toward the magnet until the cradle attaches to the cradle drive.
Push the cradle a little harder until it the cradle engages with the cradle drive.
3. Use the Magnet control buttons to make sure the cradle moves in and out.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-99

A D D IT IONA L WA R NING S A ND C A U T IONS
Scan and Display introduction

This section includes additional warnings and cautions for the following areas:
Scan and equipment

CD/DVD handling
Dielectric pads
IDEAL Imaging Option
IV pole
MR Conditional
MR-Touch
Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR
Patient orientation
Patient transfer
Patient weight
Post-contrast scans
Prescan
PA coil
Display or post processing

Add/Subtract images
Applications
VIBRANT Flex and LAVA Flex
Imaging Option
IDEAL
ReadyView
Volume Viewer
Annotation
Filter Floaters
Measurements
Reformat
Threshold
2-100 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan
Scan
This section contains additional scan warnings and cautions.
AutoPaste
WARNING
Do not use Pasting post process application with images that demonstrate metal implants.
BrainWave paradigm
WARNING
When creating paradigms, if you do not create a unique paradigm number, paradigm string, and paradigm
name/filename, the Brainwave Hardware may fail to communicate with BrainWaveRT. After editing
paradigms, always be sure BrainWave communication with the clinical software is intact.
CD/DVD handling
CAUTION
To avoid image loss, never touch the recording surface of a recordable CD (CD-R). Handle the disk only by the
outer edge or central hole. Do not place it face down on a hard surface. Fingerprints or scratches will make
the disk unusable.
Filters
CAUTION
Images filtered for uniformity with PURE may contain residual signal variation arising from sources other than
tissue contrast. Such variation can be more apparent in PURE filtered images than in unfiltered images,
because default window width values display more contrast after PURE. Please refer to Filter considerations
for more detail.
CAUTION
Images filtered for uniformity with SCIC or SCENIC may contain hyper- or hypo-intense signal areas that are
not apparent on unfiltered images. SCIC filtering is derived from the image itself, and the results can therefore
be affected by tissue shape and contrast.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-101

Flex Imaging Option
CAUTION
Verify that the FOV includes all anatomy. If not, phase wrap will cause water/fat signal to swap.
CAUTION
Images labeled as water may include signal from fatty tissue, and images labeled as fat may include signal
from water. This error may occur in regions of high magnetic field variation, in spatially isolated tissue, due to
patient or tissue motion, due to phase wrap artifacts, due to similar water and fat intensity in T2-weighted
Flex scans, due to TE values beyond recommended limits, and/or in images with low signal-to-noise ratios.
The presence of fat tissue in images labeled as water, or vice versa, may occur within single images or
throughout an in entire stack of slices. By default, both sets of images (labeled fat and labeled water) will be
reconstructed and inserted into the database for review. Proper calibration and center frequency selection
will reduce the occurrence of this error. Complete elimination of this error may not be possible and thus
interpretation of MR images must be completed by trained personnel.
IDEAL Imaging Option
WARNING
Computed R2* values are affected by the presence of contrast agents in tissue, and results may be incorrect.
Do not utilize post-contrast images for generating R2* maps. Affected applications include multi-echo
FGRE/FSPGR acquisitions such as IDEAL IQ, and any post process applications that create R2 star maps such
as StarMap and READY View R2 Star.
CAUTION
Make sure that the FOV includes all anatomy. Phase wrap will cause water/fat signal swap.
IV pole
Pinch Point CAUTION

Do not move the patient into the magnet with the MR table's IV pole in use. To avoid any pinch points from the
MR table's IV pole, remove the IV pole from the table, store it, and use a non-ferrous free standing IV pole.
2-102 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan
MR Conditional
WARNING
Susceptibility artifacts, such as those related to MR Conditional metal implants, will result in incorrect 3D
Geometry Correction. Please carefully verify images.
WARNING
If the calibration scan covers a region containing MR Conditional metal implants, the calibration images are
expected to have distortion and signal void artifacts. Therefore, PURE and ASSET images that have MR
Conditional metal present should not be used for post processing.
WARNING
READY View fusion does not function reliably if MR Conditional metal implants are present and a reference
image other than the original image is used. READY View Fusion should not be applied on series if the image
area includes MR Conditional metal implants. Strong B0 and B1 distortion caused by MR Conditional metal
implants will cause image distortion and signal void in images. Reference images may have different level of
distortion (e.g., MAVRIC SL versus non-MAVRIC SL) with functional series, and mis-registration will occur.
WARNING
Due to the strong magnetic field disturbance in a region containing metal, do not use the RF Drive Mode
parameter: Optimized.
WARNING
Do not use the PURE1 image filter when acquiring scans in the vicinity of metallic implants or devices. Signal
distortion effects are not predictable and will result in incorrect images.
WARNING
1Phased array UnifoRmity Enhancement
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-103

CAUTION
MR-Touch
CAUTION
When setting up an MR-Touch exam, to avoid entanglement of the Patient Driver tube with the patient's neck,
always orient the driver so that the tube is routed towards the patient's feet.
CAUTION
MR Touch has only been evaluated for use on adults. There is insufficient information to establish the safety
and effectiveness of MR Touch for use on pediatric patients.
WARNING
Never place the active acoustic driver in the magnet scan room.
WARNING
To avoid tripping over the tubing, route the tubing on the side of the table that is opposite the scan room door.
Coil CAUTION
There is a potential hazard of crossing or looping coil cables that may exist, which will or can cause minor
personal injury or property damage if the instructions are ignored.
MAGiC
WARNING
MAGiC artifacts may simulate pathology, which has the potential to lead to misinterpretation. Exercise caution
when reviewing CSF spaces, its adjacent tissues and the posterior fossa, particularly for cases involving subtle
pathology.
MAGiC creates novel artifacts that are unique to synthetic images. Specifically, hyper-intensity or
CSF suppression artifacts may be present on MAGiC T2 FLAIR. Hyper-intense signal may display as an
artefactual edge enhancement between CSF and adjacent tissue. CSF suppression artifacts may appear as an
2-104 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan
unexpected bright signal. If in doubt, it is advisable to acquire a conventional 2D or 3D T2 FLAIR series or a
MAGiC series in a different orientation for cross-sequence comparison.
Presentation of traditional artifacts (such as motion) may not appear the same in conventional imaging due to
signal sampling differences. For example, the appearance, frequency, and location of artifacts may be
unconventional. Artifacts from patient movement, (e.g., due to sneezing, tremor, etc.) will propagate through
all contrasts. Artifacts from physiological motion, such as arterial and CSF pulsations, ghosting, and any other
interference during MAGiC acquisition, will impact all synthetic contrasts. Heightened attention to proper
patient stabilization or immobilization is advised. Conventional troubleshooting via comparison to other
sequences may not be appropriate.
Figure 2-46 illustrates an example of differences between a MAGiC T2 FLAIR image compared with a conventional T2
FLAIR.
Figure 2-46: Conventional T2FLAIR image head versus a MAGiC T2W FLAIR image
# Description
1 Conventional T2 FLAIR
MAGiC T2W FLAIR
A = Hyperintense Vessel Sign (HVS)
2
B = High signal intensity at the edge of Cerebral Spinal Fluid (CSF)
C = CSF
It may occur that a given MAGiC series does not display anatomy in exactly the same way as the conventional
series. It is for this reason that the user is advised to consider all possible contrast weightings generated by MAGiC
when performing image evaluation.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-105

Multi-echo FGRE/FSPGR
CAUTION
Measurement of relaxation time by Multi-Echo FGRE/FSPGR is very sensitive to the result of gradient shim
(Auto-Shim) in the slice direction. Auto-Shim with shim-volume setting is recommended.
CAUTION
It is possible that READY View results of the calculated T2* and R2* values have an error with acquisitions that
have a large slice number value.
Navigator
CAUTION
Motion compensation accuracy may be affected by the presence of contrast agents, resulting in decreased
image quality.
Patient orientation
WARNING
Ensure that the Patient Position selection matches the actual patient orientation. Making a selection that does
not match the patient’s actual position results in incorrectly annotated and/or rotated images, possibly
resulting in improper medical treatment.
Patient transfer
CAUTION
The arm boards are not to be used as a seat or shelf. The arm board is not designed as a weight bearing
device and there is a possibility for failure and the patient or load falling.
CAUTION
position for a length of time, your patient may experience lightheadedness upon sitting up.
2-106 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan
Patient weight
CAUTION
The patient’s weight determines the SAR. Entering a weight more than the actual patient weight could
potentially harm the patient. Patient weight is not pulled with the other patient information from the
ConnectPro worklist. You must manually enter the weight.
Post-contrast scans
WARNING
With post-contrast imaging using inversion-prepared pulse sequences, there is a potential that lesion
conspicuity may be reduced and some lesions may not be apparent in comparison to T1-weighted spin-echo
imaging.
Prescan
CAUTION
Auto prescan is used to calibrate the flip angle and to accurately estimate SAR levels. Do not manually adjust
the transmit gain for GRE, SPGR, FGRE, FSPGR and FIESTA scans since excessive SAR may result if the TG is set
too high. Using Auto prescan rather than manual prescan insures that accurate SAR limits are used.
Radiation oncology table tops
Pinch Point CAUTION

Do not use the arm boards at a height above horizontal. Due to the increased width needed for the flat top
and lok-bar, there is a possibility for collision and a pinch hazard if the arm boards are used above the
horizontal plane.
CAUTION
Do not use the coil positioning braces for a hand hold when getting the patient on the table, or as a handle for
moving the table around. This feature is not designed as a weight bearing device, and could fall or break.
Pinch Point CAUTION

When moving the Express GEM cradle in and out of the magnet bore, keep the patient’s and your hands away
from pinch points. Place the patient's hands on the top of the thighs or above the head to avoid pinch points
during positioning.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-107

Synthetic DWI
Synthetic DWI is commercially known as MAGiC DWI.
WARNING
Before you acquire a MAGiC DWI scan review the following:
MAGiC DWI images may show different contrast from images acquired directly with DWI due to different
TE, Intra-Voxel Incoherent Motion effect (in liver), and in the brain, restricted diffusion effect.
MAGiC DWI may show artifacts or incorrect image calculations in moving organs.
MAGiC DWI may show artifacts due to diffusion distortion. Thus, to minimize the artifact, it is
recommended to select Real Time Field Adjustment scan parameter from the Details tab .
MAGiC DWI should not be used in ADC calculation in READY View, FuncTool, or any other 3rd party tools.
Diagnosis should not be made by only reviewing the synthesized images.
GEM coil
CAUTION
Never use an incompatible legacy coil with the GEM table. The curved bottom of the coil placed on the flat
surface of the GEM table can lead to patient injury.
CAUTION
When using the AA with the PVA in a feet-first orientation, be sure to run the AA cable over the center housing
of the PVA, pull it taut, and secure it to the PVA clip to prevent the AA cable from becoming warm.
CAUTION
The AA coil may not fit in the bore when used on patients with large torsos. To avoid injuring the patient or
damaging the coil, watch carefully as the table moves into the bore. Stop advancing the table if the AA coil
comes into contact with the top of the bore.
CAUTION
Do not carry any of the coil components by the cable. Damage to the coil component may occur. The coil may
not work if damaged.
CAUTION
The coil contains sensitive electronic components that may become damaged. Do not spray or pour cleaning
solution directly onto the coil. Do not submerge the coil in any solution. Under no circumstances should the
2-108 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan
coil be placed into any type of sterilizer.
CAUTION
Do not place a coil directly on the table surface over the GEM PA area. Be certain that the pads are on the
table before using a coil. For example, only place the wrist coil on the table surface with the pads in place.
Placing a coil directly on the PA area of the GEM table results in coil-to-coil contact, which can result in poor
image quality.
CAUTION
RF can cause localized anterior coil warming when it is positioned close to the top of the bore. Place non-
conductive padding between the coil and the bore in order to keep the coil positioned away from the bore
wall.
CAUTION
Ensure that no hair or fabric is caught between the components. Failure to comply may cause artifacts and
decreased image quality.
CAUTION
Do not pick up or carry the Head Component by the mirror attachment. To avoid damaging the coil, pick up
and carry the Head Component using two hands on the bottom of the coil.
CAUTION
Users should place a service call any time the coil is dropped or mishandled. A GE Service Representative
should inspect the coil after it has been dropped or mishandled to ensure it is safe to use.
CAUTION
Looped cables may cause RF coupling and degrade the scan performance of the coil. Do not cross or loop
cables.
Pinch Point CAUTION

To avoid injuring the patient or damaging the coil, watch carefully for pinch points as the table moves into the
bore. Stop advancing the table if the patient or any part of the coil comes into contact with the bore.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-109

WARNING
Do not use accessories (e.g. pads or straps) that have not been specifically tested and approved for use in the
MR environment (i.e., MR Safe or MR Conditional). Use of MR Unsafe or MR Conditional (used outside of its
conditions for use) accessories may result in patient burns or injuries or image degradation. Even auxiliary
devices labeled as MR Conditional are capable of causing injury if the manufacturer's conditions are not
followed.
WARNING
Electric shock may occur if the coil is attached to the system during cleaning or when it is still wet. Detach coil
connector from the scanner before attempting to clean the coil. Do not touch connectors with bare fingers.
Never press sharp objects against connector surface. Do not reattach connector after cleaning until the coil
has dried completely.
WARNING
Electric shock hazard. No user serviceable parts. Refer service to qualified service personnel.
WARNING
All coil components must be plugged in when they are in the scanner. This includes coil components that
should be plugged into the system and coil components that should be plugged into another coil component.
Leaving components unplugged can damage the coil, or cause harm to the patient.
WARNING
Do not allow the coil cables to touch the patient. Use a thermal resistant material or pad to keep the cable
from touching the patient. Failure to comply may cause patient burns.
WARNING
Prior to patient placement in the coil, assure that any breached or compromised patient skin surfaces that
come in contact with the coil have been adequately bandaged or covered.
2-110 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Display
Display
This section contains additional warnings and cautions related to image display and post processing.
AutoPaste
WARNING
Do not use Pasting post process application with images that demonstrate metal implants.
Add/Subtract images
CAUTION
Since “COMB” series contain images resulting from a combination of images from different locations in the
patient’s body, the absolute anatomical coordinates accompanying these series (shown both in the Browser
and on the displayed images) are not accurate. Only relative geometric measurements (i.e. distance, angle, or
area) are accurate.
Applications
VIBRANT, VIBRANT-Flex and LAVA-Flex
CAUTION
patient or tissue motion, due to phase wrap artifacts, due to similar water and fat intensity in T2-weighted
Flex scans, due to TE values beyond recommended limits, and/or in images with low signal-to-noise ratios.
The presence of fat tissue in images labeled as water, or vice versa, may occur within single images or
throughout an in entire stack of slices. By default, both sets of images (labeled fat and labeled water) will be
reconstructed and inserted into the database for review. Proper calibration and center frequency selection
will reduce the occurrence of this error. Complete elimination of this error may not be possible and thus
interpretation of MR images must be completed by trained personnel.
WARNING
It is possible that a spatial distortion can be seen on 3D data sets, especially in the lateral-most VIBRANT
images. The distortion can be demonstrated in sagittal versus axial data sets. There is a potential risk for
lesion localization misregistration during biopsy procedures, which could result in a re-biopsy of the patient.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-111

Imaging Option
IDEAL
CAUTION
patient or tissue motion, due to phase wrap artifacts, and/or in images with low signal-to-noise ratios. The
presence of fat tissue in images labeled as water, or vice versa, may occur within single images or throughout
an in entire stack of slices. By default, both sets of images (labeled fat and labeled water) will be reconstructed
and inserted into the database for review. Proper calibration and center frequency selection will reduce the
occurrence of this error. Complete elimination of this error may not be possible and thus interpretation of MR
images must be completed by trained personnel.
READY View
Care should be taken when using quantitative measures of cerebral blood flow from 3DASL in clinical
populations. Differences in CBF values may be seen when the same subject is scanned on different systems and coils.
Diagnostic and treatment decisions should not be based solely on these absolute values.
WARNING
Do not use 3D views only to perform voxel value, distance, angle, or area measurements. Always refer to 2D
baseline views.
Diffusion Tensor images attempt to characterize behavior of water molecules in imaged tissue. Therefore, fiber
tracking representation actually displays algorithmically predicted water molecule direction. These displays may be
only representative of the actual white matter anatomy. A trained neuro radiologist is required to make the
association between the rendered tract display and the actual patient’s anatomy.
CAUTION
Failure to place the ROI as described will negatively impact the output measurement.
CAUTION
Always click Compute again to re–compute the functional maps after making changes to the input
parameters. The changes are not taken into account automatically.
CAUTION
It is possible that READY View results of the calculated T2* and R2* values have an error with acquisitions that
have a large slice number value.
2-112 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Display
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the pixel value from saved functional maps be used by any software
applications that rely on Hounsfield values. This applies, in particular, to dose computation software
applications.
Volume Viewer
Annotation
CAUTION
When saving images for diagnostic purposes, always make sure the patient name is displayed on all views.
Filter floaters
WARNING
Floater filtering removes all 3D objects from the displayed 3D volume that have a size equal to or smaller than
the selected filter size. Before applying a filter, make sure that the selected filter size will not result in
removing pathologies or other essential anatomical structures.
Measurements
CAUTION
Measurements are more reliable when done on 2D views. Always check on the 2D reformatted views where
exactly the points have been deposited.
CAUTION
Post processing results may be affected by the presence of MR Conditional implants. Consider the following
related to post-processing MAVRIC SL images on your MR1, PACS2 or AW3 systems:
If an image includes susceptibility artifact, such as from MR Conditional metal implants, measurements made
on the image may be incorrect due to distortion of actual physical locations.
1Magnetic Resonance. The absorption or emission of electromagnetic energy by nuclei in a static

magnetic field after excitation by a suitable RF pulse.
3Advantage Workstation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-113

CAUTION
Distance, angle, and area measurements are valid only if all trace segments are longer than the inter-slice
distance.
Reformat
WARNING
A curved VOI can introduce distortion in the shape of objects. To prevent misinterpretation of the shape of an
object, always verify the cursor position by correlation with the baseline and reformatted views.
Threshold
WARNING
The use of thresholding for the building of the 3D model excludes all voxel values outside the selected range
from the 3D model. Before applying the threshold(s), make sure that the selected threshold settings will not
result in removing pathologies or other essential anatomical structures from the 3D model.
Summary table
WARNING
While ROI statistics are calculated on displayed volumes in volume viewer (segmented or not), the summary
table only displays statistics calculated from original volumes (non-segmented).
2-114 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

System maintenance
SY ST E M M A INT E NA NC E
System maintenance introduction

Maintaining a controlled environment also involves routine preventative maintenance checks by the service engineer
and site personnel. Careful planning and diligent upkeep of an MR facility can provide a safe environment for both
patients and employees. Your system requires maintenance at specific service intervals in which many of the
maintenance checks should be performed by a qualified service engineer. There are several checks you can perform.
Be aware of required maintenance and the personnel responsible for meeting each requirement.
After-sale service of MR systems under GE warranty or service-contract shall be done by GE engineers or GE-
assigned qualified people.
GE makes available, on request, such information as circuit diagrams and component lists to assist your technical
personnel in the repair of equipment classified by GE as repairable. Where there are no user serviceable parts,
adhere to this warning and refer service to qualified service personnel.
WARNING
WARNING
When installing and maintaining the products, follow lockout and tagout procedures, and adhere to MR safety
requirements, high voltage and radio frequency prevention requirements. If these instructions are ignored,
damage to the equipment and patient/personnel injury can result.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-115

SY ST E M , C OIL A ND A C C E SSOR Y M A INT E NA NC E
General cleaning and disinfection

Cleaning and disinfection of patient contact surfaces is recommended following each use.
Non-patient contact surface cleaning and disinfection should be conducted following internal housekeeping
procedures unless otherwise indicated in the following instructions.
Inspect pads for peeling or cracking. To prevent a biohazard, replace cracked or peeling pads before using.
Cleaning and disinfection recommendations for the MR system, Coils and most Accessories
Clean with commercially available wipes that contain 0.525% minimum sodium hypochlorite as the only active
ingredient. If commercially available wipes are not available, then follow one of these instructions.
Clean with a lint free cloth saturated with a 1:10 dilution of commonly available bleach containing a
recommended minimum sodium hypochlorite of 5.25%. Dilute the bleach with tap water.
Use a lint free cloth that has been saturated with a 70% isopropyl alcohol solution made from 100%
isopropyl alcohol and 30% tap water.
Use a lint free cloth with a commercially prepared solution of 70% concentration isopropyl alcohol.
Regardless of the method used, inspect to ensure visual cleanliness prior to disinfection. Repeat the
cleaning process until all visible soil has been removed.
Disinfect with commercially available wipes that contain 0.525% minimum sodium hypochlorite as the only
active ingredient following the manufacturer’s instructions. If commercially available wipes are not available,
then follow these instructions.
Disinfect with a lint free cloth, a 1:10 dilution of commonly available bleach containing a recommended
minimum sodium hypochlorite of 5.25%. Dilute the bleach with tap water.
For general disinfection or disinfection following cleaning of blood and/or body fluids, 5 minutes contact
time is recommended.
Refer to internal procedures or refer to publications such as “CDC Guideline for Disinfection and
Sterilization in Healthcare Facilities,” 2008 or latest revision, for guidance. Disinfectant may need to be
reapplied to ensure surfaces remain wet for the duration of the selected contact time.
After you have cleaned and disinfected with bleach (sodium hypochlorite), wipe surfaces with a disposable lint
free wipe that has been dampened with purified water to remove any remaining bleach residue.
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to equipment, do not use solutions containing amines, strong alkalis, quaternary
ammonium chloride compounds, esters, iodine, aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons, or ketones. Do not use
autoclaves or the industrial washers and dryers found in most hospitals or professional laundry services.
WARNING
2-116 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

General cleaning and disinfection
CAUTION
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-117

Exhaust fan
The magnet (RF-shielded) room exhaust fan, vent, and duct system are intended to evacuate the magnet room of
cryogenic gas at the MR product specified rate. Over time, the exhaust fan system may become blocked with lint, hair,
and other air-borne particles. It is important for personnel safety reasons that the exhaust fan system (vent, exhaust
fan, ducts, etc.) be kept clean to make sure the exhaust fan system operates properly and exhausts cryogenic gas to
an outside area.
In the unlikely event of a magnet quench or a cryogen gas leak, it is important that this exhaust fan system performs
at or above the specified airflow to remove the cryogen gas from the magnet room. The magnet room exhaust fan
and air inlet must be sized for a minimum of 1200 CFM (34 m3/minute) and minimum of room 12 air exchanges per
hour. The minimum air flow and air exchange rate for mobile, transportable, and relocatable systems are different
from those for fixed sites and varies depending on the type of site. Any blockage or obstruction could prevent the
exhaust fan system from providing the required airflow. If the exhaust fan system fails to operate at or above
specification, accumulation of dangerous levels of helium or nitrogen within the RF screen room could occur.
It is important that this exhaust system vent be cleaned regularly as part of the normal room cleaning. Regular
customer inspection, cleaning, and testing of the exhaust fan system (vent, exhaust fan, ducts, etc.) are needed to
make sure all equipment and parts of the system are always in good working order and able to perform to
specification. It is recommended the exhaust fan system be cleaned and inspected annually to make sure the
specified air flow rate can be met and thus ensures proper performance.
2-118 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Maintenance services
Maintenance services
The planned maintenance (PM1) services prescribed in the PM schedules represent the current manufacturer's
recommendations. Specific customer requirements and/or your site environment may necessitate more or less
frequent intervals for PM service. An agreement to perform PMs less frequently than these recommendations can be
made with the understanding that a reduction of system performance may result.
The PM service schedules in the Maintenance Service Schedules, list all the PM procedures and the frequency they
should be completed by qualified service personnel. There are different schedules for each system type.
You should perform the maintenance services shown in the table below.
Table 2-50: Operator services
Service
Item Required maintenance
interval
General Clean 4 months
Check the table emergency release. 4 months
Patient cradle
Check for cleanliness of pads and clean the inside of the cradle. Daily
and pads
Patient table Check the table alignment and proper operation. 6 months
Coils, pads, and Clean with non-abrasive cleanser. Clean coil anti-skid pads with water
Daily
straps and mild detergent only.
Coils and coil
Check for defects or damage, worn cable or exposed wires. Daily
cables
As
Image quality Perform quality assurance and functional checks.
recommended
1Planned Maintenance
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-119


MRU type I reference number is 5196918 or 5196918-2.
Table 2-51: MRU type 1
# Description
1 CHARGER POWER LED
2 BATTERY TEST LED
3 HEATER TEST LED
TEST HEATER LED switch

4 (for use by GE Service
Representative)
5 TEST BATTERY button
6 TEST HEATER switch
7 HEATER ACTUATED LED
WARNING
If the magnet rundown unit test does not perform as described in each step, with the specified LED lighting in
each step, GE strongly recommends that you stop using the system and immediately call your GE Service
Representative.
Procedure
Use these steps to confirm that the MRU is connected to the magnet and operating properly by performing this test on
the MRU every week.
1. Verify that the green CHARGER POWER LED (1) is illuminated.

2. Depress and hold the TEST BATTERY button (5) for 15 seconds.
The green BATTERY TEST LED (2) illuminates and remain lit while the TEST BATTERY switch is depressed.
3. Place the TEST HEATER toggle switch (6) in the A position.
The green HEATER TEST LED (3) illuminates.
Wait at least 5 seconds before toggling the TEST HEATER switch between position A and B. Not doing so may
cause the red HEATER ACTUATED LED (7) to illuminate.
4. Place the TEST HEATER toggle switch (6) in the B position.

The green HEATER TEST LED illuminates and it remains lit until the toggle is released.
2-120 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

WARNING
The magnet will not quench if the red HEATER ACTUATED LED illuminates due to toggling the
TEST HEATER switch. GE strongly recommends that you stop using the system and immediately call your
Qualified Service Representative if this occurs.
Related topics
Secondary ramp down procedure
Magnet cover removal procedure
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-121

PR OCEDU R ES
Procedures introduction
This section provides the step-by-step instructions for working safely in a magnetic field environment. Specifically, it
describes how to:
Eliminate Magnet Hazards

Protect the security and exclusion zones
Prepare the patient
Protect the patient from RF burns
Protect the patient’s eyes and ears
Respond to Emergencies
Patient emergencies
Equipment or environmental emergencies
Magnet emergencies
Quench with vent failure
Check the Cryogen Levels
Systems with a helium level meter
Systems with a magnet monitor unit
Handle contact with liquid cryogens
IMPORTANT!: You should understand the following definitions before continuing:
A substance that is ferromagnetic has a large positive magnetic susceptibility, meaning it is very easily
magnetized (example: Iron).
An item that is ferrous can posses intrinsic magnetic fields and become a projectile in an applied magnetic field
(examples: Iron, nickel, and cobalt).
Safety checklist
It is recommended that your site develop a safety check list based on your local, regional and country regulations.
This can be used before system acceptance ( site readiness) after installation and should be considered for periodic
review. A check list includes reviewing the following suggested topics:
Safety Areas
Exclusion zone
Security zone
Patient screening
Patient emergencies
Clothing screening of anyone who enters the magnet room
Equipment screening that enters the magnet room
Cleaning supplies for the MR room, equipment, and accessories
Cryogens
2-122 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Safety checklist
Magnets
Gradients
RF
A suggested list of reviewers of the safety check list includes the following:
MR staff
Physicians
Nursing staff
Administrative staff
Service staff
Support staff
Cleaning staff
Fire department
Police department
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-123

PR OCEDU R ES
Protect the security and exclusion zones procedure

It is vital to have supervised and controlled access within the MR environment to keep it safe from ferromagnetic items
and to guard against accidents, injuries, or damage to MR systems. Keep in mind that even a paperclip inside the bore
of the magnet can cause image artifacts or a patient burn. All personnel should be aware of the following important
steps.
1. Keep the door to the MR environment and the magnet door closed.
The doors should not be held open for other people or propped open.
Only essential personnel should be allowed to enter the magnet room.
2. Limit and monitor access to the MR environment and magnet room.
Personnel trained in MR safety should be present at all times during the operation of your MR facility to
ensure that no unaccompanied or unauthorized individuals are allowed to enter the MR environment or
magnet room.
Personnel trained in MR safety are also responsible for performing thorough screening of patients and
other individuals before allowing them to enter the magnet room.
3. Supervise non-MR personnel when working in the magnet room.
Everyone who needs to enter the MR environment on a regular or periodic basis should be educated
regarding the potential hazards related to the magnetic field.
4. Prominently display the Security and Exclusion Zone warning signs to make all individuals and patients aware
of the risks associated with the MR system.
The Security Zone sign must be posted on the entrance to the magnet room.*
These signs warn patients about the strong magnetic field and stresses the presence that no
pacemakers, metallic implants, neurostimulators, or loose objects are allowed.
The Exclusion Zone sign must be posted at the 5 gauss boundary.*
This sign warns against the strong magnetic field and stresses the presence of no pacemakers, metallic
implants, or neurostimulators.
5. Test all items for ferromagnetic properties before taking them into the magnet room.
Use a hand magnet to test items.
6. Remove ferrous items from the immediate vicinity of the magnet room.
This can reduce the chance that someone might carry a ferrous item into the magnet room.
Replace ferrous items that must remain in the vicinity of the magnet room with non-ferrous versions
whenever possible.
7. Tag ferrous items that remain at the facility so that all personnel know the item cannot be taken into the
magnet room.
Tag all ferrous items with the same label to be consistent in identifying items that are not to be in the
magnet room.
2-124 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Protect the security and exclusion zones procedure
8. Do a pocket check before entering the magnet room.

Check for loose metal objects, such as keys, and remove.
9. Keep the magnet door in sight at all times.
When working in the magnet room, do not stand between the door and the magnet or turn your back to the
door.
10. Do not turn your back on the patient or anyone else in the magnet room.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-125

PR OCEDU R ES

For your safety and the safety of the patient, an MR safety-trained health care worker at your facility should carefully
screen for hazards before patients and personnel enter the Exclusion Zone. All personnel must be aware of and
comply with your facility’s screening procedure.
WARNING
1. Use a Patient Screening form routinely before bringing patients or other personnel into the Exclusion Zone.
Thoroughly review all safety information and considerations before starting a scan with patients that have
an MR Conditional implant. In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated
for MR scans. For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the implant
device manufacturer's documentation.
Every patient, individual, and employee must be carefully screened prior to admission to the magnetic field.
Refer to the Screening form topic.
2. Review the completed screening form and evaluate the individual prior to entry.
Identify circumstances that contraindicate admission to the Exclusion Zone or items that need to be
removed before entering the Security Zone.
In addition to safety issues, metal objects or materials containing metal may distort the magnetic field and
detract from the image quality.
3. Discuss the items on the screening form with the patient or other individual.
Verbally interview the patient to verify the information on the form and ensure the patient understands
each question he/she is answering.
Allow discussion of any question or concern that the patient may have.
4. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, should have dry diapers on prior
to the start of the scan.
5. Examine or X-Ray patients who are at risk for metal eye slivers.
Serious injury may occur as a result of movement or heating of the metallic foreign body as it is attracted
by the magnetic field of the MR system.
Follow your departmental clinical screening policy.
6. Require that patients change clothes.
Provide clothes without metallic fasteners and pockets.

Patients should not wear shoes into the magnet room as they may have collected metal on the soles.
7. Instruct the patient to wash off non-permanent make-up.
Follow the precautions for patients with permanent make-up such as permanent eyeliner, which can cause
tissue heating.
8. Keep metal out of the bore.*
2-126 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

A metal-free bore prevents burns and image artifacts.
Related topics
High risk patient
Clinical screening
Patient emergencies
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-127

PR OCEDU R ES
Prepare the patient procedure

Some patients undergoing an MR procedure may experience feelings of fear, anxiety, or claustrophobia. The following
techniques may help reduce or eliminate these sentiments. Use the following techniques for all patients, even if your
patient does not exhibit signs of fear or claustrophobia. Larger patients can feel anxious due to a confined feeling in
the magnet. Degradation of image quality can also occur. Verify that the patient’s weight does not exceed the table
weight limit as defined in your MR system's documentation. Consult your system operator manual for details.
1. For safety reasons, patients must be thoroughly screened prior to scan preparation.
Screen for pertinent medical history and conditions that contraindicate scanning.
If proper screening cannot be performed, postpone the MR examination until screening can be done.
Review Contraindications for use before scanning the patient.
2. Determine scan protocol and enter the patient’s information in advance.
This saves time during the preparation for the procedure so the patient is not left waiting for the
examination to begin.
3. Provide the patient an information booklet to read.
Educating the patient concerning specific aspects of the MR examination is an effective way to prepare for
the situation and explain what is about to happen.
4. Have the patient use the restroom prior to the examination.
Fewer interruptions during the scanning procedure can help you stay on schedule and keep the patient
focused on holding still during the examination.
5. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, to make sure the patient has dry
diapers and dry clothing on prior to the start of the scan.
6. Discuss the procedure with the patient.
The length of the examination
What can be seen during the examination
What can be heard during the examination
What can be felt during the examination
7. Transfer the patient to the MR table.
Refer to your specific MR system operator manual for patient transfer details.
CAUTION
Position the patient's limbs, hair, and clothes completely on the table to avoid risk of injury when the table is
moving.
8. If the patient was transported into the magnet room via the MR table and the IV pole connected to the table is in
use, once the table is docked, replace the MR table’s IV pole with a non-ferrous free-standing IV pole.
2-128 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Prepare the patient procedure
Pinch Point CAUTION

Do not move the patient into the magnet with the MR table's IV pole in use. To avoid any pinch points from the
MR table's IV pole, remove the IV pole from the table, store it, and use a non-ferrous free standing IV pole.
9. Let the patient see the MR system while you explain the features of the bore.
Soft lighting
Good ventilation
A microphone and speaker to enable the patient to hear and be heard at all times
10. Demonstrate the use and function of the Patient Alert System.
This system is patient-activated and allow the patient to signal for assistance during a scan.
11. Explain the use of straps. See your system operator manual for details.
12. Ensure the patient is comfortable.
Use sponges and wedges to relieve pressure points and support the body in the correct position.
Ask if a blanket is needed while being aware that once the scan begins, a blanket may increase patient
warming.
13. Explain the need for hearing protection.
Use recommended earplugs (>/= 29dB NRR) to minimize the noise from the gradient magnetic field.
Alternatively, use recommended MR-compatible headphones (>/= 29dB NRR) to provide relaxing music to
the patient and minimize the noise.
14. Stress the need for cooperation to attain a diagnostic study.
It is extremely important the patient not move during the examination.
15. Stay in constant verbal and visual communication with the patient throughout the examination.
Some patients may require the physical presence of an family member or nurse in the magnet room.
16. See the following procedures for details regarding:

Protect patient's eyes and ears
Patient emergencies
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-129

PR OCEDU R ES
Protect the patient from RF burns procedure

All personnel should be aware of several factors to protect a patient from burns and peripheral nerve stimulation. The
following steps should be observed by all personnel that position patients for scanning.
1. Remove any accessory devices from the bore of the magnet that are not required for the procedure.
This includes any unplugged electrically conductive materials such as surface coils, cables, etc.
2. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, to make sure the patient has dry
diapers on prior to the start of the scan.
3. Position the patient to prevent direct contact between the patient's skin and the bore of the magnet or an RF
surface coil.
Before connecting halves of a split coil, take care that the patient's body (for example, ear, jowl, neck, finger,
hand, etc.) is not trapped or pinched by coil parts.
Figure 2-47: Patient positioned with non-conducting pads (1)
Use additional pads to immobilize the patient and make them comfortable.
Preventing patient warming is one of the most important safety measures you must take into consideration
as you prepare a patient for an MR exam. Appropriate RF padding and proper patient positioning are the
most effective means of preventing injury related to RF heating. The following are a few golden rules to
remember as you position and pad your patients:
Only use GE-approved RF padding.
Use non-conductive padding that is at least 0.25 inches (0.635 cm) thick between the patient's skin and
the magnet bore.
Appropriate padding must be used EVERY time without exception
Sheets and gowns are not a substitute for approved RF padding.
Never allow your patient’s skin to come in direct contact with the scanner bore or any surface coil or
cable.
Never allow skin-to-skin contact.
If a patient does not fit in the MR scanner bore with the required padding, another modality should be
used to scan the patient.
While some of these rules may seem a little tough to follow at times, remember that RF injury, which can in
extreme cases include burns such as the one you see below, can happen very quickly and your patient may
not have time to warn you in time to prevent an injury.
2-130 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Patient padding
Figure 2-48: Elbow RF burn
The following are a tips that will assist you in properly positioning and applying RF padding to your patients.
Should you need more information on prevention of patient warming than what is provided here, refer to
your surface coil and refer to Tissue Heating in this manual. If you need help beyond the documentation
please do not hesitate to reach out to your local Applications Specialists.
Whole body padding

Although the photos are from a Discovery system, the safety padding guidelines apply to all MR systems.
An important consideration when padding your patients is that you will need to double check the
position of the pads once the patient is in the bore. Table movement may dislodge padding and expose
skin to the scanner bore.
Figure 2-49: Padding between patient and bore. 1 = bore pads
Notice that padding is positioned not only at the patient’s sides to prevent their arms from touching the
bore, but that padding is also placed between the hands and thighs and between knees and ankles to
prevent forming conductive loops.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-131

Figure 2-50: Patient padding
Surface coil padding

Although the photos are from a Discovery system, the safety padding guidelines apply to all MR systems.
Padding with a surface coil presents different challenges from a patient RF padding perspective.
First rule of thumb is to remember to use all manufacturer provided padding to prevent motion and the
patient’s skin from coming in contact with the coil, and to also use additional padding if appropriate to
secure an opposing extremity to prevent contact with the coil which could also lead to burns or motion
artifacts.
Just as with the whole body RF padding demonstration, you’ll need to make certain that the patient’s
skin does not come into contact with the scanner bore and that padding is placed between the hands
and thighs to prevent conductive loops.
Figure 2-51: Extremity padding
A final safety consideration for surface coils is to ensure that the patient does not come into contact with
the coil cable, therefore you may need to use additional RF padding to protect the patient.
2-132 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Care should also be taken to ensure the cable is not looped in the bore and that it is routed down the
center of the scanner bore.
Figure 2-52: Coil cable with no loop
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-133

PR OCEDU R ES
Protect the patient's eyes and ears procedure

During scanning gradients produce noise that can exceed 99 dBA in the bore. Hearing protection is required to
prevent hearing impairment. Patients must close his or her eyes when the alignment light is on during positioning.
Follow these guidelines to ensure proper eye and ear protection for your patient.
1. Provide the patient with hearing protection.

Earplugs or a headphone system with stereo music. For details, see Acoustic Noise.
Earplugs reduce the intensity of the sound, while allowing your patient to hear normal conversations.
Headphone systems soften acoustic noise, but may impede verbal communication with patients while
the system is operating.
Description dB
E8801BA EAR Disposable Foam
29
Earplugs
E8801BB EAR Taperfit2 Foam
32
Earplugs
WARNING
Hearing protection is required for all people in the magnet room during a scan to prevent hearing impairment.
Acoustic levels may exceed 99 dB(A)
2. Make sure that the hearing protection device is worn properly.

Earplugs should be comfortable for the patient and inserted fully. Pliable earplugs compress when they are
rolled between the fingers and conform to the ear after they are inserted.
The headphone system should be audible and comfortable for the patient.
3. Instruct the patient to close his or her eyes when the alignment light is on.
The Laser Alignment Lights for patient positioning can cause eye injury.
CAUTION
Turn off the laser light after positioning the patient.
2-134 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Patient emergencies procedure
PR OCEDU R ES

Dealing with patient emergencies requires special planning in the MR environment because of the magnetic field.
Certain equipment used for resuscitation does not function in a magnetic field, and ferrous items can become
projectiles. If a patient needs emergency medical attention during the scanning session, follow these guidelines:
1. Press Emergency Stop on the operator’s console or magnet enclosure.

The scan aborts.
The power disables the patient-handling and scan-related equipment.
2. Notify emergency personnel, if necessary.
Since ferromagnetic life support and related equipment cannot be brought into the magnet room, it must
await the patient outside the magnet room.
3. Quickly bring the patient out of the magnet bore. Refer to your specific product operator manual for details on
cradle emergency release.
4. Transfer the patient onto a non-ferrous gurney or transport and remove the patient from the magnet room as
quickly as possible.
It is important to have an assigned emergency area outside of the magnet room where you can take a
patient so that the emergency team can use the necessary equipment.
5. Follow your facility’s emergency protocol.
WARNING
console, or camera.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-135

PR OCEDU R ES
Equipment or environmental emergencies procedure

If you experience a serious equipment fault (system overheating, smoke, or odor associated with the system) or
hazards such as fire/water in the vicinity of the MR equipment, you may need to perform a system shutdown with the
Emergency Off button. The entire MR system is turns OFF with this button, except for the static magnetic field and the
Magnet Rundown Unit used to shutdown the magnetic field.
Use this procedure to perform an emergency shutdown on your system during an equipment or environmental
emergency.
1. Press the Emergency Off button located on the wall next to the computer equipment or next to the magnet
room door.
This stops power to the magnet room, removing all electrical power from all components of the system.
This button also removes any power sources from UPS devices.
2. Evacuate the patient.
Follow the guidelines in the Patient Emergencies procedure.
3. Evacuate the MR suite.
Follow your facility’s emergency protocol.
4. Call the fire department, if appropriate.
When the fire department arrives, evaluate the need for an emergency MRI magnet quench.
If the firefighters need to take ferromagnetic equipment into the MRI magnet room, quench the magnet.
5. Contact a service engineer before restoring power.
To restore power after an Emergency Off, the main circuit breaker must be reset before rebooting the
system.
6. After service has examined the system, document the correct cause of the emergency.
Keeping the events documented allows you to reference this information in the future and may help
prevent similar incidents.
WARNING
The Emergency Off button does not turn off the magnetic field. To avoid personal injury or equipment damage,
do not bring any ferromagnetic equipment into the magnet room. Assume that equipment is magnetic unless
it is clearly labeled otherwise.
2-136 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PR OCEDU R ES

The content in this topic applies to all magnets.
In addition to patient and equipment emergencies, magnetic field emergencies can also occur. Examples of magnetic
field emergencies include instances where the presence of the magnetic field may cause injury or harm, if someone is
pinned between the magnet and ferromagnetic object or there is a fire in the magnet scan room. All personnel should
be familiar with how to respond to magnet emergencies.
WARNING
Personal Injury or Equipment Damage
This emergency magnet rundown procedure may create dangerous situations or damage equipment.
Perform this emergency magnet rundown procedure only in emergency situations (such as when a person is
trapped between a magnetic object and the magnet).
In situations where there is no immediate threat, contact your GE Service Representative for non-emergency
rundown procedures.
Use this procedure to perform an emergency magnet rundown on your system during a magnetic field emergency.
1. Ensure all ventilation systems are on and the scan magnet room door(s) is open.
2. Follow you facility's emergency protocol and evacuate the patient and all other personnel from the scan
magnet room unless they are actively providing first aid to the entrapped person.
3. Press the Magnet Rundown button located in the scan magnet room or located remotely (if provided),
whichever is easiest to access.
Only activate the Magnet Rundown switch in an emergency situation.
This results in a rapid reduction of the magnetic field in about two minutes.
There is a boil-off of cryogens, accompanied by crackling and hissing sounds.
Notify your Qualified Service Representative that a quench occurred.
Related topics
Secondary rundown procedure
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-137

PR OCEDU R ES
Secondary magnet rundown procedure

This secondary quench method should be attempted only after other approved methods of rundown have been
attempted and in the event of a life threatening condition. Performing this procedure will take the magnet out of
service for at least one month.
WARNING
Personal Injury or Equipment Damage
This emergency magnet rundown procedure may create dangerous situations or damage equipment.
Perform this emergency magnet rundown procedure only in emergency situations (such as when a person is
trapped between a magnetic object and the magnet).
In situations where there is no immediate threat, contact your GE Service Representative for non-emergency
rundown procedures.
Use these steps with the Vacuum Break Tool to break the magnet vacuum for a magnet rundown.
1. If possible, call your Qualified Service Representative.

2. Locate the Vacuum Break Tool (46-260852G3).
This tool is for emergency only and should be stored in a safe and easily accessible location. Ensure that all
operators are informed of this tool's location.
Figure 2-53: Vacuum Break Tool
3. Ensure all room ventilation systems are on and the scan magnet room door is propped open.
4. Locate the vacuum port access cover on your magnet cover.
2-138 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Secondary magnet rundown procedure
Figure 2-54: SIGNA Voyager vacuum port access on the magnet cover
5. Remove the vacuum port access cover from the magnet cover to expose the vacuum port.
You should be able to remove the access cover with your finger or non-magnetic tool.
Figure 2-55: Example of an access cover off and the vacuum port exposed
6. Remove the protective dust cover from the vacuum port.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-139

The magnet cover in Figure 2-56 (below) is shown removed for illustration purposes only.
Figure 2-56: Dust cover removed
7. Screw the handle of the Vacuum Break Tool into the plug of the vacuum port by turning it clockwise.
At least three full turns are required to ensure thread engagement.
If you are unable to turn the handle, either call a GE Service Representative for further assistance or
remove system enclosure cover.
Figure 2-57: Vacuum Break Tool screwed into vacuum port plug
8. Lift the Vacuum Break Tool handle until it is parallel to the floor. Leave the handle in this position.
Figure 2-58: Vacuum Break Tool parallel with floor
l There will be an inrush of air into the magnet and the magnet will quench in about 30 seconds.
Related topics
2-140 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PR OCEDU R ES

Use these steps to remove the magnet cover if you are unable to turn the emergency Vacuum Break Tool in the plug
of the vacuum port in a clockwise direction.
1. Use a non-magnetic 5 mm Allen Wrench to remove the two M6 screws that secure the magnet cover.
Figure 2-59: Front Bridge Cover Screws
2. Remove the front bridge cover.

If you cannot remove the cover, then undock the patient table and position it away from the magnet and
then remove the cover.
For a fixed table configuration, it is possible to remove the front bridge cover without removing the table. If
the table needs to be removed, call a Qualified Service Representative for further assistance.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-141

PR OCEDU R ES

A magnet quench can result in the release of cryogen vapor into the magnet room if the vent fails; white clouds of
vapor appear in the magnet room. Cryogens released during a quench can cause asphyxiation, frostbite, or injuries
due to panic. Magnet quenches are indicated by a loud noise, warning message, or the tilting of an image on the
image screen. It is critical to have a well-planned method to quickly remove the patient and all personnel from the
magnet room if a quench should occur.
1.5T and 3T magnets contain approximately 1850 liters of liquid helium. If 100% of the 1850 LHe fills the minimum
sized scan room, a properly functioning emergency exhaust fan with 1200 CFM and 12 scan room air exchange / per
hour would evacuate that minimum sized scan room in about 2 hours. After that time it would be assumed safe for a
qualified GE Field Service Engineer to enter the scan room and measure the O2 levels. It remains the customer
responsibility to approximate the time to evacuate 1850 LHe for use in the site specific emergency procedures.
Use your site specific magnet room evacuation procedure. The following steps are guidelines for a site procedure in
case of a sudden cryogen release into the magnet room.
1. Do not panic.
Staying calm helps you remain focused so you are able to safely remember and follow your site planned
method of action.
2. Using the intercom, tell the patient to stay calm and remain on the table.
Tell the patient that someone will be in shortly to offer assistance.
3. Turn on the magnet room exhaust fan.
The exhaust fan is designed for 1200 cubic feet per minute, which exchanges the total volume of air in the
room 12 times per hour. The time for the helium to be near a safe level is based on the amount of helium
within a magnet,
4. Prop open the door between the operator room and hallway or if in a mobile unit, open the door to the outside.
This promotes air circulation.
5. Prop open the door to the magnet room.
If the magnet room door does not open, follow your site specific emergency procedure to open the door.
6. Enter the magnet room and assist anyone present to exit from the room.
If a gurney or wheelchair is needed to remove the patient, make sure it is a non-ferrous type.
When exiting, stay near the floor where the oxygen will be and immediately exit the magnet room.
7. Close the MR scan room door when all have been evacuated.
If the magnet room door is left open, there is a potential that helium gas will spread to other areas,
including heating and cooling vents.
8. Evacuate all personnel from the area until the air is restored to normal.
Related topics
Magnet rundown
Magnet emergencies procedure
2-142 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Check cryogen levels procedure
PR OCEDU R ES
Check cryogen levels procedure

Systems with a Helium Level Meter
It is very important to check and record the helium level. Sufficient helium is necessary to avoid accidental quench. If
the helium levels fall below 60%, or the level your service engineer says is acceptable, contact a service engineer
immediately.
Use this procedure to check cryogen levels.
1. Turn on the Helium Meter power switch.
This switch is located at the system cabinet.
2. Press Update on the system cabinet.
An updated reading of the helium level posts.
3. Record the percent of helium reading.
Keep a logbook to record readings daily.

It is crucial that cryogenic systems be checked regularly to be sure they are properly functioning.
4. Turn off the Helium Meter power switch when complete.
Systems with a Magnet Monitor Unit

It is very important to check and record the helium level. Sufficient helium is necessary to avoid accidental quench. If
the helium falls below 60%, or the level your service engineer says is acceptable, contact a service engineer
immediately.
Use this procedure to daily check cryogen levels of a system with a Magnet Monitor Unit.
1. Locate the magnet monitor, which is typically in the equipment room. Push the sample button on the Magnet
Monitor Unit and hold it for approximately 10 seconds.
An updated reading of the helium level posts.
2. Record the He Level value when it displays on the monitor.
The reading also toggles to the magnet pressure. Monitor any change in pressure. Normal pressure is
between 3.9psi and 4.1psi.
Keep a logbook to record readings daily.
It is crucial that cryogenic systems be checked regularly to be sure they are properly functioning.
3. If the alarm LED is illuminated, contact your service engineer.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-143

PR OCEDU R ES
Handle contact with liquid cryogens procedure

Since the cryogen gasses are odorless, tasteless, and colorless, it is particularly important to have specific procedures
in place to avoid frostbite if there is ever an accident in which the liquid or gaseous cryogen contacts human skin. Such
procedures should be established and made readily available to all personnel.
Use this procedure immediately in the unlikely event that someone comes in contact with a liquid cryogen.
1. Promptly flush the area with large volumes of tepid water.
Tepid water is 105° to 111°F or 41° to 46°C.

For cold burns, immerse affected area in tepid water for at least 15 minutes.
2. Calm the victim.

3. Avoid aggravating the injury.
Do not rub or massage the affected parts of the body.
4. Cover the area with a sterile dressing.
You may also use a clean sheet if the exposed area is large.
This protects the area from further trauma.
5. Consult a physician immediately.
Maintain the affected area at normal body temperatures until a physician arrives.
2-144 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Safety review
PR OCEDU R ES
Safety review
Table 2-53: Safety review table
Situation Procedure
Fire, sparks, a loud noise or other
Press an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment
emergency condition in the magnet
room or at the magnet room door. Remove the patient from the
room not associated with normal
magnet room.
operation of the system.
Magnet quench, indicated by a loud
noise, warning message, dense white
vapor with vent failure, helium meter Evacuate the patient and personnel from the magnet room and
dropping considerably or the tilting of close the magnet room door. Follow your site's overnight
an image on the image screen. procedure. All helium vapor should automatically be vented
outside of the magnet room.
Oxygen monitor is activated indicated
by a loud sound.
Magnetic-field emergency, e.g., a Press the Magnet Rundown button in the magnet room. Remove
person pinned between the magnet the patient from the scan room.
and a ferromagnetic object.
Press an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment
Fire, sparks or a loud noise, indicating room or at the magnet room door. Remove the patient from the
a severe system malfunction in the magnet room.
computer equipment room.
Fire or severe condition relating to the Press an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment
power distribution unit (PDU) or room or at the magnet room door. Remove the patient from the
service outlets. magnet room.
Overtemp indicator lights up at the Remove the patient from the magnet room. Check the PDU vent
remote power panel (RPP) or at the for obstructions. If the vent is obstructed, or if the overtemp light or
PDU, and an error message appears message remains on, perform a system shutdown and then press
on the scan console’s System Status an Emergency Off button, either in the computer equipment room
Display area. or at the magnet room door.
Press the Emergency Stop button on the console or magnet and
Patient needs medical attention.
remove the patient from the magnet room.
Make certain the cradle is fully retracted on the transport (the
home position) before undocking the transport. Keep all personnel
(including patients) away from any spill. Keep patients on the table
until safe transfer is possible. Check for oil leaks and if any exist,
Hydraulic failure of the table.
clean them up to prevent anyone from slipping on the oil. If the
table latch is stuck and the table cannot be removed, pull the Table
Transport Emergency Release. Remove the table from clinical use
until it is repaired.
Imaging functions are lost without Follow your facility’s emergency procedures during this type of
warning. occurrence.
In all cases, notify a GE Service Engineer as soon as possible.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-145

The ACR Guidance Document for Safe MR Practices may be found at ACR.org. GE does not necessarily endorse the
document, but provides the reference for information.
2-146 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

MR compatibility
M R COM PAT IB ILIT Y
MR compatibility test guidelines

Introduction
This section document describes a set of specifications and standards that can be used to evaluate the Magnetic
Resonance (MR) compatibility of hand-held, non-electronic equipment used in conjunction with the MR system.
MR compatibility standards
The American Society for Testing and Materials, International (ASTM) has developed the following MR compatibility
standards (and are developing more):
F1542 Specification for the Requirements and Disclosure of Self-Closing Aneurysm Clips
F2052 Test Method for Measurement of Magnetically Induced Displacement Force on Medical Devices in the
Magnetic Resonance Environment
F2119 Test Method for Evaluation of MR Image Artifacts from Passive Implants
F2182 Measurement of Radio Frequency Induced Heating Near Passive Implants During Magnetic Resonance
Imaging
F2213 Measurement of Magnetically Induced Torque on Medical Devices in the Magnetic Resonance
Environment
F2503 Practice for Marking Medical Devices and Other Items for Safety in the Magnetic Resonance
Environment
These may be ordered online at http://www.astm.org.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-147

SE R VIC E SC H E D U LE
PM service schedules introduction

Specific customer requirements and/or your site environment may necessitate more or less frequent intervals for
PM1 service. An agreement to perform PMs less frequently than these recommendations can be made with the
understanding that a reduction of system performance may result.
To further enhance productivity, the PM procedures have been divided into four types:
Type 1 – Safety and Regulatory

Type 2 – Image Quality
Type 3 – Other (System not available for patient scans)
Type 4 – Other (System available for patient scans)
The PM matrices list all the PM procedures and the frequency they should be completed, according to schedules listed
below. The schedules indicate the procedures that are performed during each visit. They also show the type (1 - 4) for
each procedure. The services should be completed at the indicated intervals and should be performed only by
qualified service personnel.
Four/year PM schedule
A = 0 to 3 months
B = 4 to 6 months
C = 7 to 9 months
D = 10 -12 months
2-148 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

MR system PM service schedule

The PM1 service schedule lists all the PM procedures and the frequency they should be completed according to
schedules A -D. The checks are on a sequential yearly schedule, for example A is the first three months, B is the
second three months, etc.
A = 0 to 3 months
B = 4 to 6 months
C = 7 to 9 months
D = 10 to 12 months
GE Healthcare Lifecycle Maintenance

GE Healthcare equipment is designed and manufactured to be of the highest quality. Likewise, the maintenance
requirements in this manual are designed to help maintain safe, high quality performance of this equipment for its
expected life.
GE Healthcare Customer Service Manuals, and Customer Operations Manual/User Guides, are designed with the
intent that customers or service providers can utilize them to perform standard maintenance on the equipment (such
as planned maintenance, which is typically time-based) without proprietary service tools or methods. Please note,
alternative original equipment manufacturer planned maintenance schedules may be utilized, and other routine
maintenance efficiencies may be attained, based on GE Healthcare’s (or its approved partners’) use of proprietary
service tools and methods, including data analytics and back office capacity. These GE Healthcare proprietary service
tools and methods accomplish the prescribed and necessary routine maintenance activities identified in the Customer
Service Manual, and/or the Customer Operations Manual/User Guides.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
Table 2-54: MR system PM service schedule
Test Purpose Location Check performed A B C D

Image quality tests
Image Quality Magnet Laser Light Alignment X
Image Quality Magnet LVShim(PM Mode) X X
Image Quality Magnet EPI White Pixel (PM Mode) X X
Image Quality Magnet SPT (PM Mode) x x
Image Quality Magnet PM Check (Service Contract Customers Only) X x X x
Confirm that the application software revision installed on
the system is the same or at a later version of the Software
Image Quality MR system revision required in the "ePM form data" tab that is located X X X X
in Software matrix DOC1667089. This document is available
from the Common Documentation Library.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-149


Confirm that the service pack revision installed on the
system is the same or at a later version than the service
pack revision required in “ePM form data” tab that is located
in Software matrix DOC1667089. This document is available
from the Common Documentation Library.
Magnet Room tests
Safety Magnet Cardiac Gating Cable x x
Operation of Oxygen Monitor(if present and included in GE
Safety Magnet X
Service Contract)
Safety Magnet Pneumatic Patient Alert System x
Safety Magnet PAC Leakage Current Test X
Magnet test
Check Magnet Inspect Cryogen Vent X
Magnet
Test GE Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU). Perform Quarterly Ser-
Safety and Cryo- X X X X
vice Test found in the MRU manual 5265188 or 46-318393
gens
Magnet
Test GE Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU). Perform Yearly Ser-
Safety and Cryo- X
vice Test found in the MRU manual 5265188 or 46-318393
gens
Replace Equipment Inspect Cryocooler System x
Inspect for discoloration the inside of the bore and the front
Check Magnet x
and back of the magnet discoloration
ISC test
Safety Equipment UPM Head Functional Check x
Safety Equipment UPM Body Functional Check x
Patient Handling test
Safety Equipment Cradle egress functionality Safety X X
Coil test
Clean Magnet P-Port Cleaning and Lubrication X
ICC test
Check Equipment Check GCU fluid levels and top off x x
Replace Equipment GCU Coolant Deionization X
Check Equipment Check CCU fluid levels and top off x x
Replace Equipment CCU Coolant Deionization x
Check Equipment FPU Filter Cleaning x x
Check/Clean Equipment Body Coil Blower and Air Filter x x
Check/Clean Equipment Patient Blower and Air Filter x x x x
PDU tests
Safety Equipment Leak Sensor Functionality Check X
Safety Equipment Emergency Off and Stop Circuits Indicator Lights X
2-150 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Computer tests
Check Operator Set Time x x x x
Clean Operator Clean Dust x x
Check Operator Save info x x
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-151

SIGNA Voyager: Planned Maintenance Plan

GE Healthcare MR Systems Lifecycle Maintenance
GE Healthcare equipment is designed and manufactured to be of the highest quality. Likewise, the maintenance
requirements in the Customer Operations Manual/User Guides, and the Customer Service Manuals, are designed to
help maintain safe, high quality performance of your equipment for its expected life.
GE Healthcare Customer Operations Manual/User Guides and Service Manuals are designed with the intent that
customers or service providers can utilize them to perform standard maintenance on the equipment (such as planned
maintenance, which is typically time-based) without proprietary service tools or methods. Please note, alternative
original equipment manufacturer planned maintenance schedules may be utilized, and other routine maintenance
efficiencies may be attained, based on GE Healthcare’s (or its approved partners’) use of proprietary service tools and
methods, including data analytics and back office capacity. These GE Healthcare proprietary service tools and
methods accomplish the prescribed and necessary routine maintenance activities identified in the Customer
Operations Manual/User Guides or Customer Service Manuals.
Maintenance and repair work shall be carried out by qualified personnel, trained in maintenance and repair of this
medical device in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards within the manufacturing enterprise. Customers
should contact their local GE Healthcare Service Sales if they desire to have GE Healthcare perform the PMs with the
Advanced (Proprietary) Service Methods and OEM1 trained service team.
In addition, GEHC systems have required customer, equipment operational checks that the customer should be
performing on a periodic basis to ensure correct system operation or image quality before scanning. The details can
be found in the Customer Operator Manuals.
Planned Maintenance Schedules

Planned Maintenance (PM2) tasks (and recommended schedules) are developed from design requirement and
operations/use assumptions to provide for the minimum maintenance needed to ensure specified equipment design
performance, image quality, and safety. Specific customer requirements or site environment may necessitate more
frequent PM service. Service agreements can account for increased PM frequency or additional specific tasks, but
those are made with the understanding that the minimum technical PM requirements of the Service Manual are met.
The life cycle PM matrices in the Service Schedules list all the PM procedures and the recommended frequency they
should be completed once the equipment is beyond GE Healthcare (GEHC) warranty. The services should be
completed at the indicated intervals and should be performed only by qualified service personnel.
GEHC introduces the following concepts tied to your MR System planned maintenance.
A. Warranty IB PM Schedules: Warranty PM Service requirement is different than the lifecycle Out of
Warranty (IBOW) PM Service requirement due to manufacturing, installation checks, the newness of the
equipment in the first 12 months after install.
Warranty IB PM concept is introduced to ensure the specified system performance and image quality for the
customer, while maximizing system availability to the customer.
Warranty PM tasks and schedules ensure specified engineering operational performance throughout the
warranty period in the 12 months following install, and in the equipment lifecycle after warranty. Because of
the investment in installation checks, the newness of the equipment, and the other contractual service covered
by the 12-month warranty period following install, the warranty PM plan allows for more customer up-time.
The recommended PM tasks during the Warranty period require approximately 6 hours of applied
1Original Equipment Manufacturer

2-152 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

SIGNA Voyager: Planned Maintenance Plan
maintenance time per year, divided into two Warranty PM schedules. The respective tasks for these schedules
are included in the GEHC Service Manuals. The warranty PM is applicable only for the newer platform products.
B. Out of Warranty (IBOW) PM Schedule Concept: Once systems are beyond the 12 month after install
warranty period, those systems adopt the lifecycle “out of warranty” (IBOW, or post-warranty) PM schedules. If
the customer does not utilize a service contract, then refer to the PM schedules given in the system operator
manual, see MR system PM service schedule.
For customers with GEHC service contracts, the GEHC Field Engineer will follow GEHC recommended PM tasks
as per the GEHC proprietary Advanced Service Methods Manual, to include Remote system performance or
condition check options that support the customer in maintaining specified performance and image quality, in
concert with maximized system availability.
C. Equipment Operation Check (EOC): Magnet Rundown Unit (MRU) LED check is defined as the Equipment
Operation Check (EOC) for all GEHC MR Products. EOCs are not PMs, but rather are operational checks required
by both customer operators and GEHC Field engineers (if the equipment is under GEHC contract) to ensure
safety or equipment performance. EOCs are typically Customer Operator procedures, and procedure or
finalization procedures that a GEHC Field engineer performs (if the equipment is under GEHC contract) IF they
are present on-site and have performed maintenance.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 2-153

China RoHS label directive

The following product pollution control information is provided according to SJ/T11364: Marking for the Restriction of
the use of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Products.
This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess of the limits established by the
Chinese standard GB/T 26572: Requirements of concentration limits for certain restricted substances in electrical and
electronic products. The number in the symbol is the Environment-friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the
period during which the toxic or hazardous substances or elements contained in electronic information products will
not leak or mutate under normal operating conditions so that the use of such electronic information products will not
result in any severe environmental pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period is
“Year”.
In order to maintain the declared EFUP, the product shall be operated normally according to the instructions and
environmental conditions as defined in the product manual, and periodic maintenance schedules specified in Product
Maintenance Procedures shall be followed strictly.
Consumables or certain parts may have their own label with an EFUP value less than the product. Periodic
replacement of those consumables or parts to maintain the declared EFUP shall be done in accordance with the
Product Maintenance Procedures.
This product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, and must be collected separately and handled
properly after decommissioning.
Table 2-55: Table of hazardous substances’ name and concentration (SJ/T 11364).
Hazardous substances' name

Component name
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr(VI)) (PVBB) (PBDE)
Magnet X O O X O O
Patient Table X O O X O O
Systems Cabinet X O X X O O
Coils X O O X O O
Global Operating Console (GOC) X O X X O O
Chiller O O O O O O
Accessories (Uninterruptable Power Supply) X O X X X X
LCD Monitor O X O O O O
O: Indicates that hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit
requirement in GB/T 26572.
X: Indicates that this hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is
above the limit requirement in GB/T 26572.
Data listed in the table represents best information available at the time of publication.
Applications of hazardous substances in this medical device are required to achieve its intended clinical uses, and/or
to provide better protection to human beings and/or to environment, due to lack of reasonably (economically or
technically) available substitutes.
2-154 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Chapter 3: Equipment
Chapter 3: Equipment
This chapter includes information related to the MR system hardware.
MR system startup and shutdown and TPS reset
Daily Automated Quality Assurance
Equipment components
TDI coils
System management
Guided Install
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-1

ST A R T U P / SH U T D OWN
System startup and shutdown introduction

This section contains information on how to turn on and off and log into and out of your MRI system. It also includes
quality control information to make sure your system is operating before scanning a patient and how to reset a
subsystem of your scanner to safely recover from errors and various conditions.
Procedures
Startup MR system
Logon/logout of the MR system
Change system default logon password procedure
System shutdown procedure
System power off/on
Emergency shutdown
Restart MR system
TPS reset
DAQA
Acquire a DAQA scan
Execute the DAQA SNR test
Execute the DAQA system test
View DAQA test trends
DAQA messages
3-2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

System startup procedure

Startup from an extended shutdown
Use these steps if you have performed an extended shutdown procedure.
The equipment room is typically used by service engineers to service the equipment. Use caution when inside the
equipment room.
Do NOT open any GE MRI System Cabinets or protective covers. There are dangerous high voltages within the
cabinets.
There are several Cabinets and components within the equipment room used by the GE MRI System.
The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) is the in-coming Power for the MRI System. Do NOT turn off power to this
component.
The ISC1 contains the PDU 2 for the MRI System.
Figure 3-1: ISC
1Integrated System Cabinet

2Power Distribution Unit
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-3

# Description
1 ISC
2 Main Breaker in On position, fully vertical.
3 EMO1 Reset button.
1. From the ISC, complete the following:

a. Open the small access door to view the Main Breaker and EMO button. See Figure 3-1.
b. Reset the breaker. Move the breaker from horizontal to On position (fully vertical). See 2 in Figure 3-1.
c. Press the EMO Reset button. See 3 in Figure 3-1
The EMO Reset button turns on power to the high voltage components and results in a blower and relay
noise.
The system computer should automatically turn on.
2. If the computer does not automatically turn on, then complete the steps below in the Standard startup
procedure.
Standard startup
Considerations
There are times during a system startup or reboot, that the MR system executes a thorough file integrity check
(correcting corrupted files, bad blocks, capturing file system information for better analysis of issues, etc.). The startup
or reboot can take as long as 40 minutes. The following criteria determines the check:
If the system is not shut down in an orderly fashion, for example a power outage shuts down the computer.
Every 120 days the system executes this thorough file integrity check.
Use these steps to turn on your MRI system.
1. Press the on/off button to turn the power on to the computer.

When power is on, the power indicator light is illuminated.
A message appears with a count-down to logon.
If you change your mind and decide to shut down at this point, click System > Halt from the Logon window.
2. Wait until all messages are removed from the screen to enter your logon name and password.
a. In the Logon Name field, type sdc.
b. In the Password field, type your password.
The GE system default password is adw2.02.0.
Your site can change the default password. For details, see Chang system default logon password
procedure.
3. Select Logon from the Operation menu on the logon screen.
4. Select your name from the Username menu, type in your password, and click OK.
Use Emergency logon only if you do not have a user profile set up on the system.
1EMergency stOp
3-4 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

After a period of inactivity, you are automatically logged off. When you or another user logs back in, the
system returns to its last known state.
To manually log off, click Tools icon arrow and select Lock Screen from the menu.
If the ISC has been powered off, once power has been restored, wait 20 minutes before you begin scanning.
Allowing 20 minutes for the electronics to warm up results in optimum system performance and image quality.
The default password changes to adw2.02.0 in PX26.2 or later.
Related topics
Shutdown MR system
Restart MR system
System startup and shutdown orientation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-5

SIGNA Voyager: emergency stop recovery procedure

Use these steps to recover normal system operation after an emergency-stop has occurred. For emergency stop
details, see Emergency stop procedure.
1. Go into the equipment room and locate the ISC cabinet.
equipment room.
cabinets.
2. From the ISC cabinet, press the EMO Reset button. Then the system will power on.
Figure 3-2: ISC
# Description
1 ISC
2 Main Breaker in On position, fully vertical.
3 EMO1 Reset button.
1EMergency stOp
3-6 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

SIGNA Voyager: emergency stop recovery procedure
3. Return to the operator console and complete a TPS Reset. For details, see TPS reset.
4. After the TPS Reset is finished, the emergency-stop condition should be recovered. If the emergency-stop
condition remains after the TPS Reset is finished, call your service engineer.
Related topics
Shutdown MR system
Restart MR system
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-7

Skip system cool down shutdown procedure

Use these steps to turn off the system in an emergency when you want to skip the 60 minute cool down time.
2. Click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
Figure 3-3: Service Desktop Management tab
3. From the Service Desktop Manager screen, click Utilities tab.

4. Select System Shutdown.
3-8 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Mobile startup procedure
Figure 3-4: System Shutdown on Utilities tab
5. Complete the steps in Extended shutdown.
To restart the system, follow the steps in Startup from an extended shutdown. Wait 60 minutes after the startup
before you start to scan. Not waiting the 60 minutes could impact image quality.
Related topics
Emergency shutdown
Mobile startup procedure

Once the system has been configured, it does not need to be done again. Instead, you can start up the system
following the steps below.
1. Start up MR system.
2. Click the Service Desktop manager tab.
4. Select GI: Mobile in the program list and click Start.
5. At the root password prompt, type your password and press Enter.
operator is the default password. If your facility has changed the password, consult your site administrator.
6. Select a hospital/facility from the list at the Mobile Site Setup screen.
7. Click Activate on the Mobile Site Setup window.
8. Click Activate Site.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-9

9. Click Reboot and press Enter.

10. Start up MR system.
Related topics
System Startup and Shutdown orientation
3-10 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

System logon procedures

The logon feature requires you to log on to access your system. It can be turned on or off by your administrator.
How your site uses this feature depends on if your site has a central user repository to which the system is
connected. Sites with networks are referred to as enterprise systems, those without are referred to as stand-alone
systems. This feature can be used with either configuration, although some features are more applicable to enterprise
systems.
After a period of inactivity set by your administrator, or after a user locks the screen, the system splash screen
displays. Use these steps to log back in.
1. Type your logon Name.

2. Type your password.
3. Click Logon.
Logging off does not prohibit other users from logging in. Logout is designed to protect patient privacy, not
stop approved users from logging in.
When you or another user logs back in, the system returns to its last known state.
Note the GE logo area content changes based on your MR system
If you have administrator privileges, when you log on you are asked if you wish to perform administrative
tasks or scan. Do not click the button next to the Enter admin screen if you only want to scan.
Figure 3-5: Example of a Startup screen
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-11

Logon Name:
The Logon Name for your system. The default Logon Name is SDC. Your administrator can set-up a
unique Logon ID for you through your hospital Enterprise system.
Password
A password assigned to you by the system administrator.
Related topics
System logout procedure
System emergency logon procedure
3-12 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The splash screen may or may not display the Emergency Logon button. Turning this option on or off is set by your
system administrator. When using Emergency Logon, you are prompted to enter your name, but there is no
password.
Use Emergency Logon only if you do not have a valid account set up.
1. From the Emergency Logon screen, type any name in the Your Name text field.
2. Click Logon. One of two actions occurs:
The screen unlocks and displays the desktop that was last visible right before the screen was locked.
The system starts-up or re-boots.
Figure 3-6: Emergency logon
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-13


The procedure for logging out of the system has changed. Use these steps to lock the screen and switch the user of
the system. When you or another user logs back in, the system returns to its last known state.
1. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon.
Figure 3-7: Service Desktop Manager
3-14 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Lock Screen Switch User.
The Logon screen displays for you to log on to the system.
Only users with valid accounts set up by the system administrator can log on to the system, unless the
Emergency Logon Allowed feature is enabled.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-15

Change operating system password procedure

Use these steps to change the default GE password to a unique password for your facility. This is only required for
systems that do not have the Signa Secure Advanced option.
1. In the header area, click the arrow next to the Tools icon .
Figure 3-8: Tools menu
2. From the Tools menu, click Command Window.

a. Type su to change to a root user.
b. At the Password prompt, type operator, which is the initial default.
c. If you do not want to change the password, then in step 3 proceed to sub-step c.
3. From the Command or C-shell window complete the following:
a. Type: passwd <enter>
Read the Attention message:
Please follow the documented procedure for changing and reporting this password. Failure to do so
may inhibit the proper account access by authorized users and GE support personnel.
3-16 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Change operating system password procedure
b. Respond to the prompt, "Enter 1 to continue, 2 to cancel" and type: 1 <enter>

c. Respond to the prompt for your existing password: adw2.02.0 <enter>
d. Type your new password using the guidelines below: XXXX <enter>
Must be 8 characters minimum.
Cannot be blank or left as the default.
Should contain a mix of numbers, alpha, and special characters.
Must not be made up solely of dictionary words.
Should not be the same value at different sites.
e. Retype the new password: XXXX <enter>
Read the Attention message:
Please contact your local System Administrator, your local Service Representatives and your InSite
Support Representative and inform them of this change. Please update all other hosts that share this
account, change is effective for local host only.
4. To exit sdc level, type: exit <enter>
Note that once you change the password from the default "adw2.02.0" you cannot go back to that password.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-17

System restart procedure

Considerations
There are times during a system startup or reboot, that the MR system executes a thorough file integrity check
(correcting corrupted files, bad blocks, capturing file system information for better analysis of issues, etc.). The startup
or reboot can take as long as 40 minutes. The following criteria determines the check:
If the system is not shut down in an orderly fashion, for example a power outage shuts down the computer.
Use these steps to restart your MR system.
1. Make sure all of the images have reconstructed and are available for display from the Patient List.
2. Click End Exam, if necessary.
3. Wait for all Archive and Network functions to complete.
4. If you have a legacy MOD, detach and remove it from the MOD disk drive.
5. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon arrow and select System Restart.
It may take up to 30 seconds for the system to respond.
6. When prompted, click the reason for the system restart: Daily, Service, Other, or Cancel to exit the restart of
your system.
3-18 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

System restart procedure
The system displays a blue screen with the icon/status area at the beginning of shutting down.
Wait for the Welcome to... logon window to appear. This indicates restart completion.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-19


Standard shutdown
Use these steps to perform a system shutdown, which terminates power to the system electronics in an orderly
fashion so image files are saved. This procedure does not turn off power to the MRI magnet.
1. Make sure all images have reconstructed and are available for display from the Patient List.
2. End an exam, if necessary.
3. Wait for all archive, network, filming, CD/DVD, etc. functions to complete.
4. Remove any archive media, if necessary.
5. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon arrow and select System Power off.
6. When prompted, click Yes.
The applications begin to shut down, which can take up to 60 minutes. A pop-up window displays.
System power off preparation takes up to 60 minutes for system cool down. During that time, please
do not power off the system.
3-20 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

When the shutdown is completed, the screen goes blank and the computer turns off.
Extended shutdown
Use these steps to execute an extended power shut down once the computer has successfully shutdown and the
computer power is off.
equipment room.
cabinets.
The Main Disconnect Panel (MDP) is the in-coming Power for the MRI compressor in the Integrated Cooling Cabinet
(ICC). Do NOT turn off power to this component. It must remain on to keep the helium at the proper temperature to
maintain correct magnet pressure.
1. Confirm that the computer is turned off.

2. From the ISC1 complete the following:
a. Open the small access door to view the Main Breaker. See Figure 3-11.
b. Move the breaker to the horizontal position. See 2 in Figure 3-11.
Only the ISC is turned off. The ISC contains the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) for the MRI System. It results in
noise as the relays and switches open.
Sumitomo compressor and coldhead remain on.
Figure 3-11: ISC
# Description
1 ISC
2 Breaker in off position, fully horizontal.
1Integrated System Cabinet
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-21

Skip system cool down shutdown

Use these steps to turn off the system in an emergency when you want to skip the 60 minute cool down time.
Figure 3-12: Service Desktop Management tab
3. From the Service Desktop Manager screen, click Utilities tab.

4. Select System Shutdown.
3-22 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-13: System Shutdown on Utilities tab
5. Complete the steps in Extended shutdown.
To restart the system, follow the steps in Startup from an extended shutdown. Wait 60 minutes after the startup
before you start to scan. Not waiting the 60 minutes could impact image quality.
Related topics
Emergency shutdown
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-23

System Power Off/On procedure

Use these steps to save energy when the system is not expected to be in use for extended periods of time, such as
evenings, weekends and holidays.
Power off or Overnight mode

1. Make sure all images have reconstructed and are available for display from the Patient List.
2. End an exam, if necessary.
3. Wait for all post processing, archive, network, filming, CD/DVD, etc. functions to complete.
4. Remove any archive media, if necessary.
5. From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon arrow and select System Power Off.
6. When prompted, click on the reason for the system shutdown: Daily, Service, Other or Cancel to exit the
shutdown of your system.
7. From the computer housing, press the power button as indicated in Figure 3-15.
The application begins to shut down, which can take less than 15 minutes. A pop-up window displays.
3-24 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

System power off preparation takes less than 15 minutes for system cool down. During that time,
please do not power off the system.
The system displays a timer screen to count down until the system power is off.
When the shut down/count down is completed, the screen goes blank and the computer turns off.
Power on
1. From the computer housing, press the button on the computer housing as indicated in Figure 3-15 (below).
Figure 3-15: Button restores power to computer
2. Wait until all messages are removed from the screen to enter your logon name and password.
a. In the Logon Name field, type sdc.
b. In the Password field, type adw2.02.0.
3. Select Logon from the Operation menu on the logon screen.
4. Select your name from the Username menu, type in your password, and click OK.
Use Emergency logon only if you do not have a user profile set up on the system.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-25

Emergency shutdown procedure

System overheating, smoke, or odor associated with the system are good reasons for an emergency power down.
1. Press any Emergency Stop button (magnet cover, or keyboard) to remove power from the magnet room.
2. Evacuate the patient and all other personnel from the MRI suite.
3. Call service.
4. After service has examined the system, the cause of the emergency should be written down for future
reference.
The MR Safety Guide operator manual that is shipped with your system contains more instructions on responding
to patient emergencies.
Related topics
System logon/logout procedures
3-26 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

TPS reset procedure
TPS reset procedure

Use these steps to reset the TPS when instructed by either a system message or an InSite technician.
1. In the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon to display the System Management work area.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click TPS Reset.
TPS reset aborts realtime or normal scanning.
During TPS Reset, the Scan desktop and Graphic Viewport are locked. This means that you cannot view/edit,
save, cut, copy, paste, or download any series in the Workflow Manager.
The Rx state may change after a TPS reset.
The following warning message is displayed after TPS Reset has been selected if all images have not been
reconstructed, "Image reconstruction is in progress. Pending images may be lost. Are you sure you want to
start TPS Reset?".
For a multi-station group, if some (not all) series in that group have been scanned and then TPS Reset is
started, all the series in that group will be locked and they cannot be downloaded or scanned again.
4. Click OK.
The TPS reset aborts reconstruction of pending images, Manual Prescan, Auto Prescan, Spectroscopy
Prescan, Reference Scan, Prep Scan, and Normal Scan.
The bore fans and lights turn off during the TPS reset. When the reset completes, bore fans and lights return
to their previous state.
5. Wait for the "TPS successfully reset" message in the system status display message box.
If the TPS reset fails, the following messages display:
"TPS Reset Failed. Please see the message log for more details".
"TPS/APG communication failed (s) A re-download of TPS may be necessary."
Click OK to acknowledge your response to the message.
If the TPS reset fails two consecutive times, the exam is automatically ended.
6. Continue scanning where the system left off.
Related topics
Restart MR system
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-27

DAQA
Scan phantom procedure

The DAQA1 procedure provides a means for you to track overall system or RF2 coil functionality. The application
supports all GE coils that have the coil ID feature.
Considerations
To obtain meaningful, reproducible data for a given RF coil, consistency and repeatability is key. Always use the
same phantom, the same positioning of the phantom in the coil and the same landmark at the same location on the
phantom/coil.
Table 3-4: Phantoms used in DAQA tests
Phantom name Part number

1.5T TLT Head Sphere (Green) 46-265826G6
Body TLT Sphere Phantom 2135650
Body TLT Loader 2135652
1. Set up the desired coils and the phantom on the table. The coil and phantom you choose will depend on
whether you are going to perform the SNR or System test.
a. Place the coil on top of the cradle and place the phantom holder and phantom inside the coil - in this
example, the TDI Head Neck Array coil.
Figure 3-16: Place coil on cradle
b. If you are using the body coil, use the Body TLT phantom and Loader. Follow the pictorial guidelines below
to transport the phantom.
1Daily Automated Quality Assurance

2Radio Frequency
3-28 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Scan phantom procedure
Figure 3-17: Correct phantom transportation
Figure 3-18: Incorrect phantom transportation
2. Landmark the coil and phantom.

3. Press Advance to Scan.
4. From the Worklist Manager, click the New Patient icon to begin a scan.
5. In the New Patient area of the Worklist Manager, typegeservice as the patient ID and 111 lbs (or 50 kg) as the
patient weight.
A higher weight than 50 kg for the phantom scan could cause system damage.
6. Click Show Protocols to open the Protocol screen.
7. Move a 3-plane localizer protocol from the Protocol list to the Multi-Protocol Basket and click Accept. For
example, click Template > 3-Plane 2D Localizer > FGRE.
8. Click Start Exam.
9. Scan the 3-plane localizer.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-29

10. When complete, click End Exam from the scan session tab.
11. Perform either the SNR or System test.
Related topics
3-30 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

SNR test procedure
DAQA
SNR test procedure
The phantom remains in the magnet for this test. This test can be run with a variety of coil/phantoms/holders. The test
will fail if you do not have the right coil/phantom/holder combination.
1. Open the Service Desktop Manager.

2. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Service Browser.
3. From the Image Quality tab, select Daily Automated Quality Assurance.
4. Click Click here to start this tool to open the tool and click OK to the prompt(s).
5. Verify that the Ghosting Level and Geometric Accuracy option is not selected.
6. Verify the currently connected RF1 coil is displayed in the Selected Coil field.
If there is more than one coil configuration for the connected coil, select the desired coil configuration from
menu.
If a coil is not plugged in, the tool will list the Body coil.
7. From Select Scan Plane menu, choose the desired SNR testing plane.
8. Click Start to initiate the test.
The Abort button stops data acquisition/post-processing before completion. When selected, the system
may take up to 30 seconds to complete the abort process.
If the connected RF coil is changed after the DAQA tool has started, selecting the Start button displays a
"Coil not Valid" message. Click OK and the tool refreshes the main user interface with the information of the
new connected coil. Confirm the UI settings and click Start again to begin data acquisition.
9. Click Yes in the "Confirm!" window to acknowledge phantom placement and landmark.
A progress bar indicates the status.
The system collects one signal image and one noise image and displays the values for signal, noise, SNR,
Transmit Gain (TG) in 0.1dB units and the center frequency (CF) in units of Hz in the Test Complete window.
10. Record the results and click OK to the prompt.
11. Click Exit.
Related topics
Acquire a DAQA scan
1Radio Frequency
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-31

DAQA
System test procedure

The DAQA1 System test is run using the head TLT2 sphere and one of the TDI Head Neck Array coil.
If you do not use the head TLT sphere placed in the appropriate positioner (pad or holder) and centered properly,
then the test will fail.

2. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Service Browser.
3. From the Image Quality tab, select Daily Automated Quality Assurance.
4. Click Click here to start this tool to open the tool and OK to the prompt(s).
5. Select the Ghosting Level and Geometric Accuracy option.
The Selected Coil and Selected Scan Plane fields are unavailable.
6. Click Start to initiate the test.
The Abort button stops data acquisition/post-processing before completion. When selected, the system
may take up to 30 seconds to complete the abort process.
If the connected RF coil is changed after the DAQA tool has started, selecting the Start button displays a
"Coil not Valid" message. Click OK and the tool refreshes the main user interface with the information of the
new connected coil. Confirm the UI settings and click Start again to begin data acquisition.
7. Click Yes to the "Confirm!" message to acknowledge the correct coil and phantom use.
8. Click Yes in the next "Confirm!" message to acknowledge the phantom placement and landmark.
A progress bar indicates the status.
The system acquires three signal images from all three planes and one axial noise image. The axial signal
image is used to calculate center frequency, transmit gain, SNR, ghosting, and geometric accuracy. The
noise image is used to calculate SNR. The sagittal and coronal images are used to calculated geometric
accuracy. The results display in the Test Complete window.
9. Record the results and click OK to the prompt.
10. Click Exit.
Related topics
Acquire a DAQA scan
1Daily Automated Quality Assurance

2Top Level Test
3-32 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAQA trend setting procedure
DAQA
DAQA trend setting procedure

Use these steps to view the trends of your DAQA tests.

2. On the Image Quality tab, select Daily Automated Quality Assurance to view the Daily Automated Quality
Assurance.
3. Click Click here to start this tool to open the tool and click OK to the prompt(s).
4. Click Trend Data to view the Trend Viewer screen.
Figure 3-19: Trend Viewer screen
5. Click one of the coils and one of the items in the Result File list to view the trend graph.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-33

Figure 3-20: Trend graph
6. Click any of the available option buttons to view a unique graph, which is representative of the option label.
7. Click Close to close the Trend Viewer screen.
Related topics
Acquire a DAQA scan
3-34 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAQA messages
DAQA
DAQA messages
The following table displays the content of DAQA messages.
# Message
A different coil is connected! Please re-select the coil and plane before hitting [Start].Coil not
1.
valid.
A different coil is connected! This coil is also not supported by Daily QA Tool. Please plug in a
2.
valid supported coil before hitting [Start].Coil not valid.
3. Aberration Geometric Distortion
4. Abort
5. ATP execution has hung, please check atp process or the scanner hardware
6. but was called with incorrect input arguments., ...
Center not within the object. This algorithm works best for convex objects. Very likely that your
7.
results are in error
8. Center Frequency
9. Close
10. Coil configuration notice
11. Daily Automated Quality Assurance
12. Daily QA Tool aborted on date_time
13. Do you really want to abort the current scan?','Abort?
14. ERROR
15. Error building SVAT file for manual prescan.
16. Error building SVAT file to load the protocol.
17. Error editing the protocol for COIL
18. Error editing the protocol for FOV
19. Error editing the protocol for GRADMODE
20. Error editing the protocol for PLANE
21. Error editing the protocol for SWAPPF
22. Error executing the SVAT script to load the protocol.
23. Error executing the SVAT script to run Auto-Prescan.
24. Error executing the SVAT script to run first image scan.
25. Error executing the SVAT script to run Manual-Prescan.
26. Error executing the SVAT script to run second image scan.
27. Error from get_coilid function.
28. Error from read_coil_id_list function.
29. Error with abort_svat function
30. ERROR with APS_EVENT svat command
31. ERROR with DOWNLOAD svat command
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-35

# Message
32. ERROR with DOWNLOAD svat command, scanner busy
33. ERROR with IPG_ADVANCE_TOSC svat command
34. ERROR with LOADPROTOCOL svat command
35. ERROR with MODIFY_CV svat command
36. ERROR with MPS_SCAN_TR svat command
37. ERROR with NEW_EXAM svat command
38. ERROR with PROTOCOL_DIR svat command
39. ERROR with PROTOCOL_MODE svat command
40. ERROR with PSC_UPDATE_VAL svat command
41. ERROR with RECON_STOPPED svat command
42. ERROR with RESET_SCAN svat command
43. Error with reset_svat function
44. ERROR with SCAN_EVENT svat command
45. ERROR with START_LOOP_EVENT svat command
46. ERROR with STOP_LOOP_EVENT svat command
47. Error with table_wait_time function
48. ERROR with VIEW_EDIT svat command
49. Error! Cannot find the phantom!
50. Error! Two test images do not have the same size!
51. Exit
52. Ghosting Level
53. Ghosting Level & Geometric Accuracy
54. Images: too Few Inputs
55. Images: too Many Inputs
56. Incomplete Rx, please check coil and landmark
57. Max
58. Maximum Geometric Distortion
59. Mean
60. Min
61. No
62. No P files found!!!
63. No valid landmark
64. Noise
Note: Phantom placement and coil landmarking are critical for repeatable results. Verify coil
65. and phantom are properly placed and landmarked at correct location. Also verify there are no
large air bubbles in the phantom. Do you wish to continue?
66. OK
3-36 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

DAQA messages
# Message
Only system configuration is allowed for ghosting level option. Make sure you landmark on this
67.
configuration or unselect ghosting level option. SNR is measured on Axial plane
68. Please Select a DAQA history file
69. Please select the coil ! Select Coil
70. Please select the coil and scan plane!.Select Coil & Plane
Please wait at least 15 minutes before scanning to prevent swirling artifacts. Do you wish to
71.
continue?
72. Please wait while the DAQA initializes..
73. Protocol download failed
74. Result Files
75. Scale Geometric Distortion
76. Select coil
77. Select Scan Plane
78. Signal
79. SNR
80. Standard Deviation
81. Start
82. Success: Center within the object!!!
83. Sufficient Data is not available for trending. Atleast two runs of the DAQA tool is required.
84. Table check has hung, please check table_feedback process or the scanner hardware
85. Test Completed
86. Test Completed
87. Test Completed! Results are recorded in output file
Test proceeds without at least 15-minute waiting time. Test result might not be stale','Test
88.
proceeds without enough waiting time
The current coil is not supported by Daily QA Tool. Please plug in a valid supported coil before
89.
hitting [Satrt].Coil not valid.
90. There is not that many files listed !!!
91. There might be artifacts on the test images or you are not using homogeneous phantoms!
92. Transmit Gain
93. Trend Data
94. Trend Viewer
95. Wait for a minute after moving the table
96. Yes
You chose to include ghosting level and geometry accuracy in addition to SNR in the test. The
97. test will use connected coil configuration and 17 cm sphere phantom with loader if Head Coil is
used, otherwise 17 cm sphere phantom without loader. Do you want to continue?
98. You chose to include ghosting level and geometry accuracy in addition to SNR in the test. The
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-37

# Message
test will use connected coil configuration and 27 cm sphere phantom with a loader. Do you
want to continue?
You chose to use connected coil configuration and Axial plane. Please make sure that you use
99. a 17 cm sphere phantom with loader if Head Coil is used, otherwise 17 cm sphere phantom
without loader. Do you want to continue?
Related topics
DAQA procedure
DAQA SNR test procedure
DAQA System test procedure
3-38 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

EQU IPM ENT COM PONENT S
Equipment components introduction

This section helps you to become familiar with your MR system, including the system components and hardware.
Concepts
Others
Computer concept
Emergency Stop and Abort scan buttons concept
Equipment cabinet room concept
Gradient coils concept
In-room Display concept
Keyboard concept
Magnet controls concept
PAC concept
Patient alert system concept
RF coils concept
Table concept
Workstation introduction
System specifications concept
TDI coils
TDI introduction
TDI Safety concept
Coil configurations concept
PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient position procedure
PA component patient position procedure
Two AA component patient position procedure
Whole body patient position procedure
Procedures
Coil
Coil malfunction considerations
Coil signal non-uniformity considerations
Connect coils procedure
In-room monitor
In-Room Display concept
In-Room display coil screen
In-Room display gating screen
In-Room display patient setup screen
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-39

In-Room display scan time and table location screen

Setup In-Room display procedure
Reset In-Room monitor touch screen procedure
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure
Patient comfort
Patient alert procedure
Patient comfort procedure
Others
Mouse controls concept
Phantom breakage causing spillage considerations
3-40 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

The workstation monitor displays images and scan, display, archive, network, service, and iLink programs. It also
displays protocol notes and physiological waveforms when they are activated. AutoView is always displayed in the
upper right area of the monitor. All routine operations are carried out from this workstation monitor.
The monitor can be raised and lowered, tilted forward or backward, or rotated left to right. Adjust the monitor's height
and tilt for a comfortable viewing position.
Figure 3-21: MR Workstation
Concepts
Computer concept
Keyboard concept
Related topics
Equipment orientation
In-room monitor
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-41

Computer concept
The computer is located in the cabinet stored below the desk.
Figure 3-22: Dell T5810 System computer
# Description
Insert a pin or ballpoint pen to press the button in the hole to reset the computer when the on/off
1
button doesn't work.
2 USB ports that can be used when exporting images or importing jpgs to add to a Protocol Note.
3 Power on button.
The CD/DVD drive that is used by service to install software and the operator manual.
4 The Read/Write CD/DVD drive is used to burn CDs or DVDs when using the CD/DVD for image
storage, the Data Export, or the Protocol Exchange options.
Figure 3-23: Dell T5820 System computer
# Description
1 Power on button.
2 USB ports that can be used when exporting images or importing jpgs to add to a Protocol Note.
The CD/DVD drive that is used by service to install software and the operator manual.
3 The Read/Write CD/DVD drive is used to burn CDs or DVDs when using the CD/DVD for image
storage, the Data Export, or the Protocol Exchange options.
Procedure
3-42 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Computer concept
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-43

Keyboard concept
The keyboard contains all the keys you would find on any computer keyboard along with a few specialized buttons
along the top. Standard keyboard keys and their functions include:
Delete or Backspace erases characters

Enter confirms what is typed or selected
Tab moves across the areas on the current screen
Up or Down arrow keys move between text boxes or adjust window width or window level
Figure 3-24: Keyboard auxiliary keys
Table 3-7: Keyboard
# Selection Description
1 Emergency Disables all electrical power sources near the patient. It shuts down the RF1,
Stop gradient amplifier, table movement, shim power supply, and main MRI magnet
power supply cabinets. It will not quench the magnet or turn off the computer.
Figure 3-25: The new Emergency Stop button appearance
eIFU The eIFU symbol located by the Emergency Stop button (not shown in photo),
1Radio Frequency
3-44 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Keyboard concept
# Selection Description
indicates that there are electronic instructions for use on your MR system. For
details, see online help.
Figure 3-26: eIFU symbol
2 Volume Regulates the patient in bore volume for the patient communication system.
Control
3 Talk Activates the intercom system so you can speak to the patient inside the bore.
Press to talk, release to listen.
4 Volume Regulates the MR operator console volume for the patient communication
Control system.
5 Start Scan Resumes scanning after pause or breath hold techniques.
6 Pause Scan Stops the scan temporarily.
7 Stop Scan Aborts a scan or prescan. Scan data is not saved or reconstructed.
8 Move to Moves the cradle to scan position when pressed.
Scan
9 Stop Move Stops the cradle movement when pressed.
10 PC Icons Inactive.
11 Function Activates shortcuts in certain features.
Keys
Related topics
Computer concept
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-45


The mouse is a hand-operated device that you maneuver across the surface of a pad. As you move it, the on-screen
cursor mimics the movement of the mouse, allowing you to move among windows and menus. For instance, moving
the mouse to the right causes the on-screen cursor to move to the right. The mouse is used to make selections by
clicking the left, right, and middle buttons.
Figure 3-27: Mouse
or
Table 3-8: Mouse image legend
# Description
1 Left button
2 Middle button or scroll wheel
3 Right button
For mouse button actions see About this manual.
Related topics
3-46 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The equipment cabinet room houses the PDU1, RF2, power amplifiers, gradient amplifiers, and system control
cabinets. The water chiller, shield cooler compressor, and other equipment is also located here. This room is often
referred to as the Computer room because it used to house the computer; however, the computer is now in the
console room.
This room is usually kept at very cool temperature in order to keep the equipment from overheating. If you have any
questions about the temperature settings, or the equipment kept in this room, please consult your service engineer.
Related topics
Gradient coils
1Power Distribution Unit

2Radio Frequency
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-47

Gradient coils concept

The gradient coils are three sets of wire coils wrapped around a fiberglass cylinder located within the magnet
housing. Electric current flows through the coils and is turned on and off very rapidly, thereby producing expansion
and contraction of the gradient coils. This expansion and contraction creates the tapping sound when scanning. It is
commonly measured in gauss per centimeter.
Each coil affects a different plane (the XY, YZ, or XZ plane), as it is turned on and off at different points in a pulse
sequence. The scan plane and pulse sequence selected determine which gradient functions as the slice selective,
phase encoding, and frequency encoding gradient. The system calculates this automatically.
The gradients are resistive magnets and are water cooled by the gradient chiller located in the Equipment cabinet
room.
Figure 3-28: Cut away of gradient coil inside the body coil
Related topics
RF coils
3-48 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

RF coils concept
RF coils concept
Imaging coils are tuned to match the precessional frequency of nuclei under evaluation. Generally, the length of coil is
equal to the FOV1 the coil covers. The depth of penetration is governed by the coil elements. When selecting a coil,
keep in mind the FOV, how deep you need to image, and the size of the patient. Phased array and surface coils need
to be placed close to the area of interest. The broad category of imaging coils can be classified into two categories:
transmit and receive coils

receive only coils
Each coil, other than the body coil, has an operator manual. Refer to the coil operator manual when setting up the
patient for an exam.
TDI Head Neck Array

The TDI Head Neck Array is a receive only coil. It provides higher SNR 2 than the Body coil due to the smaller size. It is
used primarily to image the head, although they can be used for imaging any body part that fits into the coil. It is an
example of a volume (uniform depth of signal) coil.
Figure 3-29: Head Neck Array
Body coil
The Body coil is a transmit/receive volume coil used for large FOV imaging and for uniform depth penetration. The
Body coil is located within the magnet enclosure and is invisible to you and the patient. The Body coil can also act as a
transmit only coil when used with receive only coils.
1Field Of View
2Signal-to-Noise Ratio
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-49

Figure 3-30: Body coil
Surface coil
Surface coils are receive only coils that can be either single or multiple channels. Phased array (multi-channel) coils
have a number of coil elements combined together to increase SNR, and depending on the coil design, may increase
available FOV (either length or depth) without decreasing SNR. Flat surface and phased array coils do not have
uniform depth penetration.
The transmit mode of the coil appears on a label adhered to the coil. A T/R label refers to a transmit/receive coil.
There are some coils commonly referred to as surface coils, such as the Knee coil, that are in fact
transmit/receive coils. Therefore, technically, they are not a surface coil.
Multi-channel surface coils can help you improve productivity, a crucial consideration in today’s competitive scanning
environments. These devices can be optimized for parallel imaging techniques, improved SNR, and can provide better
image resolution. Parallel imaging techniques, like ASSET or ARC, reduce scan times, which can decrease patient
exam times. Reduced coil diameter together with multi-channel phased array elements over a given volume increase
SNR and thereby resolution.
3-50 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

RF coils concept
Figure 3-31: Multi-channel coil
Procedures
Patient position procedure
RF coil connector
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-51


Coils can be plugged into coil ports located at either the foot or the head end of the table. All coils have a coil ID. There
are two purposes for Coil ID: matching the coil plugged in with the selected coil in the prescription, and checking if the
coil is properly seated in the port.
Multi-channel coils
1. Place the lock face in the unlock position.
2. Insert the coil plug into a port located at either the head or the foot end of the table.
Transmit/receive coils can only be plugged into Port 2 (labeled P2).
Figure 3-32: Head end of table with two (P1 and P2) coil ports and foot end has one coil port (P4)
3. Lock the connector plug by rotating the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
Figure 3-33: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock
Related topics
Coil Selections screen
RF coil connector
RF coils
3-52 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Coil decoupling mechanisms are circuits activated by diodes to prevent RF1 currents from flowing in the receive-only
coil during transmission from the Body coil. This results in local distortion of the transmit field and signal intensity
variations within the image.
If you suspect a coil malfunction, consult your service engineer and discontinue use of the coil.
Figure 3-34: Coil malfunction
Related topics
Annefact
Coil non-uniformity of signal
Shading
Star artifact
1Radio Frequency
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-53

Coil signal non-uniformity considerations

The RF1 receiver detects signals closest to it most efficiently. This characteristic may cause a non-uniformity of signal
in the image. The effect is more pronounced with surface coils than with volume coils, appearing as localized bright
areas close to the coil. Signal variability may also result in incomplete fat suppression when chemical fat suppression
techniques are used.
To minimize the chance of non-uniformity of signal in a coil:
try a different coil or use a STIR sequence rather than trying additional fat saturation techniques
apply a coil intensity correction technique, such as PURE.
PURE can be used with compatible surface coils

PURE can also be used with the 8-channel transmit/receive high resolution MRI Devices Knee coil
Figure 3-35: Uncorrected image
Figure 3-36: PURE corrected image
Related topics
Annefact
Coil malfunction
Coil shading artifacts
Star artifact
Tips for reducing artifacts when scanning with surface coils
1Radio Frequency
3-54 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The IRD 1 is a shielded touch panel color monitor. The monitor and scan room interface provides immediate feedback
on patient information, preparation, coil setup, coil connectivity, and gating information.
Figure 3-37: In-room monitor located on both sides of the magnet front
1In-Room Display
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-55

Figure 3-38: In-room display
3-56 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Table 3-9: In-room display monitor description
# Description
1 Patient information display
2 Waveform display
3 Scan time and scan location information
4 Coil selection information
5 Bore fan and light control
Procedures
In-room display setup
Related topics
In-room monitor patient setup screen
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-57


Figure 3-39: Coil screen with floating coil
Table 3-10: Coil screen selections
# Description
1 Port column:
Indicates the port in which the coil is plugged into.
Connected Coil column:
Black text indicates that the coil is connected.

Orange text indicates that there is an operator action required.
Red text indicates that there is an error condition.
2 The Notes area displays coil messages or incompatibilities. Orange text indicates an operator
action is required.
You can have multiple coils connected and only one of the coils requires an action, which
will be indicated in orange.
You can have both coils in black text, and have an error. This scenario occurs when you
have two coils plugged in that are incompatible.
3 If Coil tab is orange consider the following:
There is an operator action required, which is posted in the Notes area.

You cannot proceed to scan until "Coil" in the tab is no longer orange.
3-58 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

# Description
Figure 3-40: Coil tab is not orange
The scan time is not displayed in the upper right corner of the display because you cannot
proceed to scan when Coil is orange.
4 Figure 3-41: Coil port area is a representation of the coil connectors
Color scheme
Green ports indicate a coil is plugged in or active.

Orange blinking or flashing ports indicate that an action must occur before the coil can
become active.
Red ports indicate an error condition.
Notes are displayed at the bottom of the screen to identify the problem.
Number system
P1 represents the left coil port located at the head end of the patient table. See Figure 3-40
to note a green port that indicates it is active.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-59

# Description
P2 represents the right coil port located at the head end of the patient table. See Figure 3-
39 to note an orange port that indicates an error state because the coil has not yet been
defined.
P4 represents the left coil port located at the foot end of the patient table.
Related topics
RF coil connector
In-room display concept
In-room display patient setup procedure
3-60 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Figure 3-42: Gating screen
Table 3-11: Gating screen selections
# Description
1
ECG icon : click to toggle the display between all four waveforms and the cardiac
only waveform.
Respiratory gated icon : click to toggle the display between all four waveforms and
the respiratory only waveform.
Peripheral gated icon : click to toggle the display between all four waveforms and
the peripheral gated only waveform.
2 Waveform display: ECG gating, peripheral gating, and respiratory.
3 Click to select gating lead: VCGI, VCG-II, VCG I + II, PG 1, and RESP2.
4 Click to invert the waveform.
5
Settings icon : click to toggle the Settings control panel on/off.
1Peripheral Gated
2Respiratory
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-61

# Description
Reset icon : click to reset the gating system.
Settings control panel

The options on the Settings control panel can also be accessed from the Gating Control screen. The Settings control
panel allows you to do the following:
Select the best trigger lead.

Invert the ECG waveform
Select the cardiac gating lead type: VCG, Standard or third party.
Apply a noise filter for Standard gating leads.
Figure 3-43: Settings control panel
Related topics
In-room monitor concept
In-room monitor patient setup procedure
Cardiac patient setup: ECG gated exam
3-62 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The Patient Information screen displays patient information and allows selection of Patient Weight, Auto Start and
Patient Position orientation. The green landmark line changes from dashed to sold when the landmark is established.
Figure 3-44: In-room Patient Setup screen
Figure 3-45: Example of an In-room display header
The far left text indicates the patient table location relative to the landmark (S = superior, I = inferior). If the landmark
has not been established, this field is not displayed.
The scan time counts down once scan begins. The field is not displayed until a landmark has been established and
there is no error on the coil tab.
Date of Birth
Date of Birth is useful as a table-side secondary patient identification field.
Patient Weight
Tap the Patient Weight text field to display the keypad. Tap the appropriate numbers to enter a weight and tap OK.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-63

Figure 3-46: Patient Setup with patient weight
Related topics
In-room display concept
3-64 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The in-room display of the scan time and table location is not interactive. It displays the scan time remaining and the
table location.
Figure 3-47: Scan time and table location
Scan Time icons

There are several icons that can display on these tabs: Patient Setup, Gating, Coils and Fan Light. The icons appear in
the scenarios described in the table. They must be resolved so that you can proceed to scan.
Figure 3-48: Example of Scan Time iROC display with icon
Table 3-12: Scan Time In-room monitor icons
Scan Time icon Description

This icon represents that the table needs to be
raised. The animation of the vertical table icon mov-
ing up and down stops once the table is all the way
up and can connect and move into the bore. The
icon then becomes still when the table is at the full
up position.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-65

Scan Time icon Description

This icon indicates that the table has no home or
has lost the home position. The animation of the
home icon flashing stops once the table is in the
home position.
Related topics
In-room monitor coil screen
In-room monitor gating screen
In-room monitor patient setup screen
3-66 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use these steps to view the various tabs from the In-Room monitor display.
1. From the In-Room display, use the touch screen on the magnet cover to access its functions. There are 5 tabs
available:
Patient Setup - displays the patient information and allows selection of weight, Auto Start and patient
orientation.
Scan Time - only displays scan time and table location.
Gating - displays waveforms and allows selection of lead and invert. Press the Gating tab on the In-room
monitor to turn it on. If gating is already turned on, the waveforms selected from the operator console are
shown. If gating was turned off from the operator console and the In-room displays the gating tab, switch
to another tab and return to the gating tab to turn on gating again.
Coils - only displays the currently plugged in coil.
Fan Light - controls the bore fan speed and the light brightness.
In-Room display screen saver

If any of the following events do not occur within 60 minutes, the screen saver appears on the in-room display:
new exam or end exam

change to any patient data displayed on the IRD 1
change to the table position
change to the connected coil
Related topics
Landmark with touch and go strip
Reset In-room monitor touch screen
Set-up patient information on in-room monitor
1In-Room Display
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-67

Reset In-Room monitor touch screen procedure

Use these steps to reset the touch screens on the magnet control panel, if it is not active.
2. In the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager screen, click Service Browser.
4. From the MR Service Desktop – Insite Browser, click Diagnostic tab/icon.
5. In the left screen panel, click Hardware Location to open the file tree.
6. Click Magnet Room to open the file tree.
7. From the Magnet Room list, click InRoom Display.
8. From the right panel, click Reset IRD Console. It takes approximately 3 minutes to reset the In Room Display
and touch screens.
Related topics
Set-up patient information on In-Room monitor
Setup In-Room display
3-68 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Set-up patient information from In-Room Display procedure
Set-up patient information from In-Room Display pro-

cedure
Use these steps to define the patient weight and orientation and activate auto start from the in-room monitor.
Prerequisite
The patient name field must be completed before you change the patient weight, select AutoStart or Patient Position.
1. Setup an exam and click Start Exam from the Worklist Manager.
2. From the in-room display, use the touch screens to select Patient Setup tab.
3. From the Patient Setup tab, touch the weight text field to display a numeric keypad.
4. From the numeric keypad, touch the number you want to enter. Repeat this for each number you want to
enter.
Figure 3-49: Numeric keypad
Touch the arrow key to backspace.

Touch Cancel to erase the text in the weight field.
Once you acquire the first series, you are unable to access the key pad to change patient weight.
5. When you are satisfied with the number in the text field, touch OK.
The pop-up key pad closes.
6. Auto Start is now selectable. To turn on Auto Start, touch the Auto Start check box.
7. To change the patient orientation selection, touch the desired patient orientation icon arrows
Related topics
Setup In-room display
Reset in-room monitor touch screen
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-69

Magnet controls introduction

This section describes the magnet control concepts and procedures available on multiple MR system platforms.

3-70 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Magnet controls provide the method for setting up patient comfort and scanning. The magnet controls are on two
panels located on both sides of the magnet cover. The control panels have the same buttons, they are just located in a
mirror image of each other. The control panel has a subset of backlit buttons that light up to show what typically is the
next step in the workflow. The lights are only typical next steps. You can choose to select another button at any time.
Figure 3-50: Magnet controls
# Description
1 Left side controls
2 Right side controls
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-71

Magnet control buttons

Figure 3-51: Left side magnet controls. Note that the right side panel is a mirror image of the left side
# Button Description
In/Out Fast moves the table in/out of the magnet bore at a faster rate
1
when pressed simultaneously with the In or Out button.
Home returns the cradle to the home position, fully retracted on the
2
patient transport.
3-72 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

3 Back to Landmark returns the table back to last landmarked position.
Out retracts the cradle from the bore. To retract the cradle quickly, press
4
In/Out Fast button and simultaneously press the Out button.
Alignment turns alignment lights on or off. When the alignment lights are
5 on, this button is lit and the “landmark on” message is posted on the status
panel.
6 Landmark enters the defined landmark.
7 Advance to Scan advances the defined landmark to magnet isocenter.
Stop Table halts in-and-out cradle movement. This button overrides all
8
other cradle motion commands.
In advances the cradle into the bore. To advance the cradle quickly, press
9
In/Out Fast button and simultaneously press the In button.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-73

Stop scan stops a scan during either prescan, an active scan, or after
10
Pause Scan is pressed.
11 Pause Scan temporarily halts scanning.
Start Scan restarts a study if Pause Scan is pressed, or cradle motion

12
exceeds 2 mm.
Related topics
3-74 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use the following steps to adjust the light and fan inside the magnet.
Adjust the fan or light controls from the magnet room

Table 3-15: Light and Fan controls. Note that the icon may vary slightly based on your system configuration
Icon Description
Light controls the light within the magnet opening.

There are three settings.
Fan controls the circulation of air within the magnet opening.

There are three settings.
From the magnet room, press the light or fan control. Each time you press the control the light/fan moves up to a
higher level. The level indicator remains illuminated to indicate the level status.
Turn off the magnet fan or light

Press the button until the display next to the button is not illuminated.
Adjust the fan or light controls from the control room

1. Display the Gating Control screen.
a. From the footer area of the screen, click the Gating, Fan Light controls icon .
b. Alternatively, in the header area, click the Tools icon to open the System Management work
area. Click the Gating/Fan/Light tab to open the Gating Control screen.
2. From the Fan Light Control area of the Gating Control screen, click the up/down arrows to adjust the speed of
the fan or intensity of the light inside the magnet.
Figure 3-52: Fan Light Control area of Gating Control screen, with fan on low and light off
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-75

The bar illumination status is defined as follows:

No bars = fan/light off.
One bar = low.
Two bars = medium.
Three bars = high.
Related topics
3-76 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


The patient alert system is comprised of a squeeze ball and a control box. The squeeze bulb is connected to the PAC
unit and the control box is located at the operator console. There are several control box configurations.
Figure 3-53: Patient alert system: squeeze bulb
Figure 3-54: Patient holding alert bulb
Figure 3-55: Patient Alert control box can have multiple configurations
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-77

Procedures
Related topics
PAC
3-78 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use the following steps to set the patient up with the alert bulb.
1. Give the patient the alert bulb. The bulb is a rubber product and not latex.
2. Instruct the patient to loosely hold the alert bulb and to only squeeze the bulb to bring you into the scan room
to consult with the patient and attend to his needs.
Figure 3-56: Patient holding alert bulb
3. If the patient squeezes the rubber ball end of the alert system, a loud sound is heard in the control room. Press
Reset to stop the alarm and reactivate it. Go into the scan room and attend to the patient's needs.
Figure 3-57: Patient Alert control box. Option 1: Steady/Pulse button on left and Reset button on right. Option 2: Reset button.
Adjust the patient alert sound pattern

The sound pattern can be changed to either pulsed or steady. A toggle switch on the control box selects the sound
pattern. The Patient Alert control box is typically located on the operator’s console or mounted on a wall close to the
desk.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-79

Related topics
PAC
3-80 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Table concept
Table concept
The stationary table includes an embedded high-density, posterior RF array. It can be raised and lowered to simplify
moving the patient on and off the table. Although the terms cradle and table are often used synonymously, the cradle
is a part of the table that moves the patient into and out of the magnet.
For details related to table specifications, see Patient Support Information.
Figure 3-58: Patient table
Table 3-16: Table selections
# Selection
1 Head end
The head end of the table has two coil ports and table filer area.
Figure 3-59: Head end of table
Figure 3-60: Head end with table filler in place
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-81

# Selection
2 Table movement pedals

Figure 3-61: Table pedals: 1 = Up motion, 2 = Down motion
Up and down pedals used to raise and lower the table.
IMPORTANT! The patient table of the SIGNA Voyager system is permanently fixed to the
magnet system. Always have a non-ferrous gurney placed outside the magnet room for
emergency patient transportation.
3 Coil ports
Figure 3-62: Head end of table with two (P1 and P2) coil ports.
Figure 3-63: Foot end of table with one port (P4)
3-82 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Table concept
# Selection
4 Foot end
The cradle release and one coil port are at the foot end of the table.
Patient removal using the cradle release handle can be much quicker than the Out button on the
magnet enclosure. Grasp the handle and squeeze the lever to pull the cradle to the end of the
table.
Figure 3-64: Cradle release handle
Use the cradle release handle in the event of power outage to the magnet room or after
pressing the Emergency Stop button.
5 IntelliTouch landmark strip and TDI Posterior array
The landmark strip is located on either side of the table.
The posterior array is a 32 element phased array coil. It is designed to support parallel imaging in
all 3 planes. For coil dimensions, see Coil Configurations.
Figure 3-65: Arrow points to landmark strip and TDI posterior array
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-83

# Selection
1 = TDI Posterior Array.

2 = This line shows the coil area.
3 = IntelliTouch Landmark strip
4 = Landmark limit
Patient security straps

The security straps can be slid into both sides of the table from either the head or foot end.
Security straps across the arms, abdomen, or legs provides safety for the patient and help
control patient motion.
Procedures
Transfer patient on the table
Transfer patient off of table
Related topics
3-84 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Emergency stop and abort scan buttons concept
Emergency stop and abort scan buttons concept

Emergency stop
The Emergency Stop button disables power to the patient handling and scan related equipment when pressed. It does
not shut down the magnetic field.
Figure 3-66: The Emergency Stop button
The Emergency Stop buttons are located on either side of the magnet cover right above the control panels.
Figure 3-67: Location of Emergency stop buttons
Abort scan
The Abort Scan buttons are located on either side of the magnet cover on the magnet control panels. They stop an
active scan.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-85

Figure 3-68: Abort scan on magnet controls
Related topics
In-room monitor
3-86 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


MRU type I reference number is 5196918 or 5196918-2.
Table 3-17: MRU type 1
# Description
1 CHARGER POWER LED
2 BATTERY TEST LED
3 HEATER TEST LED
TEST HEATER LED switch

4 (for use by GE Service
Representative)
5 TEST BATTERY button
6 TEST HEATER switch
7 HEATER ACTUATED LED
WARNING
If the magnet rundown unit test does not perform as described in each step, with the specified LED lighting in
each step, GE strongly recommends that you stop using the system and immediately call your GE Service
Representative.
Procedure
Use these steps to confirm that the MRU is connected to the magnet and operating properly by performing this test on
the MRU every week.
1. Verify that the green CHARGER POWER LED (1) is illuminated.

2. Depress and hold the TEST BATTERY button (5) for 15 seconds.
The green BATTERY TEST LED (2) illuminates and remain lit while the TEST BATTERY switch is depressed.
3. Place the TEST HEATER toggle switch (6) in the A position.
The green HEATER TEST LED (3) illuminates.
Wait at least 5 seconds before toggling the TEST HEATER switch between position A and B. Not doing so may
cause the red HEATER ACTUATED LED (7) to illuminate.
4. Place the TEST HEATER toggle switch (6) in the B position.

The green HEATER TEST LED illuminates and it remains lit until the toggle is released.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-87

WARNING
The magnet will not quench if the red HEATER ACTUATED LED illuminates due to toggling the
TEST HEATER switch. GE strongly recommends that you stop using the system and immediately call your
Qualified Service Representative if this occurs.
Related topics
3-88 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PAC concept
PAC concept
The PAC 1 is located on one side of the patient table and connects the ECG leads, peripheral gating device, respiratory
bellows, and patient alert bulb to the system. Each cable has a unique connector and cannot be accidentally plugged
into the wrong port. Disconnected cables can be stored into drawers in the patient table.
Figure 3-69: The drawers are located on either side of the foot end of the table
Figure 3-70: PAC unit located at the foot end of the table
1Physiological Acquisition Control
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-89

# Description
1 ECG lead
2 Peripheral gating device
3 Respiratory bellows
4 Patient alert bulb
Related topics
3-90 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Information regarding MR phantom content solutions and spill procedure (NiCl2 (nickel chloride), MSDS 8363917) is
shipped with your phantom. In the event of a chemical spill, notify the building security. They will alert the spill team.
In the event of the DAQA phantom breaking and resulting in a nickel chloride spill, keep the following in mind. The
information below is an extract from MSDS 8363917:
Health hazard information

Routes of Entry: Inhalation, ingestion, skin or eye contact.
Target Organs: Skin, paranasal sinus, lungs, gastrointestinal system, kidneys and liver.
Symptoms and Effects of Exposure: Metallic taste in the mouth. Exposure can result in irritation of the mucous
membranes and the respiratory system. Contact with the skin can result in itchy sensations, redness, erythema,
contact dermatitis, eczema, sensitization, or loss of fats and lipids. Contact with the eyes can result in conjunctivitis.
Other symptoms include dizziness, giddiness, delirium, confusion, lassitude, loss of strength, asthma, nausea,
vomiting, headache, fever or hypothermia, anorexia, loss of sense of smell, diarrhea, anuria, liver damage, jaundice
and convulsions.
Animal experiments have resulted in observable birth defects.
Cancers of the lung and nasal sinuses in Nickel workers have been known for more than 50 years to be associated
with nickel refining, nickel plating, and nickel polishing.
First Aid:
If this chemical gets in the eyes, immediately flush the eyes with large amounts of water, occasionally lifting
the lower and upper lids. Get medical attention immediately. Contact lenses should not be worn when working
with this chemical.
If this chemical gets on the skin, immediately wash contaminated skin with soap or mild detergent and water. If
this chemical soaks clothing, immediately remove clothing and wash contaminated skin with soap or mild
detergent and water. Get medical attention promptly.
When this chemical has been swallowed and person is conscious, immediately give the person large quantities
of water or milk. Remove by gastric lavage unless patient is vomiting. Do not make an unconscious person
vomit. Get medical attention immediately.
Spill, leak and disposal procedures

Observe all federal, state and/or local regulations when storing or disposing of this substance. Contact local and/or
state environmental authorities to insure proper compliance.
This substance does not meet the definition of a hazardous waste as defined by the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act (RCRA) (40CFR260).
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-91

System specifications concept

This section provides system specifications for your MR scanner.
For details regarding spatial magnetic field compatibility, see Spatial magnetic field data.
1.5T technical specifications

Table 3-19: Magnet information
Component Specification
Magnet Type Super-Conducting
Static Field Strength 1.5T
Bore Dimension 163 cm x 70 cm x 70 cm
Cryogen Type Liquid Helium
Boil Off Rate Zero under normal operating conditions
Table 3-20: Gradient information
Gradient type Non resonant, actively shielded, rapidly switching
Peak Amplitude 36 mT/m
Slew Rate 150 T/m/s
Rise time to Maximum Amplitude 240 microseconds
Table 3-21: RF information
Transmit RF
Types of RF transmit coils Body Coil, Head Coil, and Extremity Coils
Amplifier peak RMS power 16kW for Body, 2kW for local transmit
Amplifier nominal center frequency 63.86MHz
Maximum transmit bandwidth +/- 0.650 MHz
Receive RF
Minimum/Maximum reception frequency 63.46MHz/64.26MHz
Nominal RF reception center frequency 63.86MHz
Receive Bandwidth +/- 250 kHz
Table 3-22: Patient comfort information
Patient space size 163 cm x 70 cm x 70 cm
3-92 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

1.5T technical specifications
Ventilation In bore patient ventilation system
Communication In bore 2 way intercom system
Lighting Variable intensity LED lighting
Table 3-23: Patient support information
52 cm. (20.5 inches) to 93 cm. (36.6 inches)
Height, cradle surface to floor
continuous
Cradle Length up to coil ports 243.6 cm (scannable range is 182 cm)
Positioning accuracy +/- 0.5 mm (0.020 inches)
Maximum patient load when attached to scanner or
250 kg. (551 lbs.)
when it is used as a transport
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-93

Coil List
This section lists all the coil options. The actual coils will depend on the system configuration that you have opted to
purchase.
Coil Part Number
TDI Posterior Array 5015000
Anterior Array 5015100
TDI Head Neck Array 5015300
1.5T HD SHOULDER ARRAY 5344905
HD FLAT GEM TABLE BREAST ARRAY 5015200
1.5T GEM PVA 5372731
8ch Foot Ankle Coil (Receive Only) 5748366-2
GEM Flex Coil 16-L Array, 1.5T Receive Only 5430000-2
GEM Flex Coil 16-M Array, 1.5T Receive Only 5430000-3
GEM Flex Coil 16-S Array, 1.5T Receive Only 5430000-4
16ch T/R knee coil 5718233
16ch T/R Hand Wrist Coil 5768098-2
16Ch Breast Coil 5848000-5
1.5T Endorectal Coil 5772252-2
1.5T Split Head coil 5182594
3-94 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

TDI coil suite
T D I C OIL SU IT E
TDI introduction
bear the following CE Mark of Conformity. The year of CE marking given is 2016.
Manufacturer
GE Healthcare Coils
1515 Danner Drive
Aurora, Ohio 44202-9273
USA
The TDI Coil Suite is a multi-purpose and receive-only coil designed for use with the SIGNA Voyager. The TDI Coil Suite
is comprised of multiple components:
TDI Head Neck Array comprised of

Posterior component
Anterior component
Adaptor block
TDI Posterior Array
AA (Anterior Array)
GEM PVA
For details, see Coil configurations.

This rigid coil system incorporates soft, flexible components that conform to a patient's anatomy, accommodating
various body contours while minimizing patient discomfort. The Head Neck Array includes the Posterior component,
Anterior component, and an adapter block.
The coil suite also contains a Head Filler section. This filler is used to keep the table surface even with the coil surface,
which is necessary for patient comfort. The Head Filler is used when the Head Neck Array Posterior is not being used
to scan a patient.
The TDI Coil Suite allows multiple scans of patient’s head, neck, brachial-plexus, spine, pelvis, hips, prostate,
abdominal, cardiac, lower extremities, blood vessels, or long bone imaging without repositioning the patient and
changing coils. The TDI coils can support both head first and feet first torso imaging without moving the PA coil.
Indications for use

The TDI Coil Suite is a set of RF surface coils designed for use with a SIGNA Voyager MRI system manufactured by GE.
The TDI Coil Suite is indicated for use for: head, neck, brachial-plexus, spine, pelvis, hips, prostate, abdominal, cardiac,
lower extremities, blood, vessels, or long bone imaging. The nucleus excited is hydrogen.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-95

T D I C OIL SU IT E
Safety concept
This section includes all TDI1 safety cautions and warnings.
This section contains important safety information that you and the physician must understand thoroughly before
using the TDI coil system.
Carefully review chapter 2: MR Safety. In particular, review Tissue heating and Contact point heating.
Patient safety
Patient safety and comfort are the primary concerns during the scanning procedure. Always follow proper safety,
operating and maintenance procedures to ensure that the patient is not exposed to electrical or mechanical hazards
that may cause injuries. Ensure that the patient is comfortably positioned.
Route cables through the center of the magnet bore. Routing cable near the sides of the bore increases the likelihood
of cable heating from induced currents. Place cables under the pads whenever possible.
Keep the length of the cable in the bore to a minimum. When possible, avoid bending the cable 180 degrees. Route
cables out of the bore in the most direct way possible, without looping or coiling.
Ensure the patient is comfortably positioned.
Continuously monitor the patient. If the patient reports heating, burning or tingling sensations, stop the scan
immediately.
All personnel using this coil must be instructed in its proper use. Personnel must observe all warnings and cautions
appearing in this manual.
TDI coil warning messages
WARNING
Patient burn risk. Do not cross or loop coil cables. Do not loop RF receive coil cables and ECG leads.
WARNING
WARNING
1Total Digital Imaging
3-96 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Safety concept
WARNING
followed.
WARNING
RF can cause localized heating at contact points between the patient/bore and patient/RF coil resulting in
discomfort or burns.
WARNING
Closed loops formed by clasped hands or crossed arms, legs or feet may cause burns to the patient. Do not
allow the patient to cross or loop their hands, arms, legs or feet. Use pads as necessary to separate limbs.
WARNING
Always place appropriate non-conductive padding between the surface coil and the patient’s skin to prevent
burn injuries.
WARNING
Pinch Point CAUTION

To avoid injuring the patient or damaging the coil, watch carefully for pinch points as the table moves into the
bore. Stop advancing the table if the patient or any part of the coil comes into contact with the bore.
CAUTION
wall.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-97

Equipment safety
WARNING
The use of thresholding for the building of the 3D model excludes all voxel values outside the selected range
from the 3D model. Before applying the threshold(s), make sure that the selected threshold settings will not
result in removing pathologies or other essential anatomical structures from the 3D model.
WARNING
This coil is not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with oxygen or
nitrous oxide.
WARNING
Patient burns may result from RF coupling of this device with other devices remaining in the magnet. Remove
any other unused coil or unused accessory device from the magnet before using this coil.
WARNING
Route cables through the center of the magnet bore. Place cables under the cushion whenever possible to
separate the cable from the patient. Routing near the sides of the bore increases the likelihood of cable
heating (from induced currents).
CAUTION
cables.
Electrical and mechanical safety
WARNING
Electric shock hazard. This coil consists of electrical and mechanical components. Tampering with the coil by
untrained personnel can be hazardous to the patient and equipment. Only properly trained and qualified
personnel should service the coil.
WARNING
Use only coils, cables and accessories that are in good condition. Before using the coil, visually check each coil
component, cable and accessory to ensure that there is no external damage. If any coil component, cable or
accessory is suspected of not being in good condition, discontinue its use and contact your GE Service
Engineer.
3-98 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Safety concept
WARNING
CAUTION
Always base evaluations on all images in the data set and on the clinical history. Information from only a
single image should not be used to evaluate a patient.
Label locations on the coil suite components

The serial number labels are located on the covers of the coil components. These labels specify date of manufacturer,
part number and revision. These labels also have several symbols that are defined in this manual that will help the
user better understand the specifics of the coil suite components.
Table 3-24: Coil labels
Warning/Caution Description Label

The label shown to
the right can be
found on the coil
cable. It contains
three symbols: sur-
WARNING
face may be hot, do
not loop, and consult
accompanying doc-
uments.
Do not pull or carry

the coil holding the
IMPORTANT: Notice foam part of the
label Head Neck Array
coil.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-99

Warning/Caution Description Label

These labels to the
right are the
symbols located on
the P-connector.
Plug the P-
connector into the
system P2 port. All
CAUTION
numbers except 2 is
crossed out to
determine that the
connector can only
be plugged into P2
port.
Pull up to unlock /
Push down to the
lock the Head Neck
Array Posterior and
Not applicable Anterior
Component/Adaptor
Block (engraved
label provided on
the Latch).
Related topics
TDI introduction
3-100 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

T D I C OIL SU IT E

The TDI Coil Suite is designed to increase throughput and patient comfort by eliminating multiple coil changes per
patient. The coil suite is compatible with a variety of coil mode configurations. The configurations are based on the coil
components connected and the required FOV. The system selects the coil mode configuration that best fits the
selected region of interest.
Table 3-25: Table legend
Dimensions and
Coil Description Picture
Weight
Length: 55 cm
21 channel TDI Width: 35 cm
Head Neck Array Height: 35 cm
Weight: 6.5 Kg
Length: 55.6 cm
Width: 67.4 mm
16 channel AA
Height: 3.3 cm
Weight: 2.8 Kg
Length: 105 cm
Width:
l 2nd station =
Peripheral Vas-
64.2 cm
cular/Lower
l 3rd station =
Extremity Array
51.6 cm
Height: 24.8 cm
Weight: 9.1 kg
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-101

Dimensions and
Coil Description Picture
Weight
32 channel TDI Length: 120.5 cm

Posterior Array
Width: 48.6 cm
embedded in the
patient table Weight: 10.5 Kg
1 = TDI Posterior Array.

2 = This line shows the coil area.
For details on how to select a coil, see Select a Coil procedure.
Related topics
3-102 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

TDI coil workflow
T D I C OIL SU IT E
TDI coil workflow

Use this workflow when scanning with coils from the TDI coil suite.
Considerations
The number of slices per acquisition or for a given TR and the Minimum TR may improve for some PSDs if you
only use the PA and Head Neck Array coils alone rather than connecting them to other coils such as the AA or
PV coils. Therefore, if you are not acquiring images in the abdomen, heart, or lower leg use the Head Neck
Array coil and PA coil.
WARNING
TDI coil classification
It is a Type BF applied part.

It is suitable for continuous operation.
The IP Rating for the coil is IPX0. Ordinary equipment. Not rated against water ingress protection.
It is a non-sterile device.
The equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide.
The voltage rating of the coil is 10VDC maximum.
All surface areas of the coil, except the bottom surface that sits on the patient table, are considered applied parts and
may come into direct contact with the patient. Pads and/or thermal-resistant materials should be used to prevent the
coil surfaces from touching the patient.
Pads and/or thermal-resistant material must be used to ensure the patient cannot touch the coil cable and
connectors.
1. Register the patient and start an exam.

2. Set up the coil components necessary to scan the region of interest and position the patient in the appropriate
orientation and with the necessary coil components for the region(s) of interest.
PA, AA, and PVA component patient position procedure
Two AA components patient position procedure
Ensure that all components on the table are plugged in before scanning.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-103

WARNING
followed.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
cables.
CAUTION
wall.
3. If you are using the AA coil, press the IntelliTouch strip that aligns with the center point of the coil to complete
coil identification.
If you make a mistake defining the coil position, you can reset the coil position to zero in one of two
methods. Both actions set coil port 1 back to orange status on the In-room monitor coil tab. To redefine the
landmark, press the IntelliTouch strip twice in quick succession.
From the In-room monitor coil tab, touch the humanoid icon from the magnet control
touch screen.
Unplug and re-plug the coil in the coil port.
3-104 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

TDI coil workflow
For head-first patient orientation, the AA cable exits at the patient's shoulder. Therefore, place a pad
between the cable and the patient.
Use the system cable guides to prevent the Anterior Array cable from crossing or forming loops with itself
or other cable.
Figure 3-71: System cable guide used to avoid loops
4. Establish a landmark at the center of the region of interest then press Advance to Scan.
5. Select the protocol.

Use the system recommended protocols for scanning with this coil for optimum results and best
performance.
6. Select the localizer scan, prescribe the slice locations, and adjust FOV if necessary.
7. From the scan desktop, click Coil tab to view the Coil selection screen.
There are multiple coil configurations available with the TDI Coil Suite. For details see, TDI coil
configurations. The correct selection for your study depends on the following:
Connected components
Type of examination (multiple exams on the same patient)
Desired FOV
Patient acceptance (when claustrophobia/anxiety prevents using Face component)
Image quality (if the desired image quality is not realized, an alternate configuration may be chosen)
Precise patient positioning and proper FOV yields optimum results. Improper use of the coil is the major
cause of image artifacts.
The list of TDI coil configurations updates when the series is in an INRX state. The list is based on the graphic
prescription.
Coil configurations are dependent upon the coil components that are plugged into the system. If the
configuration you want is not listed, it may be necessary to add or remove coil components before your
configuration is selectable.
8. After performing the localizer, select the next series.

9. Prescribe the graphic scan locations and adjust the FOV and coverage.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-105

For tips on setting the landmark see Landmark troubleshooting.
10. Clean the coil components and comfort pads after each use.
Clean with disinfectant wipes that contain 1% of Sodium Hypochlorite (CAS No 7681-52-9) as the only active
ingredient. Alternatively, use a cloth that has been dampened in a solution of 10% bleach and 90% tap
water, or 30% isopropyl alcohol and 70% tap water.
Should the coil need to be returned to GE for service, wipe it down with a 10% bleach solution (as described
above) to minimize risk of exposure to potentially infectious agents.
Dispose of any materials used to clean the coil and the pads according to all federal, state, and local
regulations.
11. Follow this storage guideline when using the AA coil.

Store the AA component on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner storage device that was shipped with the
coil. The AA component must be stored on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner so that it maintains its
curved shape, reliability, and durability.
Figure 3-72: Anterior Array Coil Positioner
# Description
1 Anterior Array Coil Positioner.
2 AA coil placed on positioner.
WARNING
CAUTION
3-106 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

TDI coil workflow
Considerations
Wide bore GRx considerations
Related topics
TDI introduction
TDI Safety concept
TDI Coil configurations concept
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-107

T D I C OIL SU IT E
PA, Head Neck Array, and AA component patient pos-

ition procedure
Use these steps to position the patient head or feet first with the PA1 , Head Neck Array, and AA2 TDI coil components.
CAUTION
1. Remove the head filler and patient comfort pad based from the head end of the table.
Figure 3-73: Example of table with no head filler
2. Place the Head Neck Array posterior component on the cradle surface.
1Posterior Array
2Anterior Array
3-108 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-74: Head Neck Array posterior component in place
3. Plug the Head Neck Array posterior connector into P2.

Figure 3-75: P2 connector is on the table's right side as you face the magnet cover
Figure 3-76: P connector, all numbers except 2 is crossed out to determine that the connector can only be plugged into P2 port.
5. Place the patient comfort pad in the Head Neck Array posterior component.
6. Position the patient supine in the Head Neck Array posterior component with the shoulders resting against the
coil.
7. Depending on the area of interest, position the appropriate Head Neck Array Anterior component onto the
Head Neck Array posterior using the locators as a guide.
8. Secure the Head Neck Array anterior component to the Head Neck Array posterior component using the
latches that are located on both sides of the Head Neck Array posterior component.
When scanning areas other than the brain, it is not necessary to place the Head Neck Array anterior.
Instead, the AB 1 may be used. The AB also is secured to the Head Neck Array posterior using the latches on
the posterior component.
1Adapter Block
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-109

Figure 3-77: Adapter Block
CAUTION
9. Optional: if you are using the AA coil, position the AA on the patient chest with Head Neck Array overlap as
shown in Figure 3-78.
Figure 3-78: 1 = overlap of AA and Head Neck Array
10. Plug the AA component into P1 or P4 port.
Use the system cable guides to prevent the Anterior Array cable from crossing or forming loops with itself.
3-110 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-79: System cable guide used to avoid loops
11. Press the IntelliTouch strip that aligns with the center point of the AA coil to complete coil identification.
12. Place a pad between any cable and the patient.
13. Place a landmark over the region of interest.
The Head Neck Array has one raised laser mark on the center of the Head Neck Array Anterior component.
The AA has one raised laser mark positioned in the center of the coil. The sections of the PA are indicated on
each edge of the table, which identify the element groups.
14. Proceed to scan. From the Coil Configuration screen, select a Head Neck Array Coil configuration.
Related topics
TDI safety
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-111

T D I C OIL SU IT E

Use these steps to position the patient on the PA TDI coil component.
1. Place the head end filler on the patient table.

Figure 3-80: Table with fillers in place
2. Place patient comfort pads on the coil/table surface.

3. Position the patient either head or feet first on the coil/table.
The sections of the PA are indicated on each edge of the table, which identify the element groups.
Figure 3-81: PA element group identifiers
3-112 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

# Description
1 Box indicates the borders of the TDI Posterior Array
2 PA element group identifiers
5. Proceed to scan. From the Coil Configuration screen, select a PA Coil configuration.
Related topics
TDI safety
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-113

T D I C OIL SU IT E

Use these steps to position the patient feet first with the PA1, AA2, and PVA3 TDI components.
CAUTION
1. Remove the head-end filler and replace it with the PVA leg filler.
The PVA leg filler brings the lower legs into the same horizontal plane as the upper legs or thighs for an
optimum runoff position.
2. Position the patient supine and make sure that the patient's heels are located towards the end of the comfort
pad.
3. Place the PVA over the lower legs. Ensure that the toes extend through the PVA openings.
Figure 3-82: PVA in place
CAUTION
4. Unfold the second station over the upper legs of the patient. Ensure patient comfort by applying pads if
necessary.
5. Tuck the right and left foam coil portions under the patient's legs.
6. Secure the top and bottom foam coil portions to the table with the provided straps. The coil should be snug
against the anatomy to minimize patient motion.
1Posterior Array
2Anterior Array
3Peripheral Vascular Array
3-114 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-83: Second station in place
7. Plug the PVA into P2 port.

8. Place the AA coil component on the patient There are two options for routing and plugging the AA coil. For
details, see Step.10.
Plug the cable into the port that is located in the direction the cable exits the coil.
9. Position the AA component on the patient with the PVA overlap as shown in Figure 3-84 to ensure acceptable
image quality.
Figure 3-84: 1 = PVA and AA overlap and proper AA cable position
10. Plug the AA coil into P1 port or P4 port. There are two options for routing the AA cable.
a. Plug the cable into P4 port (recommended).

Place a pad between the cable and the patient.
Route the cable down the side of the patient toward P4 port shown in Figure 3-85.
Plug the cable into P4 port.
Figure 3-85: Port 4 cable route
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-115

# Description
1 Overlap
2 Pad
3 P4 port
b. Plug the cable into P1 port.

Route the cable as close to the center of the bore as possible.
Ensure that the AA cable is routed over the center housing of the PVA as shown in Figure 3-86
Figure 3-86: Port P1 cable route
# Description
1 Overlap
2 P1 Port
3 The cable must be routed over the center housing of the PVA.
CAUTION
When using the AA with the PVA in a feet-first orientation, be sure to run the AA cable over the center housing
of the PVA, pull it taut, and secure it to the PVA clip to prevent the AA cable from becoming warm.
11. Lock all connector plugs by rotating the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
3-116 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

12. Press the IntelliTouch strip where it aligns with the center of the AA coil to complete coil identification.
The AA has one raised laser mark positioned in the center of the coil. The PVA has three laser marks; one in
the center of PVA, and one in the center of each section.
14. Proceed to scan. From the Coil Configuration screen, select a PA, AA and PVA Coil configuration. For details see
TDI coil configurations.
15. Follow this storage guideline when using the AA coil.
Store the AA component on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner storage device that was shipped with the
coil. The AA component must be stored on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner so that it maintains its
curved shape, reliability, and durability.
# Description
Related topics
TDI safety
TDI coil workflow
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-117

T D I C OIL SU IT E

Use these steps to position the patient head or feet first with the PA1 and AA2 TDI coil components.
Considerations
CAUTION
Rules for setting two AA coils
Incorrect Two AA coil crossover as shown in Figure 3-89.

Figure 3-89: Two AA crossover not allowed
The cables of the AA coils cannot be plugged into the same side of the coil port as shown in Figure 3-90.
Figure 3-90: Incorrect cables plugged into ports at the same end of the table
Plug the cable into the port that is located in the direction the cable exits the coil, as shown in Figure 3-91.
1Posterior Array
2Anterior Array
3-118 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-91: Cables plugged into correct ports
Two AA coils can be set with the overlap as shown Figure 3-93. If not, the two AA coils may not work properly.
The order to align the center of each AA coil must be the same order that the coils are connected into the coil
port. The IRD (In-Room-Display) shows which of the AA coils is aligned at the center of the coil.
Procedure
1. Place the fillers, pads and patient as described in PA TDI patient position.
2. Position the AA component on the patient.
a. Carefully place the AA on top of the patient centered over the area of interest.
b. Position the AA so that it is centered on the patient and sits comfortably and securely on the patient.
c. Position the arms of the patient to the sides of the body or up over the head. If the arms are placed above
the head, do not allow the patient to cross arms or interweave fingers.
d. Place a pad between any cable and the patient.
3. Use the straps that are located on both sides of the PA to secure the AA to the table top. The AA should be snug
against the patient, but ensure that there is no patient discomfort.
4. Plug the cable into the port (P1, P2 or P4) that is located in the direction the cable exits the coil.
Note that port 3 cannot be used for the AA coils.
Figure 3-92: P connector, 1 = unlock, 2 = lock
6. Press the IntelliTouch strip where it aligns with the center of the coil to complete coil identification.
7. Position another AA component on the patient overlapped as shown in Figure 3-93.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-119

Figure 3-93: Overlap of the two AA coils
8. Repeat the plug in, coil lock and IntelliTouch strip instructions for the second AA coil.
Alternatively, you can plug in and lock both coils and then define the reference point by pressing the
IntelliTouch strip in the order in which you plugged in the coils. View the IROC instructions for instructions as
you plug in the coils.
CAUTION
WARNING

10. Proceed to scan. From the Coil Configuration screen, select PA and AA Coil configuration.
Follow this storage guideline when using the AA coil.

Store the AA component on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner storage device that was shipped with the coil. The
AA component must be stored on top of the Anterior Array Coil Positioner so that it maintains its curved shape,
reliability, and durability.
3-120 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

# Description
Related topics
TDI safety
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-121

T D I C OIL SU IT E

Use these steps when using the TDI coil for whole body imaging.
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
1. Remove the head filler and the patient comfort pad.

Figure 3-95: Table with head filler removed
2. Place the Head Neck Array posterior component at the head end of the patient table.
3-122 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-96: Head Neck Array posterior component in place
3. Place the patient comfort pad in the Head Neck Array posterior component, and place the PA comfort pads on
the table.
Position the patient supine in the Head Neck Array posterior component with the shoulders resting against
the coil.
4. Place the Head Neck Array anterior component on the Head Neck Array posterior component.
CAUTION
Do not pick up or carry the Head Component by the mirror attachment. To avoid damaging the coil, pick up
and carry the Head Component using two hands on the bottom of the coil.
CAUTION
5. Secure the Head Neck Array anterior component to the Head Neck Array posterior component using the
latches that are located on both sides of the Head Neck Array posterior.
6. Plug the Head Neck Array posterior connector into P2 port
Figure 3-97: P2 connector is on the table's right side as you face the magnet cover
7. Position the AA on the patient chest with Head Neck Array overlap as shown in Figure 3-98.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-123

Figure 3-98: 1 = overlap of AA and Head Neck Array
8. Plug the AA components into P1 or P4 ports.

9. Lock the connector plug: rotate the spindle handle until the Lock symbol is visible.
10. Secure the AA to the patient table with straps. Adjust the straps until the coil is snug against the patient.
11. Press IntelliTouch strop where it aligns with the center of the first connected AA coil to complete coil
identification.
12. Repeat the plug in, coil lock and IntelliTouch strip (where it aligns with the center of the coil) instructions for the
second connected coil. See overlapped coils as shown in Figure 3-100
Figure 3-100: Overlap of the two AA coils
3-124 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Alternatively, you can plug in and lock both coils and then define the reference point by pressing the
IntelliTouch strip in the order in which you plugged in the coils. View the IROC instructions for instructions as you
plug in the coils.

The Head Neck Array has one raised laser mark on the center of the Head Neck Array Anterior component.
When using the AA, always landmark to the center of the coil.
14. Proceed to scan. From the Coil Configuration screen, select a whole body coil configuration.
Related topics
TDI safety
TDI workflow
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-125

SY ST E M M A NA G E M E NT
System Management introduction

The System Management work area allows you to access the Service Desktop Manager, Error Log, Gating Control
screen, iLINQ, System Preferences, e-Report, and the Protocol Management tab. You can perform planned
maintenance and software performance tests, save raw data, change the system date and time, reorganize protocols,
or connect to TiP Virtual Assist from these areas.
Procedures
Open system management work area procedure
Open the Service Desktop Manager procedure
e-report procedure
Error log view message procedure
Legacy image converter procedure
Planned Maintenance procedures
Raw data save procedure
Remote software download procedure
Secure Service Access procedure
Service Notepad write a message procedure
TiP Virtual Assist activation procedure
3-126 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Open System Management work area procedure
Open System Management work area procedure

Open the System Management work area access the Service Desktop Manager, Error Log, Gating Control screen,
iLINQ, System Preferences, and the Protocol Management tab. You can perform planned maintenance and software
performance tests, save raw data, change the system date and time, reorganize protocols, or connect to TiP Virtual
Assist from these areas.
From the header area of the screen, click the Tools icon to open System Management work area.
Related topics
Session orientation
System Management orientation
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-127

Open the Service Desktop Manager procedure

Use these steps to open a Service Desktop Manager Session to access the Guided Install and Utilities programs.
2. In the System Management work area, click the Service Desktop Manager tab to view the Service Desktop
Manager screen.
Related topics
Session orientation
3-128 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Error log view messages procedure
Error log view messages procedure

Use these steps to view error log messages or to view the time an error message occurred.
View system messages
2. Click the Error Log tab on the left side of the screen.
3. On the Error log screen, click View Log.
4. Click Select Viewing level and choose a viewing level.
5. Click OK.
6. Use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to navigate through the error log.
Considerations
Additional messages are displayed at the following locations:
View the Message area to the right of the Patient List.

From the scan work area, view the Message area on the Scan Parameters screen.
Related topics
System management introduction
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-129

e-Report procedure
Use these steps to view, print to pdf, or export a report.
1. From the footer area of the screen, click e-Report icon.
An "i" next to the icon indicates an unread report .

2. From the View Service Reports screen, click the desired Unread report option box, and click View.
The report opens.
The report is moved to the Reports list.
Click View Reports to go back to the View Service Reports list, to view unread and read reports.
3. To print the report to pdf format, click Print.
4. To export the report, place a USB device in the computer USB drive or a CD in the CD/DVD drive, from the View
Service Reports screen, select the desired report(s) and click Export.
5. From the Media pop-up window, select CD, DVD, or USB. Click OK to start the export.
6. Click Close to exit the application.
Related topics
3-130 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Legacy Image Converter procedure
Legacy Image Converter procedure

Use these steps to convert images on your MR system so that they can be displayed on a pre-11.0 MR system.
1. In the header area, click the Tools icon arrow.

2. Click Command Window... to open a command window.
3. Type LIC and press Enter.
4. From the Legacy Image Converter screen, select the exam and series for processing. The following image
types are not supported and cannot be converted:
TRICKS, FIESTA-C, VIBRANT, MR-Echo, PROPELLER
Raw data images (embedded Pfiles)
Legacy format images (these images are already in the correct format)
Foreign images (non-GE images)
GSPS objects
SR objects
5. Click Start to begin image processing.
While images are being processed, you can click Cancel to stop the active conversion.
Once processing starts, a new exam with the same exam number is added to the Browser. As images are
converted they will appear in the image browser under the newly created exam. (See Identifying Converted
Images below for discriminating between the original and the legacy format exams.)
6. Only one exam may be selected at a time and within this exam it will only process the selected series (more
than one series can be entered). Therefore, to process more exams, return to step 4.
7. When processing has completed the Cancel button will be disabled and the Start and Close button will become
available.
8. Review the message area for errors, then press the Close button on the LIC user interface. The LIC user
interface screen will disappear.
The new exam is created using the same exam, series, and image numbering as the original. Legacy
images can be identified by the annotation "Signa 1.5T SYS" rather than your system (for example: "Optima
MR450 1.5T") when displayed in the viewer.
After networking the images to a pre-11.0 Lx scanner (e.g. 9.x, 10.x), the legacy format images can be
identified by type "Advt" rather than "DICO" in the image browser.
9. The converted images can be used with legacy system applications such as CV flow analysis on AW3.1. Once
networked to either a Lx scanner (pre-11.0 versions) or an AW 3.1 or 4.0 workstation, the converted images
can be further sent to Genesis (5.x) systems. (The unconverted 11.x-format images cannot be sent to a Genesis
systems.)
Messages and error conditions
Successful Conversion
The following message is logged in the message box when conversion has completed successfully for each series
being processed:
"Series #: Passed: Processed xxx Images"
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-131

Unsuccessful Conversion
If processing is attempted on a series containing unsupported image types, one of the following messages is
displayed and no images are converted for that series.
"Series #: Failed: Fiesta-c, Tricks, Vibrant etc series not Supported."
"Series #: Failed: fMRI Series Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Post Processed Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Raw data Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Monarch Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Filtered (non-SCIC) Images Cannot be converted."
"Series #: Failed: Legacy Images Cannot be converted."
Other Error Conditions

If multiple exams are selected from the Patient List and you click Start, the following error is displayed:
"Multiple Exams Not Supported"
Select a single exam, then select the series within the selected exam for processing. If multiple exams need to be
converted, you must convert one exam at a time.
If you click Start a second time without changing the selection in the Patient List, the following message is displayed
(no image processing will occur):
"Exam #: Failed: Already Converted/Rejected"
This prevents accidental generation of multiple copies of the same image set. It is possible to close the LIC application
and restart it to create a duplicate set of converted images.
Related topics
3-132 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use this information to help you respond to PM Assist messages that display periodically on your system.
PM Date message
The PM Date message, "This system should have Planned Maintenance performed before <date>", where <date> is
the last day of the current month, displays when the response has been a Yes to the PM Due message. The prompt is
posted to the Operator Attention area at the start of each new patient prescription. The message appears once and is
overwritten by any other message being posted in the area. No acknowledgment is required.
Follow these steps for the PM Overdue and PM failure message displays.
1. For the PM Overdue, the message displays if the Planned Maintenance interval has been too long.
a. Type your initials in the text box.
b. Type the date in the text boxes.
Once a response is made, the system startup is completed with no further waiting.
2. For the PM Failure message displays when there are certain failures that have not been resolved within 21
days of the last PM. The message appears during system startup and in the Operator Attention area at the
start of each new patient prescription. The message appears once and is overwritten by any other message
being posted in the area.
a. Type your initials in the text box.
b. Click OK.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-133

Raw data save procedure

Use these steps to save Raw data immediately after a scan has completed. Because the raw data resides in the
temporary memory of the system, you must save the raw data before starting the next series. Please be patient
during the raw data transfer.
4. From the MR Service Desktop screen, click Utilities tab.
5. Select Raw File Manager from the list of procedures.
6. Click Click here to start this tool.
7. Select the data from the TPS area.
8. Click TPS to Disk.
The raw data is saved on the system hard disk until it is removed.
Raw data uses disk space, and, as the disk becomes full, system performance can be degraded.
9. Click File > Exit.
Related topics
3-134 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Remote service configuration procedure
Remote service configuration procedure

This feature may not be for sale in all markets due to approval or clearance by in-country regulatory agencies.
Remote Service Enables system connectivity to GE Healthcare's back office. A valid GE System ID and an internet
connection to the system is needed in order to establish this connectivity.
Use these steps to configure InSite Remote service on your system,
3. Click Service Browser .
4. From the Service browser, click the Configuration tab.
5. From the left pane, select Configure Insite.
6. Click Click here to start this tooll.
The Agent Configuration screen displays.

Figure 3-101: Agent Configuration screen
a. Read the caution displayed under Agent Configuration.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-135

CAUTION
Disabling connectivity disconnects the system from the GE Healthcare Back Office. This will make the system
unreachable for remote service or AutoSC sweeps.
If connectivity is disabled, it can be enabled again by clicking the Enable Connectivity Button.
b. Ensure that the CRM number displayed is exactly the same as the System ID that belongs to your system. If
this is not configured correctly, then update the correct system ID in the Service ID & System ID fields under
the System Configure tab in Guided Install.
Guided Install modifications in relation to System ID and Networking information updates are only
allowed in the root login environment
7. If internet connectivity to the system is established via proxy, then enable Proxy setting and provide Proxy
credentials.
8. If internet connectivity to the system is established via DNS, then configure the DNS Option in Guided Install
under the Networking tab.
Guided Install modifications in relation to System ID and Networking information updates are only allowed
in the root login environment
9. Click Submit once all the information has been entered. It could take up to 5 minutes for connectivity to be
established. The refresh button can be used to check the correct status.
10. Observe the following, which indicates connectivity is successfully established:
Agent Running is Yes.
Registered is Yes.
CRM Verified is Yes.
11. If entitled, GE Remote Service involves analysis of system performance data and downloading software
updates. This data can be sent back and forth from the system through one of the following methods. Note that
data collected through these methods are used only to enhance product/service quality.
Proactive Diagnostics (ProDiags): Automatic push of system hardware parametric data at regular intervals
Sweeps: Automated scripts that login from the GE back office to pull only system configuration and
performance data
Software Download: Used to download software updates in the form of service packs to the system
12. Click an item in the Feature List window to enable or disable the remote features.
13. Contact GE service if you have a problem configuring InSite.
14. Click Disable Connectivity if you want to stop remote service connection.
15. Click X to exit the Configure InSite screen.
Related topics
3-136 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Remote software update may not be for sale in all markets due to approval or clearance by in-country regulatory
agencies.
There are three modes in which the remote software can be installed. These modes are configured by an authorized
user in root login.
EA3 by an authorized user

Auto
Any User
Procedure
Use these steps to accept and install software service packs.
1. To perform a remote software download follow these steps.

a. From the logon screen, click root login to logon as a Unix Root User.
b. Enter your password and click Login.

The default password is operator until you updated your local users roles.
The remote software update automatically launches after logon.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-137

Figure 3-103: Password screen
c. If the remote software does not automatically launch, place the cursor in the screen background and right-
click to view the Root menu.
Figure 3-104: Root menu
d. From the Root menu, click Remote Software Update to display the Remote Software Update screen.
e. From the Remote Software Update screen, click Preferences.
Figure 3-105: Remote Software Update screen
3-138 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

f. Select an option from the Preferences menu and click Save & Close.
Install updates automatically on restart.
Allow all users to install updates
Only allow authorized users to install updates (controlled through EA3 access).
Figure 3-106: Preferences screen
2. If you are a EA3 user, follow these steps.

A software download can only be installed or declined by an authorized user.
a. If you are an unauthorized user, the following screen appears at logon to inform you that a download is
available.
Figure 3-107: Unauthorized EA3 user install screen
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-139

You can click Switch User and the HIPAA screen appears.
You can click Continue to Scanner and the Logon screen appears.
b. If you are an authorized user, the following screen appears.

Figure 3-108: Authorized EA3 user install screen
You can click Install Now to start the software download.

You can click Later to install the software at a later date and then proceed to logon.
3. If your site has Auto Install, the following screen appears.
3-140 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-109: Auto Install screen
The counter will count down to 30 seconds and then automatically install the service pack.
The system does not check for any authorization.
a. If you do not want the installation to occur, click Later.
4. If your system is configured for all users to authorized a software download, the following screen appears.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-141

Figure 3-110: All users install screen
The system does not check for any authorization.
5. Once you have accepted an Install Now, the following screen appears.
Figure 3-111: Continue to install screen
3-142 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

a. Click the Acknowledge box.

b. Click Continue to Install.
The following screen appears while the installation occurs.
Figure 3-112: Installation screen
6. When the installation is completed, the following screen appears. Make one of the following selections.
Figure 3-113: Installation complete screen
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-143

a. Click Log Out to log out the currently logged in data privacy user and continue to boot the system.
b. Click Start Scanner and Perform DAQA Scan to proceed to scan once a DAQA scan is completed.
Considerations
Later
In all modes, if you click Later, a prompt for install during next startup of MR scanner, appears. Click Continue to
Scanner to proceed to logon.
Figure 3-114: Later screen prompt
Decline Updates
Figure 3-115: Decline Updates selection
In all modes, if you select Decline updates, the following screen appears, from which you must enter text in all fields
and click the Acknowledgment box:
3-144 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

First Name
Last Name
Role
Reason for declining
Acknowledgment box
Figure 3-116: Decline updates screen
Once the text fields are completed, click Decline Update and the following prompt appears.
Figure 3-117: Decline updates confirmation prompt screen
Click Ok to proceed to logon.
Service Pack icons

Once the MR system is up and operational, if a software download is available, an icon appears in the footer area of
the screen.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-145

Figure 3-118: Software download available icon
The icon changes based on conditions described in the table below.

Table 3-31: Service Pack icons
Icon Description
This icon displays when a new service pack is available and the MR system is up
and operational. Click the icon to see an information screen about the service pack.
Click Close to close the information screen.
This icon displays when a service pack has been successfully installed. The icon
automatically turns off 20 seconds after it is displayed.
This icon displays when a service pack has failed to install. The icon automatically
turns off 20 seconds after it is displayed.
This icon displays when the MR system is connected to Backoffice. The frequency
at which the system checks Backoffice for software updates is every 5 days.
Related topics
3-146 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Secure Service Access is a soft service license key that enables various levels of service software tools packages. If
you have a SSA1 license, you are required to renew the soft service license yearly.
Considerations
Depending on your Soft service license contract, your key may expire in 1 year from first date used. Please
refer to service license page for expiration dates.
For additional information on your SSA license, contact your local sales/service representative.
To find how to order a new license and more details regarding the new Secure Service Access customer
website link, please refer to your “Service Licensing” section in the Service Documentation.
Use these steps to access the SSA screen.
2. From the Tools menu, click Install Service Licenses.
Alternatively, from the Service Desktop Manager screen. click Service Browser. From the MR Service
Desktop Insite Browser, click Insite Service License.
3. The Service License screen displays.
1Secure Service Access
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-147

Figure 3-119: Example of a Service License screen. Your screen will vary based on the licenses on your system.
# Description
Service License Expiration area displays the Service License name and its expiration date.
1 l Click Refresh to update the list.
l Click a license from the list and click Remove to remove a service license.
2 Your service license ID that is required to order new licenses.
3 Use a CD, DVD or USB drive to install a new Service License file (used by service representative).
Click View Log to view the date, License name and its status.
4
Click Eject USB Key (used by service representative) to remove the USB service key.
4. Click the X in the upper right corner to close the screen.
For more information about your licenses, contact your GE sales/service representative.
Related topics
System Management introduction
3-148 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use these steps to write a message that will be posted on the Error Log.
2. Click the Error Log tab.
3. Click View Current Messages.
4. On the Scan Error Log screen, click Notepad.
5. Verify that the Number Lock keypad is off.
6. In the Service Notepad text box, type a message.
7. Click Save to save the message to the error log and close the window.
Clear erases the message and allows you to write a new message.
Exit closes the Service Notepad screen without posting your message on the Scan Error Log.
Related topics
Error log message procedure
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-149

TiP Virtual Assist activation procedure

Use these steps to activate TVA for receiving live-on-demand support to troubleshoot system performance.
2. Click the iLinq tab.
Alternatively, click iLinq icon located in the footer area of the screen.
3. Click TiP Virtual Assist.
4. Click Accept to view the Remote training screen and connect the console to TVA.
The buttons displayed depend on the current status of the training session.
Click Close to close the screen without connecting to TVA.
Related topics
3-150 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Guided Install

This section describes the guided install topics available on MR system platforms.
Guided install procedures

Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code procedure
Configure MR with the HIS/RIS system procedure
SPR Snap procedure
Set default protocol library procedure
Protocol lockout procedure
Patient anonymize settings procedure
Admin password procedure
System date and time procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-151


Use these steps to map a protocol to a particular HIS/RIS code.
3. From the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install.
4. From the list of applications, click Protocol Manager.
5. Click Start.
6. From the left panel, click Auto Mapping Configure.
7. From the Scanner Protocol area, navigate to the protocol location in which you want the auto map associated.
Figure 3-120: Scanner Protocol area
8. From the Scanner Protocol - RIS Protocol code Mapping area, enter the Action Code and Coding Scheme
Designator for the selected scanner protocol.
Figure 3-121: RIS Protocol code Mapping area
9. Click Configure.
Each time a worklist item comes in with the same Action Code and Coding Scheme Designator, the exam is
launched with the protocol selected form the Auto Mapping Configure screen.
3-152 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Figure 3-122: RIS Protocol Code area
10. From the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
11. Click Yes.
Related topics
Protocol orientation
Set default protocol library
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-153

Configure MR with the HIS/RIS system procedure

The ConnectPro MR application allows you to download a modality worklist to your MR system. The MR system must
be configured to obtain data from the HIS/RIS system and to map protocols to action items. The actual configuration
must be done by a service engineer with the assistance of the facility’s Information Technology department. Through
the HIS/RIS and SCP tabs on the Guided Install panel, the server and port setup and the SCP (charge codes used by the
scanning facility when billing insurance) can be established.
1. Navigate to the Service Desktop Manager.

3. From the list of applications, click HIS/RIS DICOM.
4. Click Start.
5. Select SCPConfigure or PPS Configure from the left side of the Guided Install window to check if the system is
configured with HIS/RIS.
If it is not configured, notify your service engineer or work with your site IT team to configure your MR
system with your HIS/RIS system.
6. Select any of the other options from the left side of the Guided Install window and make adjustments as
needed.
7. When all work is completed on the Guided Install screen, click Configureand respond to any prompts.
8. To exit Guided Install, from the Guided Install menu bar, click File > Quit.
9. Click Yes.
10. Reboot the system to activate your changes.
Related topics
Worklist Manager orientation
3-154 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

SPR snap procedure
SPR snap procedure

Use these steps to acquire an SPR1 snap for the following scenarios:
Anytime there is a system hang, lock or crash. A crash can be defined as anytime the system as a whole or
any part of the system quits functioning completely. When in doubt, run an SPR Snap regardless. It takes only
minutes and you don’t have to stop any other function to do so.
Anytime a problem forces you to reset the TPS or re-boot the computer.
Run the SPR Snap, if possible, before resetting or re-booting the system. If this is not possible (for example, if
the screen/mouse freezes), run the SPR Snap immediately after the re-boot.
An SPR Snap is a script that is run on the scanner that captures a file with the following:
all of the most recent error messages

the most recent protocol run
log files that may indicate where a problem occurred
your description of what went wrong
This file can then be viewed for analysis by the engineering group.
2. Click Service Desktop Manager tab.
3. On the Service Desktop Manager, click Guided Install if it is not already selected.
4. From the list of applications in the Service Desktop Manager, click Spr Snap.
5. Click Start.
6. From the SPR snap screen, complete the following fields.
a. From the left panel, click sprsnap.
b. Select Yes or No to the question "Store SPR Information onto DVD?" .
If you respond with a Yes, insert a DVD into the DVD drive.
c. Select Yes or No to the question "Remove SPR directory when done?". This option is only available if you
selected Yes to the "Store SPR Information onto DVD?" question.
Typically select No so that, if needed, your service engineer can view the SPR directory.
d. Select how far back you want to retrieve the system log files.
Number of retrieve days are: 2, 7, 15 and 30.
An SPR snap can sometimes take as long as 15-20 minutes. Generating traces for the core files is one of
the most time consuming parts of an SPR snap. Selecting a shorter retrieval day value can significantly
reduce the SPR snap time, particularly if it has been a long time since a software load from cold was
performed.
e. Type and enter a brief description of the problem in the problem text field.
1Software Problem Report
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-155

7. Click SPR SNAP.

A busy cursor appears while the snap is in progress.
8. Click OK to the message prompt. Record the SPR snap location, if desired.
9. From the left panel, click Log file and scroll to the bottom of the list to view the SPR snap, if desired.
11. Click Yes.
Related topics
3-156 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use these steps to set the default protocol library, humanoid and to automatically have a set of filters applied by
anatomical area.
5. Click Start.
6. From the left panel, click Default Configuration.
7. From the Default Configuration screen and from the Library menu, typically select your site library.
8. Click one of the options for Humanoid: Adult or Pediatric.
9. If desired, select an Anatomy area from the menu and then click the desired filters that you want to
automatically be applied to that anatomical area. Repeat this action for each anatomical area.
10. Click Configure.
12. Click Yes.
Related topics
Map a protocol to HIS/RIS code
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-157

Protocol Lockout procedure

Use these steps to enable Protocol Lockout to protect protocols from being changed by unauthorized users.
2. Click Service Desktop Manager tab.
5. Click Start.
6. Click Password Configure to open the Password Configure screen.
7. In the Lock Required menu, select Yes.
8. Enter a password that is between 4 and 8 characters.
9. Confirm the password.
10. Click Configure.
11. Click OK to the confirmation prompt.
12. From the Lock Protocol menu bar, select File > Quit.
13. Click Yes to the confirmation prompt.
To turn off Protocol Lock, complete steps 1 to 6, and then in the Required menu, select No.
Reset the password

Use these steps if you want to reset the password to the default (adw2.02.0) or enter a new password.
1. From the the Password Configure screen click Reset Password.

2. Click OK to the message prompt.
3. If desired, enter a new password.
5. Click Configure.
Related topics
3-158 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Reset the password procedure
Reset the password procedure

Use these steps if you want to reset the password to the default (adw2.02.0) or enter a new password.
1. From the the Password Configure screen click Reset Password.

2. Click OK to the message prompt.
3. If desired, enter a new password.
5. Click Configure.
Related topics
Protocol introduction
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-159

Patient anonymize settings procedure

Use these steps to change the level of anonymizing patient information.

2. Click Guided Install.
3. From the Guided Install list, click Anonymization Settings.
4. Click Start.
5. In the left portion of the Guided Install screen, click Patient Anonymization Settings.
6. Select Partial or Full from the menu.
7. Click Configure.
The Configure button only becomes available when you change the Anonymize setting from the selection
that is displayed when you first entered the window.
The anonymization setting displayed in the menu is activated once you click Configure.
8. Click OK.
You do not have to reboot to activate the new anonymization mode.
9. From the Guided Install screen menu bar, click File > Quit.
10. Click Yes.
Related topics
Patient de-identification procedure
Tools orientation
3-160 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


Use these steps to change or reset the Administrator password for system preferences.
1. Click Tools icon to display the System Management work area.

4. From the list of applications, click System Preferences.
5. Click Start.
6. On the System Preferences Password screen, click System Preferences.
7. In the System Preferences Selection area, select Enable password protection Yes.
8. In the System Preferences Selection area, type a password in the New system Preferences Password text
field.
9. Retype the password in the confirmation text field.
10. Click Save the new password and respond to the confirmation prompt.
If no password is defined, adw2.02.0 is the administrative password.
If you answered No in step 7, click Configure to disable the password protection.
12. Click Yes.
13. Reboot the system to activate your changes.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-161

System date and time procedure

Use these steps to change the date or time that is displayed in the footer area of your MR system.
Considerations
If the scanner time drifts out of synchronization with the actual time, it is probable that the Network Time
Protocol server was not configured to synchronize time with the MR scanner. Please consult with your service
engineer to properly configure the Network Time Protocol server.
If your MR system is configured with Network Time Protocol server, any date or time setting done in Guided
Install will be overridden with the time supplied by the Network Time Protocol server.
Procedure
1. Restart your MR system.
2. From the Logon screen, click root login.
This action logs you on as a Root User.
3. Enter the following information.
3-162 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

System date and time procedure
Figure 3-124: Root Username screen
a. In the Username field, type root .

b. Click Next.
Figure 3-125: Password screen
c. In the Password field, type operator.

If the password was changed, consult with your system administrator for the correct password.
d. Click Sign In.
4. From the Guided Install Starter screen, click Yes to launch Guided Install.
Figure 3-126: Guided Install Starter screen
5. From the Basic Configuration section on the Guided Install screen, click Set Time Date.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 3-163

Figure 3-127: Guided Install screen
6. From the Set Time/Date screen complete these steps.
a. Select the desired geographic area and/or time zone and click Set Time Zone.
b. From the Date/Time/Zone area, select an option from the menus or click Current Date/Time/Zone.
Use the arrow buttons to change the values.
c. Respond to any confirmation prompts.
d. Click Configure.
8. Restart your MR system.
Related topics
3-164 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Chapter 4: Patient handling
Chapter 4: Patient handling

Patient preparation depends on a range of factors including the type of study, the RF coil being used, and the patient’s
condition. Regardless of the type of examination, patient comfort and safety are of primary importance.
Procedures
Cardiac patient setup

Setup the coil procedure
ECG gated exam procedure
Peripheral gated exam procedure
Patient padding
Padding introduction
Surface coil padding considerations
Whole body padding considerations
Other procedures
Screen patients and personnel procedure
Patient transfer procedure
Protect patient's eyes and ears procedure
Patient landmark procedure
Patient return to landmark procedure
Transfer patient off the table procedure
Patient emergencies procedures
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-1

PR OCEDU R ES

For your safety and the safety of the patient, an MR safety-trained health care worker at your facility should carefully
screen for hazards before patients and personnel enter the Exclusion Zone. All personnel must be aware of and
comply with your facility’s screening procedure.
WARNING
1. Use a Patient Screening form routinely before bringing patients or other personnel into the Exclusion Zone.
Thoroughly review all safety information and considerations before starting a scan with patients that have
an MR Conditional implant. In general, patients with conductive (e.g. metallic) implants are contraindicated
for MR scans. For patients with implants that are labeled as MR Safe or MR Conditional consult the implant
device manufacturer's documentation.
Every patient, individual, and employee must be carefully screened prior to admission to the magnetic field.
Refer to the Screening form topic.
2. Review the completed screening form and evaluate the individual prior to entry.
Identify circumstances that contraindicate admission to the Exclusion Zone or items that need to be
removed before entering the Security Zone.
In addition to safety issues, metal objects or materials containing metal may distort the magnetic field and
detract from the image quality.
3. Discuss the items on the screening form with the patient or other individual.
Verbally interview the patient to verify the information on the form and ensure the patient understands
each question he/she is answering.
Allow discussion of any question or concern that the patient may have.
4. Examine all patients with diapers or incontinence products, including adults, should have dry diapers on prior
to the start of the scan.
5. Examine or X-Ray patients who are at risk for metal eye slivers.
Serious injury may occur as a result of movement or heating of the metallic foreign body as it is attracted
by the magnetic field of the MR system.
Follow your departmental clinical screening policy.
6. Require that patients change clothes.
Provide clothes without metallic fasteners and pockets.

Patients should not wear shoes into the magnet room as they may have collected metal on the soles.
7. Instruct the patient to wash off non-permanent make-up.
Follow the precautions for patients with permanent make-up such as permanent eyeliner, which can cause
tissue heating.
8. Keep metal out of the bore.*
4-2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

A metal-free bore prevents burns and image artifacts.
Related topics
High risk patient
Clinical screening
Patient emergencies
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-3

PR OCEDU R E
Patient transfer procedure

The table is designed to accommodate the transfer of ambulatory, wheelchair, and gurney patients. For table weight
specification details, see Table.
Note that the MR magnet is always on even when the system is not acquiring scan data. The only exception
to this is if service has ramped down the magnet or it has been quenched.
1. Make sure the patient has completed the screening sheet and has removed all metal items.
2. Bring the patient to the table either in a non-ferrous wheelchair or non-ferrous gurney, or escort the
ambulatory patient into the scan room.
WARNING
Do not bring conventional life-support equipment into the magnet room, because it may contain metal parts
and may malfunction or cause patient injury or equipment damage.
3. If the patient is using a wheelchair or gurney, lock the wheels.

4. If using a coil, place it on the table. For details see the Connecting Coils procedure.
5. Press the Up and Down foot pedals at the magnet end of the table to adjust the table height.
6. Transfer the patient onto the table.
7. Help the patient with any medical accessories he or she may have.
8. Raise the table to scanning height.
9. Remove any wheelchairs or gurneys from the scan room.
Related topics
Patient preparation orientation
4-4 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PR OCEDU R E

Thoroughly review all patient preparation and screening information in the MR Safety Guide, 2381696, prior to
scanning a patient or allowing anyone into the MR scan room.
1. Position the patient on the table, either head or feet first.

Typically, use head or feet first for body scans and head first for head and neck.
For table weight specification details, see the following System specifications.
All MR healthcare providers that work with the patient must be trained to reduce the risk of patient
muskuloskeletal injury such as fracture, dislocation or subluxation during the transfer of the patient on/off
the table, positioning the patient on the table, positioning coils on the patient, etc.
2. Position the patient either supine, prone, left decubitus, or right decubitus.
From the Scan control panel, match the patient's position and orientation with the selection made on the
Patient Orientation button. Click the arrows to change the patient orientation icon.
Ensure that the patient forms no closed body loops. For details, see step 4.
WARNING
Ensure that the Patient Position selection matches the actual patient orientation. Making a selection that does
not match the patient’s actual position results in incorrectly annotated and/or rotated images, possibly
resulting in improper medical treatment.
Table 4-1: Patient Orientation menu
Selection Description
Head first, supine orientation.
Head first, right decubitus orientation.
Head first, left decubitus orientation.
Head first, prone orientation.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-5

Selection Description
Feet first, supine orientation.
Feet first, right decubitus orientation.
Feet first, left decubitus orientation.
Feet first, prone orientation.
3. Position the imaging coil, if needed.

Each coil, other than the body coil, has an operator manual. Refer to the coil operator manual when setting
up the patient for an exam.
Use the supplied coil pads with the coil at all times. The coil should never come into contact with the patient.
Never let the coil’s RF1 cables come into contact with the patient. Position cables under a cushion whenever
possible.
Use only approved, undamaged RF coils.
Inspect coils for damage and wear. Do not use a coil that is not functioning properly, e.g., tuning problems
or intermittent poor quality images.
When using the Head Neck Array coil, it is recommended to first place the base of the coil on the table then
position the coil on the patient. Storing the coil on the table or the bore entry is not advised.
Consider using a multi-coil configuration.
WARNING
1Radio Frequency
4-6 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

4. Position the patient with padding.

Review the Contact Point Heating section of the MR Safety Guide (#2381696) for patient positioning
information.
For more patient padding details, see Patient padding.
Position the patient so that there is no direct contact between the patient's skin and the bore of the magnet
or an RF coil.
Hand-to-hand, calf-to-calf, and elbow to side contact should be avoided. To help prevent a patient burn
from closed loops formed by clasped hands, hands touching the body, from thighs touching, or from the
patient’s breasts contacting the chest wall over a small area, insert nonconducting pads at least 0.25 inches
thick between touching parts.
Figure 4-1: Patient positioned with non-conducting pads
WARNING
5. Position the patient with straps. Insert the straps into the mounting track on the table and wrap the straps
around the patient. Straps are to stabilize, not restrain the patient.
Figure 4-2: Strap inserted in table mounting track
If you find it difficult to insert the strap into the track or move it in the track, then slightly bend the strap base
on a hard surface.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-7

Figure 4-3: Bend the strap base
Figure 4-4: Bent strap that more easily slides in the mounting track
6. Provide blankets, pillows, etc. for patient comfort.

7. Add dielectric pads if required.
Dielectric pads abdomen procedure
Dielectric pads neck procedure
8. If necessary, attach cardiac leads and the respiratory bellows.
Standard gating setup
Peripheral gating setup
Vector gating setup
Respiratory bellows procedure
WARNING
Do not use waveforms for physiological monitoring. Patient condition may not be reflected, resulting in
improper treatment.
4-8 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

9. Remove any accessory devices from the bore of the magnet that are not required for the procedure.
10. Keep electrically conductive material that must remain in the magnet bore from directly contacting the patient
by placing insulation between the conductive material and the patient.
11. Place a clean cotton sheet over the coil and comfort pad so the patient's skin does not come in contact with the
coil or the comfort pad.
12. Position RF cables down the center and directly out of the bore (i.e., not along side of the MR system or close to
the body coil or other transmit RF coil), without looping or crossing the cables.
Route the cables so there are no loops (conductive loops can be circular, u-shaped, or s-shaped) in any
cables in the magnet.
Use the appropriate gating cable for surface coil imaging.
Use only MR system recommended monitoring equipment, ECG leads, wires, electrodes, and other
components and accessories.
Follow all instructions for the proper operation of physiologic monitoring or other equipment provided by
the manufacturer of the device.
13. Provide the patient with the patient alert bulb so that the patient may signal you if needed.
If your patient tells you he or she is experiencing a burning sensation, stop the scan.
14. Explain breathing instructions, table movement, length of exam, gradient noise, adjustment of mirror on head
coil, etc.
Instruct the patient not to clasp his or her hands or cross his or her feet in the magnet bore.
Review the Acoustic Noise section of the MR Safety Guide.
Closely monitor the patient (especially those who are unconscious) during the procedure. If the patient reports
sensations of heating or other unusual sensation, discontinue the procedure immediately and perform a thorough
assessment of the situation.
Related topics
Transfer patient on the table
Transfer patient off of table
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-9

PATIENT PADDING
Padding introduction
Preventing patient warming is one of the most important safety measures you must take into consideration as you
prepare a patient for an MR exam. Appropriate RF padding and proper patient positioning are the most effective
means of preventing injury related to RF heating. The following are a few “golden rules” to remember as you position
and pad your patients:
Only use GE approved RF padding.

Approved padding must be a minimum of 0.25 inches (0.635 cm) thick.
Appropriate padding must be used EVERY time without exception.
Sheets and gowns are not a substitute for approved RF padding.
Never allow your patient’s skin to come in direct contact with the scanner bore or any surface coil or cable.
If a patient does not fit in the MR scanner bore with the required padding, another modality should be used to
image the patient.
While some of these rules may seen a little tough to follow at times, remember that RF injury, which can in extreme
cases include burns such as the one you see below, can happen very quickly and your patient may not have time to
warn you in time to prevent an injury.
Figure 4-5: Elbow RF Burn
The following are a series of short vignettes that will assist you in properly positioning and applying RF padding to
your patients. Should you need more information on prevention of patient warming than what is provided here, refer
to your surface coil and MR Safety Manuals. If you need help beyond the documentation please do not hesitate to
reach out to your local Applications Specialists.
Considerations
Whole body padding
Cardiac coil padding
Procedures
4-10 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan considerations
PATIENT PADDING
Cardiac coil padding tips for cardiac scan con-

siderations
RF padding with the cardiac coil is another example where you’ll need to follow your basic padding recommendations
to prevent contact with the scanner bore and prevent conductive anatomical loops, but there are a couple of additional
steps you’ll need to take to ensure patient safety.
The coil for cardiac scans does not require additional RF padding to be placed between the patient and the
anterior coil component, but you should use the manufacturers pad on the posterior component of the coil for
patient RF protection. You should also cover the patient with their gown before placing the anterior component
of the coil and make certain both the anterior and posterior elements are in alignment.
Secure the coil snugly, but comfortably with the straps.
As is the case of all surface coils ensure that the cables do not come in contact with the patient and that they
are not looped and that they are routed down the center of the bore. As you can see, there is cabling that we
need to isolate from the patient, so be sure to use as much padding as needed.
If you are using the coil for cardiac scans, it’s likely you are also using the ECG leads and cable. The rules for
the ECG cable are the same as the coil cable. Route the ECG cable down the center of the bore, do not loop the
ECG cable and do not allow it to come in contact with the coil cable.
Related topics
Patient padding procedure
Whole body padding
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-11

PATIENT PADDING
Surface coil padding considerations

Surface coils present different challenges from a patient RF padding perspective.
First rule of thumb is to remember to use all manufacturer provided padding to prevent motion and the
patient’s skin from coming in contact with the coil, and to also use additional padding if appropriate to secure
an opposing extremity to prevent contact with the coil which could also lead to burns or motion artifacts.
Just as with the whole body RF padding demonstration, you’ll need to make certain that the patient’s skin does
not come into contact with the scanner bore and that padding is placed between the hands and thighs to
prevent conductive loops.
A final safety consideration for surface coils is to ensure that the patient does not come into contact with the
coil cable, therefore you may need to use additional RF padding to protect the patient.
Care should also be taken to ensure the cable is not looped in the bore and that it is routed down the center of
the scanner bore.
Related topics
Whole body padding
4-12 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PATIENT PADDING

In this first example, some general guidelines are reviewed for positioning the RF padding.
Notice that padding is positioned not only at the patient’s sides to prevent their arms from touching the bore,
but that padding is also placed between the hands and thighs and between knees and ankles to prevent
forming conductive loops.
An important consideration when padding your patients is that you will need to double check the position of the
pads once the patient is in the bore. Table movement may dislodge padding and expose skin to the scanner
bore.
Related topics
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-13

PR OCEDU R ES
Landmark with the alignment light procedure

Axial, sagittal, and coronal alignment lights help position the area of interest at isocenter.
1. Press the Alignment light button on the Magnet control panel.
CAUTION
Exposing eyes to laser alignment lights may result in eye injury.
l Do not stare directly into the laser beam.

l Instruct patients to close their eyes to avoid eye exposure to the alignment light.
l Closely monitor all patients and prevent them from accidentally staring into the beam. Do not leave the
laser beam on after you position the patient.
2. Press the table movement buttons to advance the cradle until the axial alignment light rests at the desired
landmark. Confirm centering with the sagittal and coronal alignment lights.
3. Press Landmark button from the Magnet control panel. The cradle position reads zero.
4. Make sure all health lines are long enough to accommodate movement and then press Advance to Scan to
move the cradle to magnet isocenter.
The alignment lights automatically turn off.
5. Adjust the in-bore light and fan.
For details see the Patient comfort procedure.
6. Leave the scan room and enter the console room to begin scan prescription.
Close the scan room door during the acquisition to prevent RF leaks.
An open door prevents scanning.
Related topics
Patient handling
Table concept
4-14 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

PR OCEDU R ES

During scanning gradients produce noise that can exceed 99 dBA in the bore. Hearing protection is required to
prevent hearing impairment. Patients must close his or her eyes when the alignment light is on during positioning.
Follow these guidelines to ensure proper eye and ear protection for your patient.

Earplugs or a headphone system with stereo music. For details, see Acoustic Noise.
Earplugs reduce the intensity of the sound, while allowing your patient to hear normal conversations.
Headphone systems soften acoustic noise, but may impede verbal communication with patients while
the system is operating.
Description dB
E8801BA EAR Disposable Foam
29
Earplugs
E8801BB EAR Taperfit2 Foam
32
Earplugs
WARNING
Hearing protection is required for all people in the magnet room during a scan to prevent hearing impairment.
Acoustic levels may exceed 99 dB(A)
2. Make sure that the hearing protection device is worn properly.

Earplugs should be comfortable for the patient and inserted fully. Pliable earplugs compress when they are
rolled between the fingers and conform to the ear after they are inserted.
The headphone system should be audible and comfortable for the patient.
3. Instruct the patient to close his or her eyes when the alignment light is on.
The Laser Alignment Lights for patient positioning can cause eye injury.
CAUTION
Turn off the laser light after positioning the patient.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-15

PR OCEDU R ES

Use these steps to define a landmark. A scan cannot begin until a landmark has been established.
Landmark with IntelliTouch (Touch-n-Go) strip

If no landmark has been established, the in-room monitor does not display a green landmark line nor scan time.
Figure 4-6: In-room display with no green line and no scan time
1. Press the IntelliTouch landmark strip on either side of the table at the location where you want to establish a
landmark. The landmark location appears as a dotted green line on the in-room display.
Figure 4-7: Landmark location is dotted green line
4-16 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

2. Press Advance to Scan from the magnet controls panel within 5 seconds of pressing the Touch and Go strip.
The cradle position reads zero and the landmark changes from a dotted to solid green line on in the in-room
display.
If more than 5 seconds elapse between touching the Touch and Go strip and pressing Landmark or
Advance to Scan, the green landmark line is removed from the in-room display and the previous landmark
is used if one has been established for the current patient.
To display the dotted green landmark line, press the Touch and Go strip again, and then press Landmark or
Advance to Scan to establish the landmark.
Figure 4-8: Landmark is a solid green line
3. Press and hold Advance to Scan until the Stop Cradle button turns red.
The cradle advances to the landmark location.
Make sure all health lines are long enough to accommodate movement before you press and hold Advance
to Scan to move the cradle to magnet isocenter.
4. Adjust the in-bore light and fan.
For details see the Patient comfort procedure.
5. Leave the scan room and enter the console room to begin scan prescription.
Close the scan room door during the acquisition to prevent RF leaks.
An open door prevents scanning.
Related topics
Patient handling
Table concept
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-17

PR OCEDU R E

Once you have started scanning, you can remove the patient from the magnet bore and then return the patient to the
scan position without losing the landmark. This may be done to prep the patient for another phase of the exam, give
the anxious or claustrophobic patient a break between acquisitions, etc.
1. When the system is in between scans, press the Out button (fast or slow) to bring the patient out of the magnet
bore.
For table movement details, see Magnet controls.
2. When the patient is ready to be placed back into the magnet, press the Back to Landmark button.
Related topics
4-18 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Transfer the patient off the table procedure
PR OCEDU R E
Transfer the patient off the table procedure

Use these steps when the exam is finished to move the patient from the MR table to another mode of transportation.
1. Bring the patient out of the magnet using the table movement buttons while paying careful attention to all
health lines.
For table movement details, see Magnet controls.
2. Adjust the table height to safely transport the patient back to a gurney, wheel chair, or to exit the table and
walk out of the scan room.
3. Assist the patient out of the scan room.
CAUTION
position for a length of time, your patient may experience lightheadedness upon sitting up.
6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 4-19

PR OCEDU R ES

Dealing with patient emergencies requires special planning in the MR environment because of the magnetic field.
Certain equipment used for resuscitation does not function in a magnetic field, and ferrous items can become
projectiles. If a patient needs emergency medical attention during the scanning session, follow these guidelines:
1. Press Emergency Stop on the operator’s console or magnet enclosure.

The scan aborts.
The power disables the patient-handling and scan-related equipment.
2. Notify emergency personnel, if necessary.
Since ferromagnetic life support and related equipment cannot be brought into the magnet room, it must
await the patient outside the magnet room.
3. Quickly bring the patient out of the magnet bore. Refer to your specific product operator manual for details on
cradle emergency release.
4. Transfer the patient onto a non-ferrous gurney or transport and remove the patient from the magnet room as
quickly as possible.
It is important to have an assigned emergency area outside of the magnet room where you can take a
patient so that the emergency team can use the necessary equipment.
5. Follow your facility’s emergency protocol.
WARNING
console, or camera.
4-20 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14


SIGNA Voyager: Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIGNA Voyager: Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIGNA Voyager: Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIGNA Voyager

2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Strong Magnetic Field

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 i

ii 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Applicable Regulations and Standards

Table 3-1: EAC label (CU TR 020 / 2011)

Ukrainian mark of conformity

Authorized Representative in Malaysia

Regulatory Markings-UDI Label

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 i

Figure 3-1: Example of a UDI linear barcode

Figure 3-2: Example of a UDI DataMatrix code

Medical Device Directive

Manufacturer of compatible GE accessory MR coils

ii 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Turkey importer details

reorient or relocated the affected devices;

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 iii

acceptable for Continuous Operation

Indications for use

iv 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Strong Magnetic Field i

Quick guides introduction QuickGuide-1

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 1

Setup links and scan QuickGuide-39

Chapter 1: Read me first 1-1

TOC- 2 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 3

Role-based membership procedure 1-104

Chapter 2: Safety 2-1

TOC- 4 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 5

Emergency stop 2-94

TOC- 6 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 7

Magnet controls introduction 3-70

TOC- 8 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Chapter 4: Patient handling 4-1

Chapter 5: Scan workflow 5-1

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 9

Anatomical Region procedure 2 5-18

TOC- 10 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 11

AutoVoice introduction 5-187

TOC- 12 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

Chapter 6: Scan parameters 6-1

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 13

Distortion Correction consideration 6-18

TOC- 14 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 15

4DFLOW: scan procedure 6-154

TOC- 16 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 17

FSE-IR scan considerations 6-365

TOC- 18 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14

6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14 TOC- 19

Imaging Options procedure 6-570

TOC- 20 6339225-399 English (06/2020) Rev.14